STAAD - Pro Fundamentals STAAD - Pro V8i Ben

STAAD.
Pro Fundamentals
STAAD.Pro V8i
Bentley Institute Course Guide
TRN012780-1/0005
Trademarks
AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered
trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service
mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
All ther brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Patents
United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.
Copyrights
©2000-2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
All rights reserved.
STAAD.Pro Fundamentals ii May-10

Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents
Model Generation _________________________________________ 1

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 1
Module Prerequisites ________________________________________ 1
Module Objectives___________________________________________ 1
Introductory Knowledge ______________________________________ 2
Questions ______________________________________________ 2
Answers ________________________________________________ 3
The Start Page ______________________________________________ 4
Automatic Backup ________________________________________ 6
Coordinate System Orientation and Base Unit System ___________ 7
Getting Started _____________________________________________ 11
The STAAD.Pro Screen ____________________________________ 11
Setting up a Job __________________________________________ 13
STAAD.Pro Structural Entities _______________________________ 13
Creating Structure Geometry __________________________________ 15
Working with Grids _______________________________________ 15
Entering Structure Geometry _______________________________ 20
Displaying Structure Labels_________________________________ 23
Undo and Redo Tools _____________________________________ 24
Add Beams Tool _________________________________________ 25
Creating Geometry Using Tables ____________________________ 27
Using the Structure Wizard_________________________________ 29
Editing Structure Geometry____________________________________ 34
Cursor Selection Modes ___________________________________ 36
Using Select Options from the Menu Bar ______________________ 36
Deleting Members Graphically ______________________________ 37
Using the Tables to Delete or Modify Geometry ________________ 37
Modify the Structure Geometry with the STAAD.Pro Editor _______ 39
Merging Members________________________________________ 41
Splitting a Beam into two or more Members ___________________ 42
Working with Intersecting Members _________________________ 43
Renumbering Beams and Nodes_____________________________ 44
Using Copy and Paste on Nodes _____________________________ 46
Using Copy and Paste on Members __________________________ 47
Option to Split Member if New Node is Added on Member _______ 48
Mirroring Structure Geometry ______________________________ 50
Using “Translational Repeat” _______________________________ 51
May-10 iii STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Table of Contents
Using “Circular Repeat” ___________________________________ 55

Identifying and Removing “Orphan Nodes” ____________________ 58
Combining two STAAD.Pro Models by Copy and Paste ___________ 59
Viewing Structure Geometry___________________________________ 61
Working with Structural Tool Tip ____________________________ 61
Working with the Query Function ___________________________ 62
Controlling Structure Label Appearance_______________________ 64
Displaying Member Lengths and Distance Between Nodes________ 65
Controlling the View ______________________________________ 66
Displaying only Selected Objects in the Main Window ___________ 70
Isolating a Portion of the Structure into its own View ____________ 71
Module Review _____________________________________________ 72
Questions ______________________________________________ 72
Answers ________________________________________________ 73
Finite Element Modeling ____________________________________ 75

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 75
Questions ______________________________________________ 76
Answers ________________________________________________ 77
Introduction to Finite Element Analysis __________________________ 78
Guidelines for Mesh Density________________________________ 81
Guidelines for Element Shape_______________________________ 83
Resolving Poorly Shaped Plates in a Model ____________________ 85
Creating Individual Finite Elements______________________________ 86
Snap Node/Plate Tool _____________________________________ 86
Add Plates Tools _________________________________________ 91
Mesh Generation____________________________________________ 92
Using Structure Wizard to Generate a Mesh ___________________ 92
Creating a Mesh from a “Super Element” _____________________ 96
Using the Generate Surface Meshing Command ________________ 98
Using the Editor to Create a Mesh ___________________________ 106
Plate Specifications __________________________________________ 107
Additional Considerations _____________________________________ 108
Module Review _____________________________________________ 109
Questions ______________________________________________ 109
Answers ________________________________________________ 110
Property Assignment ______________________________________ 111

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 111
Questions ______________________________________________ 112
STAAD.Pro Fundamentals iv May-10

Table of Contents
Answers ________________________________________________ 113

Member/Plate Orientation and Local Coordinate System ____________ 114
Benefits of the Local Coordinate System ______________________ 115
Default Orientation of the Member Local Coordinate System _____ 117
Default Orientation of the Plate Local Coordinate System ________ 118
Model Geometry ____________________________________________ 120
Working with Groups_________________________________________ 121
General Tab ________________________________________________ 125
Member Property ________________________________________ 126
Modify Section Database __________________________________ 135
Modifying Member/Plate Orientation ________________________ 136
Specifications _______________________________________________ 146
Node Specifications_______________________________________ 147
Beam Specifications ______________________________________ 148
Plate Specifications _______________________________________ 154
Toggle Specification and Highlight Assigned Geometry ___________ 156
Supports___________________________________________________ 157
Fixed and Pinned_________________________________________ 157
Fixed But _______________________________________________ 158
Enforced and Enforced But _________________________________ 158
Multilinear Springs _______________________________________ 159
Foundations_____________________________________________ 160
Inclined ________________________________________________ 161
Tension / Compression Only Springs _________________________ 162
Loads and Load Definitions ____________________________________ 164
Definitions ______________________________________________ 164
Load Cases______________________________________________ 164
Load Items ______________________________________________ 167
Load Envelopes __________________________________________ 167
Materials __________________________________________________ 177
Module Review _____________________________________________ 178
Questions ______________________________________________ 178
Answers ________________________________________________ 179
Analyzing the Model _______________________________________ 181

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 181
Questions ______________________________________________ 182
Answers ________________________________________________ 183
Preparing for the Analysis _____________________________________ 184
Understanding the STAAD.Pro Input File ______________________ 187
About the Print Analysis Results Command ____________________ 189
Performing the Analysis_______________________________________ 191
How STAAD.Pro Generates Results ______________________________ 192
May-10 v STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Table of Contents
Viewing the Output File_______________________________________ 193

Module Review _____________________________________________ 195
Questions ______________________________________________ 195
Answers ________________________________________________ 196
The Post Processor ________________________________________ 197

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 197
Questions ______________________________________________ 198
Answers ________________________________________________ 199
Introduction to the Post Processor ______________________________ 200
Coordinate Systems for Reporting Results _____________________ 200
Refresher on Local Coordinate System________________________ 201
Sign Conventions for Reporting Member End Forces ____________ 201
Activating the Post Processor __________________________________ 204
Node Results _______________________________________________ 208
Displaying the Displacement Diagram ________________________ 208
Displacement Tables ______________________________________ 210
Reaction Results _________________________________________ 213
Beam Analysis Results ________________________________________ 215
Beam Forces ____________________________________________ 215
Beam Stresses ___________________________________________ 219
Beam Graphs ____________________________________________ 223
Verifying the Results _________________________________________ 226
Viewing Results with Member Query ____________________________ 228
Using Structural Tool Tip to View Results _________________________ 231
Annotating the Structure Diagram ______________________________ 232
Animation _________________________________________________ 236
Plotting Output from STAAD.Pro________________________________ 238
Simple Query _______________________________________________ 239
Module Review _____________________________________________ 243
Questions ______________________________________________ 243
Answers ________________________________________________ 244
Steel Design ______________________________________________ 245

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 245
Questions ______________________________________________ 246
Answers ________________________________________________ 247
Introduction to STAAD.Pro Steel Design __________________________ 248
Specifying the Design Code ____________________________________ 249
Steel Design Parameters ______________________________________ 250
STAAD.Pro Fundamentals vi May-10

Table of Contents
Yield Strength ___________________________________________ 251

Slenderness Checking _____________________________________ 251
Deflection Checking ______________________________________ 253
Using the Select Parameters Button__________________________ 254
Defining Parameters ______________________________________ 255
Assigning Parameters to the Steel Design Model________________ 257
Code Checking ______________________________________________ 259
Performing the Code Check ________________________________ 259
Reviewing the STAAD Analysis Messages ______________________ 260
Checking Steel Design Results_______________________________ 264
Member Selection ___________________________________________ 268
Designing Steel Members __________________________________ 268
Grouping the Member Selections____________________________ 272
Finalizing the Design ______________________________________ 276
Additional Comments Regarding Design Commands_____________ 279
Module Review _____________________________________________ 281
Questions ______________________________________________ 281
Answers ________________________________________________ 282
Concrete Design __________________________________________ 283

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 283
Questions ______________________________________________ 284
Answers ________________________________________________ 285
Concrete Design Example Model _______________________________ 286
Defining Model Geometry_____________________________________ 286
Defining Member Properties___________________________________ 288
Adding the Supports _________________________________________ 291
Defining Beam - Slab Monolithic Action __________________________ 292
Defining the Slab ____________________________________________ 293
Tools for Viewing Plates ______________________________________ 296
Plate Orientation and Local Coordinate System ____________________ 297
Defining Plate Properties______________________________________ 301
Assigning Specifications_______________________________________ 302
Node Specifications_______________________________________ 302
Beam Specifications ______________________________________ 307
Plate Specifications _______________________________________ 310
Assigning Loads _____________________________________________ 311
Proper Loading to Incorporate P-Delta Effects__________________ 316
Providing Analysis Instructions to Incorporate P-Delta Effects ________ 320
Reinforced Concrete Slab Design _______________________________ 322
Understanding Reinforced Concrete Slab Design Results _________ 326
Reinforced Concrete Beam Design ______________________________ 328
Understanding Reinforced Concrete Beam Design Results ________ 332
May-10 vii STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Table of Contents
Reinforced Concrete Column Design ____________________________ 339

Understanding Reinforced Concrete Column Design Results ______ 342
Reinforced Concrete Take Off Command _________________________ 344
Understanding Reinforced Concrete Take Off Results ____________ 345
Additional Concrete Modeling Examples _________________________ 346
Module Review _____________________________________________ 347
Questions ______________________________________________ 347
Answers ________________________________________________ 348
Exercise Problems _________________________________________ 349

Module Overview ___________________________________________ 349
Exercise Problem One ________________________________________ 350
Exercise Problem Two ________________________________________ 351
Exercise Problem Three _______________________________________ 353
Exercise Problem Four ________________________________________ 357
Exercise Problem Five ________________________________________ 361
Concrete Design _________________________________________ 364
Exercise Problem Six _________________________________________ 366
STAAD.Pro Fundamentals viii May-10

Model Generation
Module Overview
This module covers the fundamentals of model generation in STAAD.Pro. Various
methods are demonstrated to create, edit, and view structure geometry. Topics
include the Pre Processor's graphical environment, Structure Wizard, the data
tables, and the input file. The content of this module is specifically oriented
toward models consisting of beams, braces, and columns (linear entities). The
topic of modeling with plate elements (two-dimensional entities) is covered in a
different module.
Module Prerequisites
• Familiarity with general principles of structural engineering
Module Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create model geometry using a variety of available techniques
• Identify convenient and efficient ways to perform specific modeling tasks
• Describe the default global coordinate system
May-10 1 Model Generation

Introductory Knowledge
Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
Questions
1 A computerized structural analysis is relatively insensitive to the accuracy
of the model itself.
• True
• False
2 The ability to create analytical models with manual modeling techniques is
outdated now that it is possible to import models from DXF files.
• True
• False
3 For many structures, a Cartesian coordinate system lends itself to
efficiently defining structure geometry.
• True
• False
Model Generation 2 May-10

Answers
1 A computerized structural analysis is relatively insensitive to the accuracy
of the model itself.
False
The results of such an analysis are entirely dependent upon the proper
construction of the analytical model including accurate geometry,
member orientations, and member connectivity.
2 The ability to create analytical models with manual modeling techniques is
outdated now that it is possible to import models from DXF files.
False
Even when importing model geometry from a DXF file, it is almost always
necessary to perform some manual modeling steps to complete the
working model. So, a working knowledge of the available tools and
techniques is essential.
3 For many structures, a Cartesian coordinate system lends itself to
efficiently defining structure geometry.
True
The Cartesian coordinate system tends to be the most universal system.
STAAD.Pro has implemented the Cartesian and cylindrical coordinate
systems.

The Start Page
The Start Page

Open STAAD.Pro by double clicking on the icon on your desktop or navigating to
the program location through the Start menu. The STAAD.Pro Start Page is
displayed.

The Start Page
The Start Page is divided into five sections that can be used to achieve the
following:
1 Project Tasks:
• Start a New Project.
• Open an existing Project using a browse dialog enhanced with a model
preview window.
• Open an existing Project from ProjectWise, Bentley's engineering
project team collaboration system.
• Set the program behavior with the Configuration options.
• Set up the parameters for the automatic Backup function.
• Access the License Management Tool to view and set configuration
variables for the Bentley SELECT license, such as the server name and
site activation key.
2 Recent Files:
• Access the last 6 models opened.
• See a preview of each model in the list by hovering the cursor over the
model name.
• View the file path and project information entered in a specific Job Info
dialog.
3 Help Topics:
• Access the online Help document.
• Locate technical support centers and find contact details.
• Find the latest information on the program online from the Product
News link.
• Access the growing STAAD.Pro online knowledge base.
• Determine What's New in the latest release of STAAD.Pro.
4 License Configuration: Indicates which SELECT licenses are being used by
the current session of STAAD.Pro using the following color coding scheme:
• Green: If the license is available it is marked with a green circle.
• Grey: Licenses that have not been selected are marked with a grey
circle.
• Red: If the selected license cannot be obtained or is not available from
the server, it will be shown with a red circle.

The Start Page
5 STAAD News:
• Displays the most current information about STAAD and Bentley, such
as program updates, seminars, and training courses, using an RSS
(Really Simple Syndication) reader.
• Each news items is identified with a title that acts as a link to a web site
containing more information on that particular item.
Automatic Backup
Click Backup Manager in the Project Tasks area of the Start Page to see the
following features:
• STAAD.Pro has the ability to perform automatic saves at a user-specified
frequency to protect against loss of data.
• Backup Manager also provides tools to view, compare, open, and restore
backup saves from earlier times.
Hint: Even with powerful backup and restore features, good practice would dictate
executing manual saves after significant modeling steps by using File > Save
from the Menu Bar. Under normal conditions this is a user preference item.
Note: In order to ensure uniformity, this training session is accompanied by a dataset

of standardized STAAD.Pro training files. To avoid frequent messages during
training, disable the Auto Save option by removing the check from the Enable
Auto Save checkbox, and then click OK.

The Start Page
Coordinate System Orientation and Base Unit System

Click Configuration… in the Project Tasks area of the Start Page.
1 Click the Global Axis Orientation tab. Note the following two options for
the vertical axis of the structure:
• The location of entities in a STAAD.Pro model is defined with reference
to the origin of the global (Cartesian) coordinate system. The default
orientation of the global coordinate system is that the Y axis points in
the vertical direction, and a plan view is represented by the XZ plane.
• This coordinate system orientation may be different than that used in
some CAD programs. To address this, STAAD.Pro provides an option
called Set Z Up. This option may be used in situations where model
geometry is being imported from a CAD file where the Z axis has been
oriented vertically. However, be aware that the use of the Set Z Up
option will eliminate the ability to use some other functions in the
program; the wind load generator is one example.
STAAD.Pro also provides tools for re-orienting the coordinate axis when
importing or exporting to a CAD program. It is probably a better idea to
reorient the coordinate system when importing or exporting and to use
STAAD.Pro's default global coordinate system, rather than using Set Z Up.
2 Click the Base Unit tab in the Configure Program dialog. Two base unit
systems are available: English and Metric. Note the following:
• The base unit selection dictates the system of units used internally to
store numerical values during calculations. It also dictates the default
input units and the default system of units used to display results in
tables and reports.
• Good practice is to set the base unit system so it is consistent with the
input units that will be used in the current working session. If the
English units dataset files will be used, set the Base Unit selection to
English. If the metric units dataset files will be used, set the Base Unit
selection to Metric. In Instructor-led classes, the instructor will
indicate the Base Unit system to select. If any change is made to the
Base Unit selection, click Accept to complete the change. If no change
is required, then click Cancel.

The Start Page
• Regardless of the base unit setting, it is possible to change the current

input units on-the-fly during the modeling process. However, be aware
that mixing unit systems will require an internal conversion that carries
a finite number of significant digits. Because these conversions cannot
be mathematically exact, converting between unit systems can be a
potential source of modeling issues if round-off error becomes
significant.
• A default base unit setting was chosen at the time of installation, but
the base unit setting can be changed on the Start Page by selecting File
> Configure… and then using the Select Base Unit pull down menu on
the Base Unit tab. (Note that it is NOT possible to change the base unit
selection when a model is open. All models must be closed in order to
access the Configure… menu.)
 Exercise: Starting a New Project

1 If STAAD.Pro is not already open, double click on the icon on the desktop
or navigate to the program location through the Start menu.
2 Click New Project in the Project Tasks box on the STAAD.Pro Start Page.
The New dialog provides input for:
• Structure type - See structure type descriptions below.
• File Name
• File Location
• Length Units
• Force Units
Four structure types are available:
• Space:
• Acceptable for any configuration of model geometry and loading.
• Permits three-dimensional structures.
• Permits loading in any direction.
• Permits deformations in all three global axes.
• Coordinate system follows right-hand rule.
• Best practice is to orient Y axis up (so gravity pulls in negative Y-
direction), see “Notes about Coordinate System Orientation”
below.

The Start Page
• Plane:
• Acceptable only for two-dimensional models in the XY-plane with
no loading or deformations perpendicular to this plane.
• All loads and deformations are in the plane of the structure.
• Floor:
• Acceptable for two-dimensional models in the XZ-plane with
loading and deformations perpendicular to this plane.
• All loads and deformations are parallel to the global Y-axis.
• Truss:
• Permits loading in any direction, but members only provide axial
resistance. Members cannot resist bending or shear loads.
• Permits three-dimensional structures.
• Permits deformations in all three global directions.
• Coordinate system follows right-hand rule.
Hint: Structure types Plane, Floor and Truss all conserve system resources by
taking advantage of declared conditions to reduce the complexity of the
stiffness matrix. With today's computers, this is no longer necessary, but
the program still provides these options for backward compatibility
with models that were created using these structure types.
3 Select the following New Project Parameters:
• Structure Type: Space
• File Name: My Model
• File Location: The Location field provides a default path where project
files will be stored. To change the Location click the (...) button, and
browse to the location where you wish to save the file. In Instructor-
led classes, the instructor will indicate the path to use.
• Length Units: Foot {Meter}
• Force Units: KiloPound {KiloNewton}
4 Click the Next button.

The Start Page
A second dialog appears offering quick access to a variety of common

“next steps”, including:
• Add Beam: Starts the program with the Snap Node/Beam dialog active,
providing a snap grid to begin constructing a structure consisting of
beams and columns.
• Add Plate: Starts the program with the Snap Node/Plate dialog active,
plates.
• Add Solid: Starts the program with the Snap Node/Solid dialog active,
solids.
• Open Structure Wizard: Opens a library of parametrically scalable
prototype structure templates that can be used to quickly generate
model geometry.
• Open STAAD Editor: Allows you to build your model using the STAAD
syntax commands in the STAAD editor (non-graphical interface).
• Edit Job Information: Opens the Job Information dialog where you can
enter information relative to the job, such as client name, job number,
comments, etc.
5 Select the Edit Job Information option and click Finish.

Getting Started
Getting Started
The STAAD.Pro Screen

The components of the STAAD.Pro Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen are
identified in the figure below.
Menu Bar Main Window Toolbar
Page Control Status Bar Data Area
1 Menu Bar
• Located near the top of the screen.
• Gives access to all of the STAAD.Pro menu functions.
• Many of the same functions are also available from the Toolbar and
from the Page Control.

Getting Started
2 Tool Bar
• Located near the top and left side of the screen.
• Gives access to the most frequently used commands.
• Individual tool bars are dockable - layout can be reconfigured.
• Customized tool bars can be created.
• Hover the cursor over any icon for Tool Tip Help.
3 Main Window
• Central area of screen where the model and graphical results are
shown.
• Background color can be set to either white or black using the
Configuration… option in the Project Tasks section of the Start Page.
4 Status Bar
• Displayed at the bottom of the screen.
• Presents helpful information regarding the status of the program.
• Displays pertinent information for the current page, such as hints for
using the current command, current program operating mode, cursor
position, current input units, etc.
5 Page Control
• A set of tabs to the left of the Main Window.
• Page Control can be closed from within the Mode menu to free the
screen area for other uses.
• Each tab allows you to perform specific tasks.
• Organization of the Tabs, from top to bottom, represents the logical
sequence of operations in STAAD.Pro.
• Generally progress through the tabs from top to bottom and enter all
the data that are relevant to your project.
• Tab names may or may not appear on the tabs depending on screen
resolution and size of STAAD.Pro window, but the icons on the Page
Control tabs always appear.
• Each tab contains sub-tabs.
• The tabs that display depend on the current Mode of operation, which
can be set from the Mode menu in the Menu Bar.

Getting Started
6 Data Area
• Generally appears on the right side of the screen.
• Displays dialogs, tables, lists, and so forth.
• Context-sensitive to the type of operation being performed.
Setting up a Job
Setup is the top tab in the Page Control area when in Modeling mode. When the
Job sub-tab is selected, the Job Info dialog is displayed in the Data Area.
The Job Info dialog provides a way to define data such as job name, client, job
number, engineer and checker initials and dates, and so forth. Information
entered in the Job Info dialog will be printed in the output reports and shown in
the Recent Files section of the Start Page. The use of this dialog is optional.
STAAD.Pro Structural Entities

STAAD.Pro provides five types of entities to use in modeling structures:
1 Beams:
• Linear structural members.
• The terms “member” and “beam” are synonymous.
• Use of the term “beam” should not be taken to imply that the member
cannot resist an axial load. (Beam entities are used to model beams,
columns, braces, etc…)
• Selected in STAAD.Pro by either the Beams Cursor or the Geometry
Cursor.
2 Nodes:
• Points of connectivity between structural entities.
• The terms “joint” and “node” are synonymous.
• Selected in STAAD.Pro by either the Nodes Cursor or the Geometry
Cursor.

Getting Started
3 Plates:
• Finite elements commonly used to model “surface structures” such as
walls, slabs, plates or shells.
• May be either 3-noded (triangular) or 4-noded (quadrilateral).
• Selected in STAAD.Pro by either the Plates Cursor or the Geometry
Cursor.
4 Solids:
• Finite elements that enable the solution of structural problems
involving three dimensional stresses.
• Solids are useful for solving problems such as stress distribution in
concrete dams, soil and rock strata, etc.
• Solid elements typically consist of 8 nodes.
• Solids most commonly take the form of cubes, but, by collapsing
various nodes together, an 8-noded solid element can be degenerated
into forms with 5 to 7 nodes.
• Selected in STAAD.Pro by either the Solids Cursor or the Geometry
Cursor.
5 Surfaces:
• Useful in the rapid modeling of walls, slabs and other planar surfaces.
• Similar to plate elements in terms of structural behavior, but faster and
easier to model.
• The entire wall or slab can be modeled with just a few “Surface”
entities.
• When the program performs the analysis, it automatically subdivides
the surface into elements.
• Selected in STAAD.Pro by either the Surface Cursor or the Geometry
Cursor.

Creating Structure Geometry
Hint: If you are unsure of whether to use Plate elements or Solid elements,
remember this: when the ratio of the width of the shortest side of the
structure to the thickness is less than 10, consider using solid elements.
Working with Grids

Grids assist with model construction by providing dimensional control and snap
points. You can create and save multiple grid systems in one model, but only one
grid system can be displayed at a time. There are three types of grids that can be
defined: Linear, Radial and Irregular:
1 Linear
• Two-dimensional system of regularly spaced linear (but not necessarily
orthogonal) construction lines creating a plane of snap points.
• The plane can be defined as being coincident with the global XY, XZ, or
YZ planes, or it can be rotated about one of the global axes.
• Location of the origin of the grid system is defined with respect to the
global X, Y, and Z coordinate system.

2 Radial
• Two-dimensional system of regularly spaced radial and circumferential
construction lines creating a plane of snap points.
YZ planes, or it can be rotated about one of the global axes.
• Location of the origin of the grid system is defined with respect to the
global X, Y, and Z coordinate system.
• Well-suited for drawing circular models using piece-wise linear
techniques.
• The following diagram shows an example of a radial grid system:
3 Irregular
• Two-dimensional system of regularly or irregularly spaced linear (but
not necessarily orthogonal) construction lines creating a plane of snap
points.
YZ planes, or it can be rotated about one of the global axes. In
addition, Irregular grid systems offer a third orientation option called
“Arbitrary Plane,” which allows them to be oriented in any arbitrary
plane by specifying two sets of coordinate points that define the grid x
and grid y directions.
• Spacing of the grid lines can vary in both directions.
• Spacing between successive grid lines is specified in the Relative
gridline distances field using a space-delimited format.

 Exercise: Setting up Grids

1 Ensure that the model named My Model.std is open.
2 Click the Geometry tab in the Page Control area.
3 Click the Beam sub-tab.
A Default Grid appears in the Main Window. We will be using the Default
Grid to construct the model momentarily.
The Snap Node/Beam dialog appears in the Data Area. Grid layout is
controlled by this dialog. To explore the available controls for grid
creation, we will first create some additional grids for demonstration
purposes.
Hint: You can also access the Snap Node/Beam dialog by clicking Geometry >
Snap Grid/Node > Beam, or by clicking on the Snap Node/Beam icon
in the Geometry toolbar.
4 Click Create… in the Snap Node/Beam dialog.

Note that the list at the top of this secondary dialog is currently set to
Linear, but also offers the Radial, and Irregular grid type options. Keep it
set to Linear for this example.
5 Type Training Grid in the Name field, and then click OK.
Training Grid (Linear) now appears in the list of available grid systems in
the Snap Node/Beam dialog, but Default Grid (Linear) is still the active grid
system.
6 Click the checkbox in front of Training Grid (Linear) to make it the active
grid system.
Default Grid (Linear) is automatically deselected, and the Main Window
now displays the new grid.
7 Click the Edit… button at the bottom of the Snap Node/Beam dialog to
redisplay the controls for this grid.
8 Click the X-Y radio button in the Plane category.
9 Click the X-X radio button in the Angle of Plane° category and enter a value
of 45 in the field to rotate this grid 45 degrees about the X axis.
Note that you will see these changes taking effect immediately on the grid
system currently displayed on the screen.
10 Enter (10, 10, 0) {(3, 3, 0)} in the Grid Origin fields.

Hint: The Grid Origin can also be changed from the default location of (0, 0, 0)
by using the icon in the Grid Origin field, seen below, to select an
existing node in the model to represent the new grid origin.
11 Set the number of Construction Lines to 12 in both the X and Y directions

by clicking the up arrow in the column labeled Right.
12 Set the Spacing field to 1 ft {1 m} in both the X and Y directions.
13 Keep the Skew° set to 0 in both the X and Y directions.
Warning: Use caution to set the correct Spacing value when using skewed
grids. The Spacing value is not measured perpendicular to the grid
lines to which it applies.
14 Click OK.
Note: Similar controls exist for the Radial and Irregular grid systems.
The Active Grid Labels Setup category in the Snap Node/Beam dialog
controls how the labels will appear for the currently selected grid system
whenever it is the active grid. Since these settings are specific to individual
grid systems, they can be set differently for each grid system in the model.
• The End(s) lists offer different options for labeling the ends of the
gridlines.
• The Frequency setting provides a way to control the frequency of grid
labels; labels on every single grid line, every second grid line, every
third grid line, etc.
• The X, Y and Z buttons toggle the display of X, Y, and Z coordinate
labels for grid lines.

• The combinations of settings that can be produced using the Local

Coordinate checkbox and the Rel.Coords checkbox provide a variety of
alternatives for viewing the coordinates of grid lines:
Relative Coordinate is NOT Relative Coordinate IS

Selected Selected
Local Grid labels represent the Grid labels represent the
Coordinate is coordinates of grid line relative change in the
NOT intersections referenced to coordinates of grid line
Selected the origin of the global intersections measured
coordinate system and parallel to the axes of the
measured parallel to the global coordinate system.
axes of the global
coordinate system.
Local Grid labels represent Grid labels represent the
Coordinate coordinates of grid line relative change in the
IS Selected intersections referenced to coordinates of grid line
the origin of the grid and intersections measured in
measured parallel to the the plane of the grid and
axes of the grid. parallel to the X and Y axes
of the grid.
• The Axis Ids checkbox toggles the display of an axis prefix on each grid
label. This can be helpful to establish the orientation of the X and Y
axes in a grid system.
The buttons in the Snap Node/Beam dialog are described below:
• The Font… button provides access to options that control the
appearance of grid labels.
• The Delete… button deletes the selected grid system.
• The Copy… button allows the selected grid system to be copied and
provided with a modified name.
• The Rename… button provides a way to edit the name of the selected
grid system.
• The Import… button provides two options for importing grid systems
into the current model: import grid files (with the .grd file extension)
that have been created in other STAAD.Pro models; or, import DXF files
for use as grids.
15 Keep the current file open for use in the next section.

Entering Structure Geometry

 Exercise: Drawing Beams with the Snap Node/Beam Tool
1 Click the Default Grid (Linear) checkbox in the list of grids in the Snap
Node/Beam dialog.
Hint: If the Snap Node/Beam dialog is not currently displayed, it can be

recalled by clicking Geometry > Snap Grid/Node > Beam.
The default grid appears in the Main Window.
Note: If working in metric, edit the spacing values to 0.25 m as shown below
and then click OK:

2 Follow the steps outlined below to construct this simple braced frame:
7 ft {2m}
8 ft {2.5 m}
The Snap Node/Beam button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog should be

automatically activated, so that the cursor snaps to grid intersections. (If
not, click the Snap Node/Beam button.)
3 Notice the text prompt in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen that
says, “Add nodes/beams to line intersections using cursor. Hold Ctrl key
down to reset.”
In its default mode, the Snap Node/Beam tool only snaps to grid
intersections. However, note that the Snap Node/Beam dialog has a
checkbox labeled Snap to existing nodes too. When this checkbox is
activated, the Snap Node/Beam tool will be able to snap to any node in
the model. This can be useful if it ever becomes necessary to snap to an
existing node that is:
• Out of the plane of the grid, or
• Outside the extents of the grid, or
• Between grid intersection points.
4 Click at the origin (0, 0, 0) to create the first node.
The “hot spot” appears as a red dot at the origin, and a line will start
“rubber-banding” from the “hot spot”.
5 Move up the grid and click again at (0, 8, 0) {(0, 2.5, 0)} to draw the first
member.
The starting end of a member is also referred to as End A or Node A; the
other end is called End B or Node B.
Now the “hot spot” appears at the end of the first member, indicating that
it will be the starting point for the next member.
6 Move to (7, 8, 0) {(2, 2.5, 0)} and click again.

7 Move to (7, 0, 0) {(2, 0, 0)} and click one more time.

The coordinates of the current cursor position are always provided in the
Status Bar at the lower right corner of the screen.
Hint: Use grids to their best advantage. This grid could have been set up with
the appropriate number and spacing of horizontal and vertical lines so
that the grid represented the outside dimensions of the portal frame.
This would have eliminated the need to constantly check the cursor
location by counting grid lines or looking at the coordinate readout.
Hint: Another good way to set the grid for this example would have been to
set up the grid with 1 line to the right of the origin in the positive X
direction, and 1 line above the origin in the positive Y direction, then set
the spacing to the appropriate dimension in each direction.
8 Move to (0, 8, 0) {(0, 2.5, 0)} and click to draw the first diagonal member.
To draw the second diagonal, it will be necessary to reset the “hot spot”.
The Status Bar in the lower left corner of the screen displays some
instructions for the currently active command or program mode.
Remember to check this area any time you are in doubt about what
response the program expects next. Currently, it provides a hint regarding
use of the Control (Ctrl) key to reset the “hot spot.”
9 Press and hold the Control (Ctrl) key.
10 Move the cursor around and notice that the line is no longer “rubber-
banding” from the previous click location. The last node will no longer be
considered the starting point of the next member.
11 While holding the Control (Ctrl) key, click on the node at (0, 0, 0) {(0, 0, 0)}.
12 Release the Control (Ctrl) key, and note that the cursor is now “rubber-
banding” from the node at (0, 0, 0) {(0, 0, 0)}.
13 Click on the node at (7, 8, 0) {(2, 2.5, 0)} to draw the second diagonal.
14 Click the Snap Node/Beam button to stop drawing beams.

 Exercise: Adjusting Grids on the Fly
Note: Grids can be adjusted on the fly. Nodes that have already been placed
will NOT move with the grid. Instead, nodes maintain their coordinates
once they have been placed. To demonstrate:
1 Make sure Default Grid (Linear) is still the active grid system, and then
click the Edit… button.
2 Edit the Spacing of the X grid lines to 1.5 {0.35} and press the Tab key.
3 Note that the grid changed in the Main Window, but the existing nodes did
not move with the grid.
4 Edit the Spacing of the X grid lines back to 1 {0.25}, and then click OK.
Displaying Structure Labels

STAAD.Pro offers the ability to display beam and node number labels, as well as
many other types of labels, directly on the structure diagram in the Main Window.
 Exercise: Displaying Structural Labels

1 Right-click in the Main Window.
A pop-up menu appears with some of the most frequently used
commands in STAAD.Pro.
2 Select the Labels… command. The Diagrams dialog opens with the Labels
page active.
Hint: The Labels page can also be accessed quickly from the Symbols and
Labels icon on the Structure toolbar.
The Labels page is an extremely useful page that is used frequently. It

provides options for labeling Nodes, Beams (Members), Plates, Solids,
Surfaces, Physical Members, Loads, Properties, General display
information, etc...
3 Click the Node Numbers checkbox in the Nodes category and the Beam
Numbers checkbox in the Beams category.
Before closing the Labels dialog, note that “Hotkeys” are shown in
parenthesis following the various label names. These hotkeys are available
for most of the labeling options.

Hint: A reminder is shown at the bottom of the Labels page indicating, “For
quick access to the labels using keyboard hotkeys, press Shift + the
letter shown in brackets.” For example, to display node numbers, simply
hold down the Shift key and press the N key without leaving the Main
Window. For Labels indicated with the carat symbol, ^, and a letter in
parenthesis, press Control (Ctrl) + Shift + the letter shown in
parenthesis.
4 Click OK.
Notice that the node and beam numbers now appear in the Main Window,
next to the corresponding beam or node.
5 Hold down the Shift key and press the N key repeatedly. Note how the
hotkey for node numbers can be used to toggle them on and off without
having to leave the Main Window.
6 Ensure that node numbers and beam numbers are displayed, and then
leave this file open for use in the next section.
Undo and Redo Tools

STAAD.Pro has Undo and Redo tools that are accessible from toolbar icons or
through the Edit menu.
When accessed from the toolbar icons, both tools provide the ability to Undo/
Redo multiple commands at one time. The pulldown arrow to the right of the icon
opens a list of modeling steps with the most recent command on the top of the
list. Double-clicking on an item in the list will Undo/Redo back to that command.
STAAD.Pro will purge the Undo cache in the GUI if changes are made in the
command file editor and the Save command is issued. Nothing that was done in
the GUI before the command file was changed and saved will be available to
Undo.
There is an Undo feature in the command file editor, itself, too, but once changes
are saved and the editor is closed, that cache is purged as well. The Undo
command in the GUI cannot undo changes made in the command file editor.
Click File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save the current
file.

Add Beams Tool

Open the dataset file named Modeling 1.std for reference.
The Add Beams icon on the Geometry toolbar provides another way to add
members to a model.
It will automatically snap to existing nodes in the structure and allow a beam to
be added between two existing nodes, without the use of a grid. You should note
the following:
• The Add Beams tool adds one beam at a time.
• The Add Beams tool does not use the last node as the beginning for the next
beam.
 Exercise: Using the Add Beams tool

1 Ensure that the dataset file named Modeling 1.std is open.
2 Click the Add Beams icon on the Geometry toolbar.
Hint: The Add Beams tool is also accessible from the Menu Bar by clicking
Geometry > Add Beam > Add Beam from Point to Point.
The cursor changes to the Add Beams Cursor.
3 Click at the lower left node in the portal frame, and note that a line starts
“rubber-banding” between that node and the cursor location.
4 Click at the upper right node. A single member is created between those
two nodes.
5 Draw the other diagonal in a similar manner.
The Add Beam tool can also be used to add a beam where there is no
node.
6 Click near the middle of the horizontal member.
7 Click Yes in response to the prompt asking if you want to add a node.
The Insert Nodes into Beam dialog offers many ways to specify the location
of new nodes to be added.
8 Enter 0.5 in the Proportion field, and click the Add New Point button. A
value of 3.5000 {1.0000} appears in the Insertion Points box.

9 Click OK. A new node is created at the specified location, and the text
prompt in the lower left corner of the screen indicates “Click on node at
start of beam”.
10 Click on the node that was just created. A line starts “rubber-banding”
between that node and the cursor location.
11 Click near the middle of the vertical member on the right.
12 Click Yes to the prompt about adding a new node.
13 This time, click the Add Mid Point button, and then click OK.
14 Click on this new node to finish adding the new member.
Hint: An even faster method would be to use Geometry > Add Beam > Add
Beam between Mid-Points.
 Exercise: Using Fly-out Toolbars
Note: Notice the black triangle in the lower right corner of the Add Beams
icon. This icon indicates that there are additional related tools available
“beneath” the visible icon. The related tools are grouped and hidden on
a fly-out toolbar to save screen space. To choose a different tool on a
fly-out toolbar, take the following steps:
1 Click and hold the left mouse button while pointing to the Add Beams icon
in the Geometry toolbar.
2 When the fly-out toolbar opens, keep the left mouse button pressed, and
move the cursor to point to the third icon from the left (Add Beam
between Mid-Points).
3 Release the mouse button. The Add Beam between Mid-Points icon is now
the visible icon on the toolbar, making it available for use. Note that this
does not automatically activate the tool for immediate use. The icon must
be clicked to activate the tool.

 Exercise: Using the Add Beam between Mid-Points Tool

1 Click the Add Beam between Mid-Points icon. The message in the Status
Bar says “Select First Beam”.
2 Click on the vertical member on the left. The line starts “rubber-banding”
from the mid-point of the vertical member, and the message in the Status
Bar now says “Select Second Beam”.
3 Click on the left half of the top horizontal beam.
Another diagonal member is created as shown below:
4 Click the Add Beam between Mid-Points icon again to turn the tool off.
5 Click File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save the
current file.
Creating Geometry Using Tables

The following exercise describes how to create structure geometry using the
Nodes and Beams tables.

 Exercise: Using the Tables to Create Geometry

1 Open the dataset file named Modeling 2.std.
3 Click the Beam sub-tab.
Note: Grids will intentionally be left off to illustrate that this method of
entering geometry is completely independent of grid systems.
4 Node 1 has already been entered. In the Nodes table in the Data Area,
input the remaining coordinate values, as indicated in the table below. Use
the tab or arrow keys to move between cells.
Node (X, Y, Z)
1 (0, 0, 0)
2 (0, 8, 0) {(0, 2.5, 0)}
3 (7, 8, 0) {(2, 2.5,0)}
4 (7, 0, 0) {(2, 0, 0)}
The nodes appear in the Main Window as their coordinates are entered in
the table.
5 In the Beams table, input the following node numbers, using the tab,
cursor or arrow keys to move between cells:
Beam Node A Node B

1 1 2
2 2 3
3 3 4
4 1 3
5 2 4
The beams appear in the Main Window as their end nodes are entered in
the table. Note that this braced frame has been created completely
independently of any grid systems.
current file.

Using the Structure Wizard

Structure Wizard is a powerful and useful utility for creating structures from a
built-in library of standard prototype structures.
For a demonstration of some of its capabilities, Structure Wizard will be used to

develop a portion of the model for the structure shown in the figure below:
The general procedure will be to create the structure geometry in three steps:
1 Get the basic truss unit from Structure Wizard.
2 Add a column.
3 Use the Mirror command to create the left side. This will be demonstrated
in a later section.

 Exercise: Creating the Truss

1 Click New Project… from the Project Tasks section of the Start Page.
2 Click Space type structure in the New dialog.
3 Enter STRUCTURE WIZARD for the File Name.
STAAD.Pro will automatically append the .std extension.
4 Select Foot {Meter} for Length Units and KiloPound {KiloNewton} for
Force Units.
5 Click the Next button.
6 Click the Open Structure Wizard checkbox in the Where do you want to
go? dialog, and then click the Finish button.
Hint: The Structure Wizard can also be accessed from within STAAD.Pro at any
time by using the Geometry > Run Structure Wizard command.
The STAAD.Pro graphic environment now appears, and the Structure
Wizard window opens. Note the radio button options to toggle between
Prototype Models and Saved User Models.
STAAD.Pro provides the ability to save user models in a parametric format
that allows them to be recalled and modified quickly.
7 Select Prototype Models.
8 Click File > Select Units in the Structure Wizard's Menu Bar.
The Select Units dialog opens and allows a choice of unit systems to use in
the definition of the prototype structure. This does not necessarily have to
be set to the same units as the main STAAD.Pro model. This makes it
possible to create a prototype in one unit system and then merge it into a
model with a different unit system.
9 Ensure that the units are set to Feet {Meters}, and click OK.
10 Click the Model Type list in the upper left corner and note the built-in
categories of structure prototype models that are already available.
11 Select Truss Models in the Model Type list.
12 Double-click the North Light truss icon to create the right half of the truss
structure.
Hint: Another option to select any prototype is to drag the prototype icon over
to the right side of the Structure Wizard window and drop it where the
coordinate axes tripod is displayed.

The Select Parameters dialog contains fields for entering parametric

dimensions for the structure. Note that the units are in feet {meters}, as
expected.
13 Enter values as shown in the figure below:
Note: {For metric units, set the Length dimension to 7.5 meters and the Height
to 3 meters.}
In this example, the No. of bays along width is set to 0, because only a
planar model is desired, rather than multiple units in the “width”
direction.
14 Click the button with 3 dots in it just to the right of the No. of bays along
length field.
A dialog is displayed showing the current breakdown of bay lengths. By

default, the program sets the bay lengths equal. This dialog permits the
individual bay lengths to be revised manually, but it enforces the
constraint that the sum of the bay lengths must remain the same as the
overall length of the truss.
For this example, leave the bay lengths set to their default values.
15 Click OK or Cancel to dismiss this dialog.
16 Click the Apply button in the Select Parameters dialog. The structure now
appears on the right side of the Structure Wizard window.
The local origin for the structure is indicated by a colored coordinate axis
tripod. Note the location of the origin and the orientation of the local
coordinate axes. It will be useful to know where the local origin is when
importing the structure into the STAAD.Pro model. The coordinate axis
tripod shows that the origin is located at the lower left corner of the truss.

Hint: The structure can be viewed from various angles by dragging it with the
cursor. The Control (Ctrl) key and the Shift key can be used to constrain
the prototype to rotate in specific directions.
17 Now, from the Structure Wizard's Menu Bar, select File > Merge Model
with STAAD.Pro Model.
Hint: If you do not see the Merge Model with STAAD.Pro Model command,
check to be sure that you have used Structure Wizard's File menu, not
the File menu in STAAD.Pro's Main Window.
18 Click Yes in the next dialog to confirm the intent to transfer the prototype
structure into the STAAD.Pro project.
Some Discussion about Units...
The purpose of the Paste Prototype Model dialog is to adjust the position of the
prototype model when it is placed in the STAAD.Pro model. Therefore, the units
provided in the Paste Prototype Model dialog are controlled by the Set Current
Display Unit… setting in the STAAD.Pro Tools menu. (Tools > Set Current Display
Unit…)
By contrast, the purpose of the Select Parameters dialog is to create the geometry
of the prototype within the Structure Wizard. Therefore, the units provided in the
Select Parameters dialog are controlled by the Select Units setting in the Structure
Wizard's File menu. (File > Select Unit).
For this reason, it is possible that the units that come up in the Paste Prototype
Model dialog could be different than the units that come up in the Select
Parameters dialog.
By default, a prototype model will be placed into a STAAD.Pro model so that the
origin of the prototype model coincides with the origin of the STAAD.Pro model.
The Paste Prototype Model dialog currently provides two methods to shift the
insertion point of the prototype model to a location other than (0, 0, 0) in the
STAAD.Pro model:
• By distance between following two nodes and specifying two reference nodes.
• By the following X, Y, and Z values and entering the desired coordinate
location.

Note: When a prototype model is merged into a STAAD.Pro model that already
contains some geometry, a third option is offered to specify the insertion point
of the prototype. It is a Reference Pt button that allows any node in the
prototype to act as a handle point that can then be inserted at any existing
node in the STAAD.Pro model. This option will be demonstrated in a later
section.
 Exercise: Using the Paste Prototype Model Dialog

1 The truss is to be supported by 15-foot {5-meter} columns. If the
coordinate location of the bottom of the columns is to be at Y = 0, then the
truss should be inserted 15 feet {5 meters} in the positive Y direction from
the origin of the global coordinate system. Select the By the following X, Y,
and Z values radio button in the Paste Prototype Model dialog, and enter a
value of 15 ft {5 meters} in the Y field.
2 Click OK.
The structure is transferred into the STAAD.Pro model. The Structure
Wizard is dismissed, and the STAAD.Pro Main Window is now visible.
3 Click the Geometry tab and then the Beam sub-tab in the Page Control.
In the Nodes table in the Data Area, note that the Y coordinate for nodes 1
through 5 is 15 ft {5 m}, as expected.
 Exercise: Adding the Column
Note: The next step in creating this model is to add the column at the shallow
end of the truss. But first, the node at the base of the column must be
created.
1 In the Nodes table of the Data Area, input the coordinates (25, 0, 0) {7.5,
0, 0} on the line for node 11.
The newly created node 11 appears in the structure diagram.
2 Click Geometry > Add Beam > Add Beam from Point to Point.
The cursor changes to the Add Beams Cursor.
3 Click the node on the shallow end of the truss and click again at the new
node.
4 Click the Add Beams icon to turn the Add Beams tool off.
This tool remains active until it is turned off.

Editing Structure Geometry
current file.
The remaining steps for completing this model will be demonstrated in a
later section.

Open the dataset file named Modeling 3.std for reference in this section.
STAAD.Pro offers a variety of cursors on the Selection toolbar for the purpose of
selecting and editing the structure geometry. This section describes and
demonstrates their use.
The Selection toolbar is normally docked vertically on the left side of the screen.
Hover the cursor over any of the Selection toolbar icons and a label pops up with
the name of the tool.
Twelve different cursors are available for selecting the various types of STAAD.Pro
entities. Each cursor selects specific types of objects for editing or manipulation.
Having specific cursors can be very convenient when assigning properties where
various types of entities are crowded together.
Cursor Selects
Nodes Cursor Nodes only
Beams Cursor Members only
Plates Cursor Plate elements only
Surface Cursor Surface entities only
Solids Cursor Solid elements only
Geometry Cursor All types of entities
Select Text Cursor Text labels only

Load Edit Cursor Loads only
Support Edit Cursor Supports only
Member Release Edit Cursor Member releases only
Filtered Selection Cursor Multiple types of geometric entities with

specific attributes
Select Joints Cursor Connections defined in the RAM
Connection module
Cursor Facts
• The Nodes Cursor selects the nearest node when you click in close proximity
to a node.
• The Beams Cursor selects/deselects individual members by clicking on them.
Multiple members are selected by pressing Control (Ctrl) and clicking.
Hint: The keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A can be used to quickly select all entities
based on the current cursor selection.
• The Geometry Cursor selects all entities in a certain area, no matter what type
of entities they are.
• The Select Text Cursor is disabled or “grayed out” if there are no text objects in
the model.
• The Filtered Selection Cursor helps quickly identify the location of entities
with certain attributes. It works hand-in-hand with Select > Configure
Selection Filter…. In the current file it would make it possible, for example, to
select only aluminum W8x35 members, or all stainless steel members.
• The Select Joints Cursor is disabled or “grayed out” unless you are in the RAM
Connection module and at least one connection has been defined.
• In addition to using the toolbars, you can also choose cursors from the Select
menu on the Menu Bar.
• Click Select > Selection Mode, and note that three options are available: Drag
Box, Drag Line, and Region. This works hand-in-hand with the cursor choice.
• The cursor choice controls WHAT items will be selected. The Selection Mode
controls HOW those items will be selected.

Cursor Selection Modes

We will use the Beams Cursor to demonstrate the different Selection Modes that
are available for use with cursors.
• Drag Box Mode: When the Beams Cursor is used in the Drag Box mode, a
rectangular selection box is created. The rule is that a member will be selected
if the box includes the mid-point of the member.
• Drag Line Mode: When the Beams Cursor is used in the Drag Line mode, it
creates a selection line. Any beam crossed by the Drag Line will be selected.
• Region Mode: When the Beams Cursor is used in the Region mode, a selection
polygon of any shape can be drawn. The polygon is always closed, and left-
clicking with the mouse inserts additional vertices. Double-click to stop
creating more vertices and execute the selection. Similar to Drag Box, a
member will be selected if the region includes the mid-point of the member.
Using Select Options from the Menu Bar

Click Select in the Menu Bar and note the variety of selection options that appear
in the lower half of the menu. Some highlights include:
• Select > Beams Parallel To > (X or Y or Z) to select all beams that are parallel
to the selected axis.
• Select > By Range > (XY… or YZ… or XZ…) to select all entities that lie entirely
within the range of coordinate values specified for a selected axis. Note that
the entities to be selected are dependent upon the active cursor. For instance,
to select nodes by range, ensure that the Nodes Cursor is active when
activating this selection option.
• Select > By Inverse > Inverse Beam Selection to invert the current selection
status of all beams in the model. Selected beams become deselected and vice
versa.
• Select > By Specification to select on the basis of a variety of available
Specification items.

Deleting Members Graphically

To demonstrate how a member can be deleted graphically:
• Ensure that the Beams Cursor is active.
• Select any member by clicking on it.
• Press the Delete key on the keyboard, or click the Delete icon on the Menu
Bar, or click Edit > Delete.
• Click OK to confirm.
Hint: To delete multiple members at one time, hold Control (Ctrl) and click on all of
the members to be deleted, then release the Control (Ctrl) key.
Sometimes deleting members leaves nodes with no structural entities attached.

These are known as Orphan Nodes, and they are addressed in an upcoming
exercise.
Note: If Orphan Nodes are created when members are deleted graphically, STAAD.Pro
will prompt for a decision as to whether or not to delete these nodes.
Using the Tables to Delete or Modify Geometry

 Exercise: Deleting Beams using the Beams Table
2 Click on the Beam sub-tab.
Notice the Nodes and Beams tables in the Data Area resemble
spreadsheets.
Hint: If the table names are not visible, make their windows wider.
These tables are actually compatible with Microsoft Excel worksheets.
They can be copied and pasted into Microsoft Excel. The structure
geometry can also be created in a spreadsheet and then copied and
pasted into STAAD.Pro.
Hint: When pasting from Excel, select the first row in the STAAD.Pro table,
right mouse click, and choose Paste. Use the column mapping table to
map the data into the appropriate columns.
Table data can also be copied and pasted between RAM Elements and
STAAD.Pro.

These tables are completely interactive with the graphics display.

3 Click on any member with the Beams Cursor.
The corresponding member in the table is highlighted.
4 Fence around any node with the Nodes Cursor.
The line in the Nodes table corresponding to that node becomes
highlighted.
5 Click any row in the Beams or Nodes tables and the corresponding beam
or node is highlighted in the graphic display.
6 Change one of the coordinates in the Nodes table and watch the display
change, then change it back to its original value.
7 Delete any line from the Beams table and note the effect in the graphic
display.
8 Click Undo to get the beam back.
Note: If Orphan Nodes are created when members are deleted from the
spreadsheet, STAAD.Pro does not automatically prompt for a decision
as to whether to delete them or not. However, they can be
automatically detected with Tools > Orphan Nodes > Highlight, or they
can be automatically deleted with Tools > Orphan Nodes > Delete.
These tools are demonstrated in an upcoming exercise.
9 Click File > Close to return to the Start Page.
10 Click No when asked if you want to save.

Modify the Structure Geometry with the STAAD.Pro Editor

As you create your structure using the graphic interface, STAAD.Pro converts your
actions into a command language and stores them in a command file, a simple
text file in ASCII format.
STAAD.Pro appends the command file with the extension .std.
Experienced STAAD.Pro users often find that if they just want to make a quick
change to a value, it is easier to edit the value in the command file, rather than
modifying it with the graphic interface.
Early releases of STAAD did not include a graphical user interface (GUI). All
program input had to be performed by writing statements in a command file.
The STAAD.Pro Examples manual contains twenty-nine example problems and

fourteen verification problems created using the input file as the primary input
method. You can study these examples if you wish to learn how to write or
interpret STAAD.Pro command files.
You can also issue a command using the graphic interface, and then open the
command file to see the equivalent command language.
 Exercise: Using the STAAD.Pro Editor

2 Open the editor by clicking Edit > Edit Input Command File or by clicking
the STAAD Editor icon on the File toolbar.
While any standard text editor can be used to create or edit the STAAD.Pro
input file, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers two advantages:
syntax checking and color coding by context.
3 Review the STAAD Editor. In the STAAD.Pro editor, STAAD.Pro keywords,
numeric data, comments, etc., are displayed in distinct colors:
• Red = Commands
• Black = User-defined text labels and names
• Blue = Numerical values
• Green = Remarks and comments

The command language syntax can be interpreted with relative ease. For
instance, from the Joint Coordinates statement, you can see that the node
definitions consist of node numbers followed by the XYZ coordinates.
Node data fields are separated (delimited) by semicolons (;).
4 Find the coordinates of node number 3, and edit the Y coordinate from 8
to 12 {from 2.5 to 4}.
5 Click File > Save and then File > Exit in the STAAD Editor's Menu Bar (not
the STAAD.Pro Menu Bar).
6 Click the Geometry tab in the Page Control.
Note that node number 3 in the graphic display has moved. The Node
table in the Data Area now shows a value of 12 {4} for the Y coordinate of
node number 3.
Hint: Remember to never make changes in the command file and in the
graphics input mode simultaneously. Always be sure to save and close
the command file before going back to working on the model in the
graphic interface.
current file.

Merging Members
 Exercise: Merge Multiple Members into One
2 Use the keyboard combination Shift + B to turn on Beam Numbers and
Shift + K to turn on Node Points. We will discuss these shortcuts in more
detail later.
Notice that the top horizontal beam is segmented into three individual
members of various lengths, with two intermediate nodes. This was
caused by members that were modeled and then subsequently deleted.
Since there is no longer a reason to maintain those particular intermediate
nodes, they can be removed, and the individual members can be merged
into one.
3 Select the three horizontal members with the Beams Cursor.
4 Click Geometry > Merge Selected Members.
The Merge Selected Beams dialog opens, and the three member numbers
are listed.
The drop-down list boxes provide a convenient way to identify which
values to maintain for items like Beam Number, Property, etc., after the
merge takes place. For the purpose of this exercise, these items can all be
left at their default values.
5 Click Merge and Close.
The top three horizontal members have now been consolidated into one
member.

Splitting a Beam into two or more Members

 Exercise: Split One Member into Three
1 Keep the same file open, or open the dataset file named Modeling 6.std.
2 Assume that the top horizontal member needs to be segmented into
three, equal-length segments.
3 Select the top horizontal member.
4 Click Geometry > Split Beam.
The Insert Nodes into Beam dialog displays the member number and
length. It contains three options for specifying where to insert new nodes
along the beam:
• Add New Point: Distance from the starting end of the member to the
new node can be entered in the Distance field, or a ratio can be
entered in the Proportion field, where the value represents distance
from the starting end of the member to the new node divided by the
total length, expressed as a decimal value.
• Add Mid Point: Creates a new node at the mid-point of the member.
• Add n Points: Creates “n” new nodes equally spaced along the length
of the member, where the value of “n” is specified in the “n =” field.
The program divides the beam into n+1 equal-length segments,
separated by n nodes.
5 Enter a value of 2 in the n = field.
6 Click Add n Points.
7 Click OK.
current file.
Hint: Geometry > Insert Node… and Geometry > Split Beam are identical
commands provided for convenience.
Hint: The Insert Node command is also accessible through the menu that pops
up from a right-click of the mouse in the Main Window.
Note: Note that the Insert Node command will not appear in the pop-up menu
unless at least one member has been selected.

Working with Intersecting Members

Just because two members cross each other graphically does not mean there is a
connection between them in a STAAD.Pro model. It is permissible to model
crossing members in STAAD.Pro, and it is up to our discretion to decide whether
the crossing members should be considered to be connected at their crossing
point or not. STAAD.Pro provides some tools to help locate crossing members and
to help create a structural connection at the crossing point if desired.
 Exercise: Identify Crossing Members

Even in a relatively small model like this one, it can sometimes be difficult
to determine whether there are any crossing members or not. To assist in
finding any if they exist, STAAD.Pro provides a tool that highlights crossing
members if any exist.
2 Click Geometry > Intersect Selected Members > Highlight.
The Enter Tolerance field in the Intersect Members dialog is an option
through which to tell the program to find the point of closest approach
between two lines. If the distance between the members at this point is
less than the Tolerance value, they are highlighted. This can be useful in
situations where mathematical precision causes the two lines to be in
different planes.
For lines that truly intersect each other, the Tolerance can be set to zero,
and the intersect members command will function properly.
3 Leave the Enter Tolerance set to 0 and click OK.
The result reveals four highlighted members. Two diagonals cross each
other in the front plane and two cross each other in the rear plane.
If the intent was to create a connection in both instances, then we could
immediately issue the next command to automatically create that
connection. But rather than do that, let's explore how the next command
could be used to selectively create connections at some locations and not
alter the framing configuration at other locations.

 Exercise: Intersect Selected Members
Note: Assume that the intent is for the bracing members in the front plane to
be connected and to transfer load at their intersection, while leaving
the bracing members in the rear plane as they are currently modeled.
1 Select only the two diagonal members in the XY plane in the foreground
with the Beams Cursor.
2 Click Geometry > Intersect Selected Members > Intersect.
3 Leave the Enter Tolerance set to 0 and click OK.
4 Click OK to acknowledge the message box indicating that two new beams
have been created.
The selected diagonal members have each been split into two members,
and a new node now exists at the intersection point.
current file.
Renumbering Beams and Nodes

Having members and nodes in consecutive numerical order is not a requirement
for STAAD.Pro, but it can be a convenience in interpreting results output.
 Exercise: Renumbering Beams into Consecutive Numerical Order

(eliminating the gaps in numbering)
2 Click on the Geometry tab in the Page Control area. The Beam sub-tab is
active by default.
3 Use the keyboard combination Shift + B to turn on Beam Numbers.
The Beams table shows that the member numbers are not in consecutive
numerical order due to editing.
4 Click Select > By All > All Beams.
5 Click Geometry > Renumber > Members….
6 Click Yes in the next dialog to proceed by confirming that renumbering is
an irreversible operation.
7 Keep the value set to 1 in the Start numbering from field of the Renumber
dialog.
8 Keep the New Numbering Order set to Ascending.

The remaining controls in this dialog provide criteria for renumbering and
allow the assignment of a hierarchy, or “sorting order”, during the
renumbering process.
9 Click Member No. from the Available Sort Criteria column and move it to
the right by clicking the single right arrow, so Member No. appears under
Selected Sort Criteria.
This is the only sort criteria required to accomplish the goal of eliminating
the gaps in the member numbering.
10 Click the Accept button.
11 Click OK to acknowledge that some members have been renumbered.
The Beams table shows that beam numbers now run consecutively from 1
to 11.
Now, the gaps in the beam numbering sequence have been eliminated, but notice
the distribution of the members. Beam 1 occurs in the lower left corner of the
model, and the next beam occurs at the opposite corner. Again, this doesn't
represent a problem for STAAD.Pro's ability to analyze and design. But it might be
more convenient if member numbers were somewhat more organized in the
model. We will now use additional sorting options in the Renumber dialog that
will help us achieve this organization.
 Exercise: Renumbering Beams into a more Logical Physical Order

2 Click Geometry > Renumber > Members….
3 Click Yes in the next dialog to proceed by confirming that renumbering is
an irreversible operation.
4 Keep the value set to 1 in the Start numbering from field of the Renumber
dialog.
5 Keep the New Numbering Order set to Ascending.
6 Click X Coordinate and Y Coordinate from the Available Sort Criteria
column and move them to the right by clicking the single right arrow so
they both appear under Selected Sort Criteria.

7 If necessary, use the small black up arrow and down arrow icons to order
the list so that X Coordinate is on the top of the list and Y Coordinate is on
the bottom. This means that the renumbering will be based primarily on
the X coordinate (of the midpoint) of each member. In cases where the
midpoint of more than one member has the same X coordinate, then the
secondary sort criteria of the Y coordinate will be evaluated to establish
the numbering order for those members.
8 Click the Accept button.
9 Click OK to acknowledge that some members have been renumbered.
The Structure Diagram now shows that the member numbering follows a
logical and orderly progression. The member numbers generally get
higher as you move in the positive X direction, and in cases where more
than one member shares the same X coordinate, the member numbers
get higher as you move in the positive Y direction.
current file.
Note: An analogous command sequences could also be applied to renumber

the nodes in a model if desired.
Note: Beams and nodes can also be renumbered by editing the command file.
Using Copy and Paste on Nodes

 Exercise: Copying and Pasting Nodes
2 Use the keyboard combination Shift + N to show Node Numbers.
Assume that the goal is to add a 2.5 foot {0.75 meter} long horizontal
cantilever on the left side of node 6.
3 Click on node number 6 with the Nodes Cursor.
4 Click Edit > Copy.

Note that next to the Copy command, the corresponding shortcut key Ctrl
+ C is shown on the right side of the Edit menu.

Hint: This is a standard Windows shortcut to the Copy command. Instead of

selecting Edit > Copy, you can also hold down the Control (Ctrl) key and
press the C key.
5 Click Edit > Paste Nodes.
Hint: Another alternative is to right-click and choose Paste Nodes, or simply

use the standard shortcut key Ctrl + V.
6 Enter a value of -2.5 {-0.75} in the X field of the Paste with Move dialog,
and then click OK.
A node number 10 is added to the model.
7 Press Shift + K to display the Node Points if they are not clearly visible.
8 Click Geometry > Add Beam > Add Beam from Point to Point.
9 Click on node 6 and then click on node 10 to create the cantilever.
Using Copy and Paste on Members

 Exercise: Copying and Pasting Members
1 Continue working in the current model, or open the dataset file named
Modeling 10.std.
2 If Node Numbers are not currently visible, use the keyboard combination
Shift + N.
Now assume that a cantilever is to be added at the top of this braced
frame, similar to the cantilever at mid-height.
3 Click on the Geometry tab in the Page Control area. The Beam sub-tab will
be active by default.
Note that the Nodes table indicates that there are currently 10 nodes in
the model.
4 Select the cantilever on the left side of the braced frame using the Beams
Cursor.
6 Click Edit > Paste Beams.
If the distance between node 6 and node 2 is known, then it could be
entered in the field for the Y move value in the Paste with Move dialog. In
this case, it is easier to use the other option.
7 Check the By distance between following two nodes radio button.

8 Enter 6 for Node 1 and 2 for Node 2, and then click OK.
A new cantilever is added at the level of the top of the braced frame.
Note: The Nodes table now indicates that there are 11 nodes in the model.
The significance of this is that STAAD.Pro automatically handles the
condition at node 2, and does not allow the Paste with Move command
to create a duplicate node at that location.
Note: The Copy and Paste Beams commands can also be used to copy and
paste a group of members all at one time.
Option to Split Member if New Node is Added on Member

This next section demonstrates an important setting in STAAD.Pro that affects the
way the program behaves. When modeling with a procedure such as Copy and
Paste to create new nodes on existing members, you can control whether those
nodes should automatically cause the member to be split or not.
 Exercise: Observe the effects of the “Split member if new node is added on
the member” Setting
1 Continue working in the current model, or open the dataset file named
Modeling 11.std.
2 Click View > Options… and then select Tolerance in the Options dialog.

3 Deselect the checkbox for the option to Split member if new node is
added on the member, as shown in the figure below, and then click OK.
4 Click the cantilever at the roof level with the Beams Cursor to select it.
6 Click Edit > Paste Beams.
7 Check the By the following X, Y, and Z values radio button, enter -2 ft {-1
m} in the Y input field, and click OK.
8 Use the Beams Cursor to select the upper segment of the left column, and
note that it is still a single member spanning between nodes 2 and 6.
This indicates that the end of the newly created cantilever is not
connected to the column. In order for proper load transfer to occur, the
cantilever must be connected to a node that is common to both the
column and the cantilever. To demonstrate an easy way to accomplish this,
take the following steps:
9 Click Undo once.
10 Click View > Options… and then select Tolerance in the Options dialog.

11 This time, select the checkbox for the option to Split member if new node
is added on the member, and then click OK.
12 Repeat the Copy and Paste Beams procedure, and then use the Beams
Cursor to select individual column segments and note the difference.
When the Split members if… checkbox is selected, the column is split and
the cantilever is properly connected to the column.
current file.
Mirroring Structure Geometry

The Mirror command will be used to complete the model that was started earlier
in the Using the Structure Wizard section.
 Exercise: Creating Mirrored Geometry

2 Select all beams in the model.
3 Click Geometry > Mirror….
Hint: This command can also be accessed by using the Generate - Mirror icon
on the Generate toolbar.
The Mirror dialog opens. This dialog contains a schematic diagram to help
explain the use of the control options.
4 Click the Y-Z radio button in the Mirror Plane category, to indicate that the
mirror plane will be parallel to the Y-Z plane.
5 Leave the Plane Position at its present setting of Plane at X = 0.
In this case the mirror plane goes through the origin, so it is located
correctly by the default value. Note that the Plane Position category also
provides the ability to locate the mirror plane graphically by clicking on a
node that lies in the plane using the Highlight Nodes icon.
6 Click the Copy radio button in the Generate Mode category.

In this case the intent is to create the full truss by mirroring and copying
the first half.

7 Leave the Mirror Member Orientation option deselected.

This option is discussed in detail in another Module.
8 Click OK. The other half of the truss is mirrored, and the display returns to
the Main Window.
9 Click inside the Main Window to deselect all members.
Note: Note that the Mirror command does not create a duplicate member or
duplicate nodes at the center of the truss. STAAD.Pro will not duplicate
any members that lie in the mirror plane. To have STAAD.Pro prove this
for you, follow the step-by-step instructions below.
 Exercise: Verifying the Absence of Duplicate Nodes

1 Click Tools > Check Duplicate > Nodes.
2 Leave 0 in the Enter Tolerance field in the Remove Duplicate Nodes dialog,
and click OK.
A message box appears confirming that no duplicate nodes were found.
3 Click OK to dismiss the message.
4 Click Tools > Check Duplicate > Members.
A message box appears confirming that no duplicate members were
found.
5 Click OK to dismiss the message.
current file.
Using “Translational Repeat”

Translational Repeat is another way of creating multiple copies of members, and it
has some advantages over simply copying and pasting the members.
Note that a very common mistake in STAAD.Pro is to open a dialog like the
Translational Repeat dialog that acts on a member or group of members, without
first selecting any members.
Always start by selecting the members to be operated on before selecting

Translational Repeat, or any other command that does something to selected
members.

If no members are selected initially, a dialog similar to the following will be

displayed when the OK button is clicked:
STAAD.Pro allows the warning message box to be dismissed, and the members to
be selected without closing the Translational Repeat dialog.
Suppose the goal is to model two additional portal frames, 15 feet {4.5 meters}
apart, and to link the portal frames with members connecting the columns, the
free ends of the cantilevers, and the intermediate nodes along the roof member,
but we do not want any grade beams linking the portal frames at the bases of the
columns. In the exercise below, we will model these frames.
 Exercise: Using Transitional Repeat

3 Click Geometry > Translational Repeat…, or click on the Translational
Repeat icon on the Generate toolbar.
4 Click the Z radio button in the Global Direction category of the

Translational Repeat dialog.
5 Set the value to 2 in the No. of Steps list.
6 Enter 15 {4.5} in the Default Step Spacing field, and press the Tab key to
see the change reflected in the Step/Spacing table.
Note that the spacing values listed in the table could be edited individually,
if variable step spacings were required.
7 Toggle on the Link Steps checkbox.
This causes the program to create transverse members in the Z direction,
connecting all nodes on the portal frames.
Notice that the Open Base checkbox becomes active when the Link Steps
checkbox is toggled on.

8 Toggle on the Open Base checkbox.

This prevents the generation of members connecting the bases of the
portal frame columns.
The Generation Flags category controls the items that are copied when
the Translational Repeat command is used.
There are three options for Generation Flags: All, Geometry Only, or
Geometry and Property Only. The following table indicates which items do
and do not get copied in a Translational Repeat based on the Generation
Flags setting.
All Geometry Geometry and

Only Property Only
Members and Nodes Yes Yes Yes
Materials (ex. Steel) Yes No Yes
Properties Yes No Yes
(ex. section and beta angle)
Member Specifications Yes No No
(ex. truss and member releases)
Supports Yes No No
Loads Yes No No
9 Keep the default setting of All in the Generation Flags category.

10 Click the Renumber Bay checkbox.
A new column labeled Number From appears in the table. This is a way of
providing a user-specified starting number for the members generated in
each of the steps.
11 Enter a value of 101 in the Number From column for Step 1, and enter 201
for Step 2.
12 Click OK.
13 Click Yes to acknowledge the dialog warning that this is an irreversible
operation.
The additional copies are created along with the horizontal linking
members as requested by the Link Steps option. Note that no linking
members were generated at the base due to the Open Base option.

14 Click the Rotate Up icon twice, and note that horizontal members were
generated between the intersections of the diagonal bracing. If these two
members were not desired, they could be deleted.
15 Use the keyboard shortcut Shift + K to turn on Node Points.

Note that nodes were automatically copied, even though only beams were
selected.
16 Use the keyboard shortcut Shift + B to turn on Beam Numbers.
Note: The member numbers range from 1 through 13 in the original portal
frame, 101 through 113 in the first copy, and 201 through 213 in the
second copy as requested by the renumber bay option.
Note: Translational Repeat has two advantages over the simple Copy-Paste
Beams technique: 1) it allows more than one copy to be created in a
single operation; and 2) the newly created members can be
automatically linked to each other with new members.
current file.

Using “Circular Repeat”

The Circular Repeat command is useful for creating structures that are radially
symmetrical. Its function and usage are similar to the Translational Repeat
command.
 Exercise: Using Circular Repeat

2 Use the keyboard combination Shift + B to turn on Beam Numbers.
3 Click member 13 (the tallest column) with the Beams Cursor.
4 Click Select > By Inverse > Inverse Beam Selection to select everything
EXCEPT member 13.
5 Click Geometry > Circular Repeat….
6 Leave the Axis of Rotation set to the (global) Y axis in the 3D Circular
dialog.
The Through category provides three methods to specify a point through
which the Axis of Rotation must pass: by clicking on a node, by entering a
node number, or by providing the coordinates.
7 Click the Highlight Node icon then click on node #11 (the node at the
bottom of the tallest column).
The number 11 appears in the Node field. The X Coordinate field reports a
value of 20 {6}, and the Z Coordinate field reports a value of 0.
8 Activate the Use this as Reference Point for Beta angle generation
checkbox. This option is explained below.

Assume that the web of a column (in a structure to be copied with Circular
Repeat) is oriented so that it points through the Axis of Rotation. If the
checkbox for Use this as Reference Point for Beta angle generation is
activated, then the web of that column will be rotated as copies are
generated, so that the webs of the columns in all of the copies also point
through the Axis of Rotation, as shown below.
If the checkbox for Use this as Reference Point for Beta angle generation is
not activated, then the webs of the columns in all copies will remain
parallel to the web of the original column, as shown below.

9 Leave the Total Angle set to its default value of 360 degrees.
Total Angle is the angle subtended by the arc through which the copies are
rotated. A positive angle value rotates the copies in the positive direction
of the chosen axis (right hand rule).
10 Set the No. of Steps to 8.
No. of Steps determines the number of copies of the selected geometry
that STAAD.Pro will generate. The program divides the Total Angle by the
No. of Steps specified, and places copies of the selected geometry at the
division points.
11 Toggle on the Link Steps and Open Base checkboxes, and leave the
Geometry Only checkbox deselected.
See the section on the Translational Repeat command for detailed
explanations of these options.
12 Click OK.
STAAD.Pro creates eight frames arranged symmetrically about (20, 0, 0)
{(6, 0, 0)}.
13 Use the keyboard shortcut Shift + B to toggle off the display of Beam
Numbers.
Note that the program does not create duplicate members at the 8th step
of the 360 degree Total Angle specified, since the original members are
already there. The program actually created only 7 copies of the selected
geometry rather than 8.
If the Total Angle had been set to 315 degrees and only 7 steps had been
requested, the resulting structure would have been similar, except that
the Link Steps option would not have linked the 7th step at 315 degrees to
the original frame at 0 degrees.
The selection to be copied included every member except for the tallest
column at the center of the circular repeat. Note that even if the entire
frame had been selected, including the tallest column, STAAD.Pro would
not have generated duplicate members at that center column location.
current file.

Identifying and Removing “Orphan Nodes”

Orphan nodes are those nodes with no structural attachment to the rest of the
model. They can be created, for example, by inadvertent clicks on a grid during
modeling or by incomplete editing in the STAAD Input File Editor. They may also
be intentionally created to serve purposes such as acting as a working point for a
circular generation, acting as a reference point for insertion of additional
geometry, or acting as a convenient handle point for moving or copying geometry.
Although they may serve a valid purpose for some modeling steps, the presence
of orphan nodes may cause the program to fail to analyze the structure
successfully. Good practice dictates eliminating any orphan nodes prior to running
an analysis. STAAD.Pro provides some tools to help locate orphan nodes and to
remove them if desired.
 Exercise: Identifying and Removing Orphan Nodes

2 Using the Beams Cursor, select the two cantilevered members on the left
side of the model.
3 Click Edit > Delete.
4 Click OK in the warning box that indicates that 2 beams will be deleted.
Note: Because this modeling work is being done in the GUI, STAAD.Pro
provides a second warning box to indicate that deleting some beams
has created some orphan nodes. It goes on to offer to automatically
delete these nodes. These warnings are convenient, but bear in mind
that STAAD.Pro cannot offer these warnings if orphan nodes are created
as a result of editing in the STAAD Input File Editor.
5 Click No in the warning box that offers to automatically delete the orphan
nodes.
There are now two orphan nodes that used to define the free ends of the
cantilevers, but they may not be obvious, even in this relatively simple
model. The next step will be to use a tool that will automatically search for
orphan nodes and highlight them graphically to make them obvious.
6 Click Tools > Orphan Nodes > Highlight.
Now that two orphan nodes are graphically obvious, we could decide to
keep one or both for now, or delete them both. Let's assume we want to
delete both now.
7 Click Tools > Orphan Nodes > Remove.

8 Finally, now that we know there are no orphan nodes in this model, click
Tools > Orphan Nodes > Highlight again to see the message STAAD.Pro
displays when it finds no orphan nodes in a model.
9 Click OK to dismiss the dialog.
current file.
Combining two STAAD.Pro Models by Copy and Paste

The following steps outline a procedure to use copy and paste methods to
combine the two simple frame models shown below from separate STAAD.Pro
models.
The procedure described here can also be used for inserting a Structure Wizard
model into an existing STAAD.Pro model.
 Exercise: Combining two STAAD.Pro models

2 Select all members in the model.
4 Click File > Close.
6 Click Edit > Paste Beams to open the Paste with Move dialog.
7 Click Reference Pt in the Paste with Move dialog.
The Specify Reference Point dialog opens showing a graphic of the braced
frame model.

A prompt in the dialog indicates “click on the node to act as the reference
point”. The node in the lower left-hand corner is currently selected, but it
is hidden by the coordinate axis tripod.
8 Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the structure until the node
at the lower left-hand corner of the frame is visible.
The currently highlighted node serves as the Reference Point.
9 Click on any other node to see how STAAD.Pro highlights the selected
Reference Point. Then click back on the node in the lower left-hand corner,
and click OK.
The cursor changes to the Connection Point Cursor. A prompt in the lower
left-hand corner of the screen indicates, “Click on node to move reference
point to.”
10 Click on the top of the left-hand column. The Paste with Move dialog
reappears, confirming the new Y coordinate value of 10 feet {3 meters}.
11 Click OK.
The two models are merged at the defined connection point. They now
both exist in the same model, which could be further edited, saved, etc…
current file.
This example obviously uses very simple models to demonstrate the copy and
paste function, but a more realistic real-world application for this function might
be a complex model, where:
• A common grid is established and shared by using Save As… or by exporting
the grid file, so that:
• Multiple STAAD.Pro models are generated based on the original grid, and
• Multiple engineers work on different portions of the structure simultaneously
in separate files, until
• Individual files are combined into one single model using copy and paste
methods, where
• Final modeling steps can be completed, and
• The entire structure is analyzed and designed.
Note: STAAD.Pro offers the ability to simultaneously run multiple separate instances
of the program. So when performing a copy and paste as demonstrated above,
it is also permissible to leave both instances of STAAD.Pro open.

Viewing Structure Geometry

STAAD.Pro provides a variety of tools and settings that can be helpful in visualizing
structure geometry and displaying information about a model. The following
section will highlight some of the most commonly used options.
Working with Structural Tool Tip

Structural Tool Tip provides a way to display selected information about an entity
by hovering the appropriate cursor on the entity of interest.
 Exercise: Selecting Structural Tool Tip Options

2 Make sure the Beams Cursor is active.
3 Hover the cursor over the horizontal member. The Structural Tool Tip pops
up to display some information about the beam.
The information displayed by Structural Tool Tip is configurable by the
user.
4 Click View > Structural Tool Tip Options….
Note that Structural Tool Tip can be completely turned off if desired. The
Tip Delay can be adjusted to control the delay time before the tool tip is
displayed. The Tip Delay is in units of milliseconds, so 500 = ½ second
delay.
Note that Structural Tool Tip settings are available to individually control
the display of information for Nodes, Beams, Plates, Solids, and Surfaces.
5 Click Beam in the Tool category.
Note the options that are available to display for beams.
6 Make sure that Number and Length are selected in the Options category,
and then click OK.
7 Hover the cursor over the horizontal member again, and note that the tool
tip now provides the beam number and the member length.
8 Leave this file open for use in the next section.

Working with the Query Function

Another way to obtain information about entities in a model is with the Query
function, which is launched by double-clicking on an entity of interest with the
corresponding cursor.
 Exercise: Observing Beam Query and Node Query

1 Double-click on the horizontal member with the Beams Cursor.
A dialog opens providing the beam number and other information about
the beam.
The Geometry tab is selected by default. It indicates that a steel section
has been assigned to the member, and it provides dimensions for the
section. The starting and ending node numbers and their coordinates are
provided. The Additional Info category shows that a Beta Angle has been
assigned to this member. The Releases category indicates that some
member end releases have been applied at each end. Note that buttons
are provided on this tab to change the Beta Angle, as well as the member
Releases at the starting and ending end of the selected member.
2 Click the Property tab.
This tab provides more section-specific dimensions, as well as Physical
Properties and Material Properties. Buttons are provided on this tab to
change the Property and the Material of the selected member.
3 Click the Loading tab.
This tab can be used to review the load items that have been assigned to
the selected member for various load cases. Buttons are provided on this
tab to Add, Edit, or Remove selected load items from the member.
Note: After an analysis has been run, this dialog will accumulate additional
tabs that can be used to review analysis results, shear, bending and
deflection diagrams, and so forth.
4 Click the Close button in the Beam Query dialog.
5 Double-click on any node with the Nodes Cursor.

The Node Query dialog opens and displays the node number and
coordinates of the selected node. The Tables category provides direct
access to several tables pertaining to nodes in general:
• The Nodes button opens the Nodes table, which provides the
coordinates of all the nodes in the model. The current node is
highlighted in the table.
• The Loads button opens the Load Values table, which indicates the
magnitudes and directions of any loads applied to the model, if any
have been defined.
• The Supports button opens the Supported Nodes table, which provides
information about supports, if any have been defined.
• The Reactions button leads to the Support Reactions table.
• The Displacements button leads to the Node Displacements table.
• Both the Reactions button and the Displacements button trigger the
Results Setup dialog to open, in order to select which loads and nodes
will be reported on.
• Neither table is available for this model in its current state, because
the model has not been analyzed.
6 Click the Close button in the Nodes dialog.

Controlling Structure Label Appearance

Structure label appearance can be modified to suit personal preference and to
help distinguish between node numbers and beam numbers.
 Exercise: Modifying Structure Label Appearance

1 Click View > Options…. The Options dialog opens.
2 Select the Node Labels item.
The controls on this page provide options for the appearance of node
labels in the Main Window.
• The Style list offers various built-in styles that are available for node
numbering.
• The alignment (positioning) of the labels can be controlled in both the
vertical and horizontal directions.
• The Font button provides access to a variety of Fonts, Font Styles, Size,
Color, and Effects settings.
• If the Opaque option is selected, any model geometry that tends to
interfere with the node number labels will be “whited-out” to clarify
the labeling.
3 Select the Beam Labels item.
The controls on this page provide options for the appearance of beam
labels in the Main Window. They are very similar to the options for node
labels. One important difference is the Angle Text option for beam labels.
If this option is selected, beam labels will be oriented parallel to the
members they correspond to, making it even easier to associate the
members and the numbers.
Note: These settings are saved in a text file named StaadPro20070.ini, which is
saved in the Windows (or WINNT) folder, so the settings affect all
STAAD.Pro models that are opened on a particular computer.
4 Click Cancel to dismiss the Options dialog.
current file.

Displaying Member Lengths and Distance Between Nodes

There are several ways to display member lengths. One method is to use the
Dimension Beams tool.
 Exercise: Using the Dimension Beams tool

2 Click Tools > Dimension Beams….
The Dimension to View radio button is selected by default in the Options
category.
3 Click the Display button.
The dimensions for all members are displayed.
Two limitations to this tool should now be obvious:
• First, for structural elements consisting of multiple segments, the
Dimension Beams tool is inconvenient because it reports the individual
member lengths rather than the overall length.
• Second, the Dimension Beams tool only works on members. It cannot
be used to measure the distance between two arbitrary nodes unless
they have a member modeled between them.
For these kinds of conditions, there is a more appropriate tool.
4 Click the Remove radio button in the Display/Remove Dimension dialog.
5 Verify that Dimension to View is still selected in the Options category.
6 Click the Remove button. All dimensions in the view are removed.
7 Click Close to dismiss the Display/Remove Dimension dialog.

 Exercise: Using the Display Node to Node Distance tool

1 Click Tools > Display Node to Node Distance.
Hint: An alternate method of accessing this tool is to click the Display Node to
Node Distance icon in the Structure toolbar.
All existing nodes in the model become bold, and the cursor changes to
indicate that STAAD.Pro is in the node to node distance measuring mode.
2 Click on any two nodes to obtain the distance between them.
Note how this tool could be used to obtain the overall length of a series of
collinear beam segments. This tool could also be used to obtain the
distance between any two nodes, even if they are not connected by a
member.
3 To remove one dimension at a time, select the Display Node to Node
Distance icon, and then click the end nodes of the dimension to be
removed.
4 Click Tools > Remove Node Dimension to remove all dimensions at once.
current file.
Controlling the View

Open the dataset file named Modeling 20.std to experiment with the view
control tools.
STAAD.Pro provides a variety of View Management options for viewing the

structure. There are tools for changing the perspective of the Main Window, and
also for creating separate view windows of all or part of the structure.
STAAD.Pro provides two toolbars for changing the viewing aspect: the Rotate
toolbar and the View toolbar.

The Rotate toolbar is docked in the upper left corner of the STAAD.Pro screen by
default, but can be dragged to any desired location. It contains numerous buttons
for changing the viewing angle. The functions of the Rotate tools are generally
evident from their names.
• View From +Z / -Z
• View From +X / -X
• View From +Y / -Y
• Isometric View
• Rotate Up / Down
• Rotate Left / Right
• Spin Left / Right
• Toggle View Rotation Mode is used to select a node to serve as the center of
view rotation.
The View toolbar is docked in the top middle of the STAAD.Pro screen by default.
It, too, can be dragged to any desired location. The View toolbar contains a variety
of tools generally used to change the viewing distance and location:
1 Display Whole Structure
• Turns on all members in the structure
• Returns structure to the Isometric View orientation
• Resizes the structure to the maximum size that will fit within the Main
Window.
2 Dynamic Zoom
• Provides a fence to select a portion of the model to be magnified in a
separate Zoom window.
• The extent of the fence remains visible as a heavy rectangle in the
Whole Structure window as long as the Zoom window remains open.
• The fence can be repositioned by dragging the fence with the cursor in
the Whole Structure window to view different parts of the structure in
the Zoom window.
• Scroll bars are provided to move from side to side, and up and down.
• Plus (+), minus (-) and extents (E) buttons are provided in the lower
right corner of the window to adjust the zoom level.

• Several Dynamic Zoom windows can be opened at the same time. Each
of their respective fence rectangles remains visible in the Whole
Structure window as long as the Zoom window remains open.
3 Zoom Extents
• Performs similar to Display Whole Structure with the exception that
Zoom Extents does not turn on elements that are not currently
displayed.
• For example, if some elements have been turned off in a view by using
View > View Selected Objects Only, those particular elements will
remain invisible when Zoom Extents is used.
• Returns structure to the Isometric View orientation.
• Resizes the structure to the maximum size that will fit within the Main
Window.
4 Zoom In / Out
• Zooms in or out on the model a set amount with each click.
5 Zoom Factor
• Zooms in or out based on the factor entered in pop-up dialog.
• Factors greater than 1 will zoom in.
• Factors less than 1 will zoom out.
6 Zoom Previous
• Restores the view to the previous zoom level.
• Only retains one previous zoom step set by Zoom Factor or Zoom
Window.
7 Zoom Window
• Provides a fence to select a portion of the model to be magnified in the
current window.
8 Previous Selection
• Returns the selection state to the condition it was in one step prior to
the current state.
9 Pan
• Allows the model to be repositioned within the current view.
• Zoom level remains unchanged.
• Pan remains active until it is toggled off.

10 Magnifying Glass
• Provides a quick way to temporarily enlarge a portion of the structure
for closer inspection.
11 3D Rendered View
• Displays the model in a new window with its assigned sections.
• Provides controls for adjusting lighting.
• Enables dynamic panning, so the model can be rotated by clicking and
dragging with the cursor.
Hint: All functions in the View toolbar are available in the View pull-down
menu. All functions in the Rotate toolbar are also available in the View
pull-down menu under the Orientation item, although they are in a
slightly different format.
Although STAAD.Pro provides many tools for zooming, panning and
rotating, often the mouse itself is all that is necessary.
• Click in the Main Window and roll the mouse wheel to zoom in and
out.
• Click and hold the wheel to grab the model and pan.
• Click in the Main Window to make it active, and then use the arrow
keys on the keyboard to rotate the model up, down, left or right.

Displaying only Selected Objects in the Main Window

Sometimes you will want to display only specific objects in the Main Window. In
this exercise, assume that the goal is to turn off the display of the hip rafters and
central column.
 Exercise: Displaying only Selected Objects

1 With the file named Modeling 20.std still open, click the View From +Z
icon.
2 Click Select > Selection Mode > Drag Line.

3 Drag a horizontal line across all rafters, just below the vertex. All rafters
and the central column are selected.
4 Click Select > By Inverse > Inverse Beam Selection. The selection inverts.
5 Click View > View Selected Objects Only.
All unselected objects become invisible.
6 Click the Isometric View icon.
The structure is displayed without the hip rafters and central column.
7 Click View menu again, and note the check mark next to the View Selected
Objects Only command, indicating that the command is toggled on.
8 Click View > View Selected Objects Only once again to restore the entire
structure to the Main Window. Another option is to click the Display
Whole Structure icon.

Isolating a Portion of the Structure into its own View

With the file named Modeling 20.std still open, assume the goal is to isolate the
framing members in the horizontal plane at the eave of the hip roof so they
appear in a separate view.
 Exercise: Isolate a Portion of the Structure into its own View

1 Click the View From +Z icon.
2 Click Select > Selection Mode > Drag Box.

3 Click and drag a fence around the framing members at the elevation of the
eave. Make the box large enough to completely include the members in
the horizontal plane, but small enough not to include the mid-points of
any of the other members.
4 Click View > New View.
5 Choose the option to Create a new window for the view in the New View
dialog, and then click OK.
A new window is created in which only the members in the horizontal
plane at the eave elevation are visible.
6 Click the Isometric View icon.
7 Click View > View Management > Save View…. The Save View As dialog
opens.
8 Enter the name Eave, and click OK. This isometric view has now been
saved.
It is possible to create and save as many views as desired.
To access the saved views, click View > Open View…, and then choose the
desired view from the list.
Note that views are fully functional, and beams can be added in any view.
Grids can also be displayed in any window, not just in the Main Window.
Note that views are saved in an auxiliary file named
modelname.REI_SPRO_Auxilary_Data. The data required to define views
is not saved in the .std file itself.
current file.

Module Review
Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Questions
1 Translational Repeat, Add Beams tool, and right-hand rule are examples of
model generation tools available in the STAAD.Pro Graphical User
Interface.
• True
• False
2 Copy and Paste techniques can be used to copy geometry from one
STAAD.Pro model and paste it into another.
• True
• False
3 The default orientation of the global coordinate system in STAAD.Pro could
be described by stating that gravity acts in the negative global Y direction.
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 Translational Repeat, Add Beams tool, and right-hand rule are examples of
model generation tools available in the STAAD.Pro Graphical User
Interface.
False
It is true that Translational Repeat and the Add Beams tool are examples
of model generation tools offered in the GUI. However, the right-hand rule
is not a GUI tool, but rather a mnemonic that is used to describe many
orientation and sign conventions in STAAD.Pro.
2 Copy and Paste techniques can be used to copy geometry from one
STAAD.Pro model and paste it into another.
True
This technique was illustrated in an exercise in this module.
3 The default orientation of the global coordinate system in STAAD.Pro could
be described by stating that gravity acts in the negative global Y direction.
True
By default, the global Y-axis in a STAAD.Pro model is directed upward,
implying that gravity acts in the negative global Y direction.

Module Review

Finite Element Modeling
Module Overview
This module covers the fundamentals of modeling with plate elements (two-
dimensional entities) in STAAD.Pro. Various methods are demonstrated to create
individual plate elements and to generate meshes of plates. The plate
specifications are reviewed.
• General familiarity with finite element analysis
• Prior experience with STAAD.Pro or completion of the Model Generation
module
Module Objectives
• Create plate model geometry using a variety of available techniques
• Distinguish conditions that might require the use of solid elements as
opposed to plate elements
• Apply plate specifications effectively
May-10 75 Finite Element Modeling

Questions
1 Finite elements can be used to model components like concrete walls that
span in more than one direction.
• True
• False
2 Finite element models approximate the behavior of a real structure by
modeling the real structure as a mesh of many small plate elements.
• True
• False
3 The process of generating a mesh of plates requires the calculation of the
coordinates of all of the nodes in the mesh.
• True
• False
Finite Element Modeling 76 May-10

Answers
1 Finite elements can be used to model components like concrete walls that
span in more than one direction.
True
Finite elements in STAAD.Pro can have out-of-plane bending stiffness in
addition to in-plane stiffness, so they have the ability to span in different
directions depending on the boundary or support conditions.
2 Finite element models approximate the behavior of a real structure by
modeling the real structure as a mesh of many small plate elements.
True
The principle of finite element modeling involves meshing a structure into
many small elements connected at their nodes.
3 The process of generating a mesh of plates requires the calculation of the
coordinates of all of the nodes in the mesh.
False
The graphical user interface in STAAD.Pro provides many tools to rapidly
generate meshes of plate elements without ever having to manually
calculate nodal coordinates.

Introduction to Finite Element Analysis

Beams and columns are modeled with line-type entities, but modeling walls,
roofs, slabs and other surface components requires an area-type entity capable of
distributing load in more than one direction. This entity is known as a finite
element, or “plate”.
In a finite element analysis, a wall or a slab is modeled by an assemblage of small

plates consisting of triangles (3-noded plates) or quadrilaterals (4-noded plates).
The difference between a beam and a plate relates to their abilities to distribute
loads. A load that is applied to a beam must be reacted at one end or the other as
indicated graphically in the figure below.
By contrast, depending on their boundary conditions, plates have the ability to

distribute load in multiple directions as indicated graphically in the figure below.
By default, plates in STAAD.Pro have the ability to resist both in-plane forces
(plane stress action) and out-of-plane forces (plate bending action).
Note: STAAD.Pro includes another type of entity called a Surface, which inherently is
a mesh of plate elements. Surfaces are not covered in detail in this Module.

Another finite element available in STAAD.Pro is a solid element, or cube. Solid

elements are normally used in situations where the thickness of the object being
modeled is large in proportion to the lateral dimensions. The eight-noded solid
element as implemented in STAAD.Pro is shown in the figure below.
By collapsing various nodes together, an eight-noded solid element can be

degenerated to forms with four to seven nodes, as shown in the figure below.
Solid elements will not be used in this training, but they are presented here in
order to introduce the concept of the least lateral dimension-to-thickness ratio as
a means to decide between plate elements and solid elements.

In a structure where the ratio of the least lateral dimension to the thickness is less
than 10, it is generally advisable to model that structure using solid elements, as
indicated graphically in the figure below. When the least lateral dimension to the
thickness ratio exceeds 10 it is generally acceptable to use plate elements.
Why Use a Mesh?
When analyzing a beam, if the displacements at the ends are known, the
displacements at intermediate points can be determined using secondary analysis
techniques like the moment-area method.
However, there are no similar equations to determine the displacement at some

arbitrary point within the three or four corners of a plate. So, it is impossible to
accurately model the behavior of a plate using just a single element.
In a finite element analysis, displacements can only be determined at the nodes

(corners) of the elements, and stresses can only be accurately determined at the
centers of the elements.
So, since there is frequently a need to evaluate displacements at arbitrary points

within a slab or around its perimeter, slabs must be modeled using a mesh of
plate elements in such a way that the nodes of some elements coordinate with
the points of interest.

Likewise, when there is a need to study stresses and stress gradients in a slab at
points of interest such as near point loads, holes, inside corners, depressions,
changes in thickness, etc., it is necessary to use a mesh that places the centers of
elements in close proximity to the points of interest.
For these reasons, a finite element analysis will almost always require a mesh of
elements as opposed to just a single element or a few elements.
Guidelines for Mesh Density

Now that we have established the need for a mesh of elements in most practical
situations, the next item to consider is the mesh density. The guiding concept
should be to use a mesh that is as coarse as it can be, while still providing
adequate results. In general, coarser meshes will be stiffer than finer meshes, and
the analysis results should converge toward the theoretical solution as the mesh
density increases. So the goal is to select a mesh density that has achieved
reasonable convergence, while still being coarse enough to be manageable from
an analysis perspective.
Hint: Determining whether convergence has been achieved may require creating a
few different mesh densities and observing a parameter to determine if the
value of that parameter continues to experience significant change as the mesh
is made finer.
Engineering judgment must be used when selecting a mesh density for a model,
in order to balance accuracy with modeling efficiency. The following items provide
some guidance in selecting a mesh density.
• Consider a slab supported by a frame, and assume that under load it has a
deflected shape similar to the shape shown in the figure below.

• In order to obtain deflection information along the indicated edge, it is

necessary to know the deflections at the points of maximum deflection, at the
end points, and at a few intermediate points, as shown by the X's in the figure.
The more data points there are, the more accurately the deflected shape can
be modeled. On the other hand, it would be undesirable to have too many
points, since it would make the structure too cumbersome to analyze.
• Try to predict the approximate deflected shape of the structure, and envision
the number of nodes that would be required to provide a reasonably accurate
indication of that deflected shape. For example, a simply supported plate
deflects like a bowl. Envision the deflected shape that would be revealed if
longitudinal and transverse sections were cut through the point of maximum
deflection. The shape would be parabolic, similar to the deflected shape of a
beam. How many points does it take to accurately represent a deflected shape
of that type? Probably a total of seven points would be a minimum. Seven
points would imply six elements along the length of the slab. Thus a six-by-six
grid of elements seems like a minimum for this plate. If the edges of the
element are fixed or monolithic with a concrete beam, the deflected shape
may include some reverse curvature. In this case, nine or more points may be
required to accurately represent the deflected shape. That would imply eight
or more elements in that direction.
• Finer meshes may be needed in the vicinity of a concentrated force to
visualize the deflected shape or to evaluate the stresses and stress gradients in
that location. One rule of thumb for determining the number of nodes to be
modeled around a point load is to start by envisioning a circular area around
the concentrated load. Divide that circle into 30 pie-shaped segments. This
implies 12 triangular elements around a circle whose center is the location of
the point load.
• A finer mesh should be considered around any holes in a plate.
• There are no hard-and-fast rules for mesh density. But once a mesh has been
created and incorporated into a model, it can be difficult to go back and
change the mesh density and still achieve proper connectivity, so it is worth
considering thoroughly before developing a model too far.

Guidelines for Element Shape

The shape of the individual elements is important to obtain good results from a
finite element analysis. The optimum shape for a quadrilateral element is a
square. The more a quad plate deviates from a square toward a rectangular
shape, the greater the potential for error in the results. The best results are
obtained when the ratio of the element's longest side to its shortest side is no
greater than 2:1. In no case should the ratio exceed 4:1. The potential for error
also increases as the internal angles of a quadrilateral plate deviate from 90
degrees. As a general rule, the internal angles of an individual quadrilateral plate
element should be kept between 60 and 120 degrees. Internal angles in excess of
180 degrees are not permitted.
In the case of triangular elements, the ideal shape is an equilateral triangle. As a

general rule for triangular plates, internal angles should be kept as close to 60
degrees as possible.
Hint: The figure below, taken from Section 1.6 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference
manual, shows examples of well-formed and poorly-formed plates.
Good practice dictates that all four nodes of a quadrilateral element should lie in
the same plane.
Note: If four nodes do not lie on one plane, consider using two triangular elements.
Quadrilateral elements are generally preferable to triangular elements, because

quads have more degrees of freedom and therefore they inherently have greater
accuracy.

When creating a mesh of quadrilateral elements, it is best to orient them in the

principal stress directions. If a quad is rectangular, orient the short side parallel to
the direction of larger stress gradient as shown in the figure below. These
considerations are less important in areas of low stress, or nearly constant strain
energy.

Resolving Poorly Shaped Plates in a Model

One common cause of poorly shaped plates arises when trying to model circular
meshes. Since plates cannot have curved sides in STAAD.Pro, circular structures
must be approximated using a mesh of triangular or quad elements. These
elements are commonly drawn using a radial grid. Because the distance between
grid points gets larger toward the outside of a radial grid, it is possible to end up
with elements near the outer edges that are very long and narrow as shown in the
figure below.
When the ratio of the element's longest side to its shortest side exceeds 4:1, the
results of a finite element analysis can become less accurate. The figure below
shows one potential method of creating elements in circular or radial structures.

Creating Individual Finite Elements
These elements get smaller towards the center but retain the same approximate
proportions between the sides.
In most other cases of poorly shaped elements, the problem can generally be
resolved by breaking a poorly shaped plate into two or more plates that have a
better shape.
Snap Node/Plate Tool

The Snap Node/Plate tool makes use of the dimensional control provided by a
grid to add individual plates. Its use is demonstrated in the following exercise.
 Exercise: Create Individual Finite Elements with the Snap Node/Plate Tool
1 Open the dataset file named Finite Elements 1.std.
2 Click Geometry > Snap/Grid Node > Plate > Quad in the Menu Bar.
The Snap Node/Plate dialog opens, and a grid is displayed. This dialog is
used to control the grid settings and to toggle the plate drawing mode on
and off.
By default, the plate drawing mode will be active. We can confirm this by
moving the cursor around on the grid. Note that the cursor snaps to grid
intersections only.

3 Click the cursor at any four grid intersections, moving in a clockwise or

counterclockwise direction, to experiment with drawing a quadrilateral
plate.
STAAD.Pro draws a four-noded element, automatically closing the polygon
between the fourth node and the first node.
Notice that the next line is rubber-banding from the last click. The Snap
Node/Plate tool behaves like the Snap Node/Beam tool in the sense that
the last node for one plate becomes the first node for the next plate,
unless the hot spot is moved by pressing the Control (Ctrl) key and clicking
on a different location.
4 Click the Snap Node/Plate button in the Snap Node/Plate dialog to toggle
off the plate drawing mode.
Note: The Plates Cursor is currently active.
5 Double-click on the plate just drawn. A Plate query dialog opens, and
provides the following data:
• Node coordinates
• Lengths of the sides
• Plate area
Note: The Property Constants tab does not contain any information at this
point, because properties have not yet been defined. More information
will appear in the Plate query dialog as the model is developed and the
information becomes available. When the model is completed and the
analysis has been run, additional tabs will appear in this dialog to
display results such as stresses, displacements, and so forth.
6 Click Close to dismiss the Plate query dialog.
Hint: Tool tip help, or “bubble help”, is also available for plates. Hover the
Plates Cursor over the plate. A window displaying some information
about the plate pops up next to the Plates Cursor. The amount and type
of information displayed by the tool tip help is controlled by selecting
View > Structural Tool Tip Options from the Menu Bar.
7 Click Geometry > Snap Grid/Node > Plate > Triangle in the Menu Bar.
8 Click at any three locations on the grid to create a three-noded plate
element.
9 Click the Snap Node/Plate button to toggle it off.

10 Keep the current model open for use in the next section.
When the Geometry tab, Plate sub-tab is active, two tables labeled Nodes and
Plates are displayed in the Data Area on the right side of the screen. These tables
are analogous to the Nodes and Beams tables for structures composed of linear
elements.
• The Nodes table provides the XYZ coordinates for each node in the model.
• The Plates table contains a listing of the plates in the model, and their
incidences, that is, the nodes at their corners A, B, C and D.
The order in which the nodes are listed represents the order in which they were
added to the model. The significance of this order is that it establishes the local
coordinate system for each plate. This local coordinate system is discussed in
detail in a different module, but for now, be aware of the fact that the order of the
nodes defines a “top” and a “bottom” surface for each plate.
In the normal process of modeling with plates, it is common to end up with plates
in various orientations. To address this, and to provide some consistency to the
orientation of logical groups of plates, STAAD.Pro provides a tool called
Commands > Geometric Constants > Plate Reference Point… This tool can be
used to reorient plates. Its use is demonstrated in another module, but for now
just be aware that the function exists, and don't be concerned about creating
plates with consistent orientations.
Hint: Additional information on creating plate elements, and details on the

theoretical basis of STAAD.Pro finite elements are provided in Section 1.6.1 of
the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference, which is accessible through the Help menu
item.
It is essential to draw the nodes of a plate element in either a clockwise or

counterclockwise sequence. Although STAAD.Pro will allow a plate to be drawn in
a sequence that is not clockwise or counterclockwise, a plate defined in this
manner will be “warped” and will cause errors when the analysis is run.
The geometry shown in the figure below represents an attempt to draw a plate
without drawing the nodes in consecutive order, clockwise or counterclockwise.

The figure shown below is not two triangular plates, because there is no node
where the diagonal lines cross. Instead it is a folded or “warped” quad plate.
Warning: Plates should not be defined in this manner, even though the program does
not prohibit nodes from being selected this way.
There are times when it is generally convenient to use the Snap/Grid Node tool,
but it becomes necessary to snap to an existing node that is not at a grid
intersection. The following exercise demonstrates how this can be done.
 Exercise: Snapping to off-grid Nodes while using the Snap/Grid Node Tool
1 Ensure that the file named Finite Elements 1.std is still open.
2 Click anywhere in the Main Window and then press the keyboard hotkey
Shift + K to display Node Points.
Note that there is a node near the upper right corner of the grid, but it
does not coordinate with a grid intersection.
3 Click the Snap Node/Plate button to toggle the plate drawing mode on.
Notice that the cursor tracks to grid intersections, but in the default mode
it will not snap to the node that is off-grid.

4 Click the checkbox labeled Snap to existing nodes too in the Snap Node/
Plate dialog as shown below. When this option is selected, STAAD.Pro will
snap to existing nodes that do not fall on a grid intersection.
5 Move the cursor back to the grid and notice that it now snaps to the off-
grid node in addition to snapping to the grid intersections.
A plate could now be drawn if desired.
current file.

Add Plates Tools

In addition to being able to draw individual plates using a grid, there are also tools
that allow plates to be drawn graphically without the use of the grid. These are
the Add Plates tools, which are the plate analogous to the Add Beams tool. They
offer two options:
• Add 3-Noded Plates icon
• Add 4-Noded Plates icon
The use of the Add 4-Noded Plates tool will be demonstrated in the next exercise.
 Exercise: Using the Add 4-Noded Plates Tool

Assume that the goal is to add a 4-noded plate to close the 8-sided
structure.
2 Press the keyboard hotkey Shift + T to toggle on Plate Orientation.
Note that the existing plates are all oriented such that their local Z axes
point toward the center of the structure. Assume that the goal is to infill
the missing plate and orient it in the same way.
3 Click Geometry > Add Plate > Quad.
4 Starting at the lower left corner and moving in a clockwise direction, click
at the four nodes to define the corners of the infill plate.
current file.

Mesh Generation
Mesh Generation
Suppose a model contains some nodes that define the corners of a wall that is to
be represented with a series of finite elements. This series or matrix of finite
elements is often referred to as a mesh, and the process of creating a series or
matrix of elements is known as mesh generation or meshing.
The previous sections have demonstrated how to manually create elements by

drawing them with the help of a grid, or by drawing them from node to node.
That is what one might call a “brute force” method for generating a mesh.
Fortunately, STAAD.Pro offers many alternative methods that are much more
convenient and much less labor-intensive.
• Structure Wizard method
• Super-Element method
• Generate Surface Meshing command
These methods are demonstrated in detail in the following exercises to illustrate

three different methods to create a 20 ft x 40 ft {6 m x 12 m} rectangular mesh.
Finally, some discussion is presented on the STAAD.Pro Input Editor method.
Using Structure Wizard to Generate a Mesh

The Structure Wizard offers a library of prototype models whose dimensions can
be specified parametrically to quickly create a variety of structures. The Structure
Wizard can be used to generate plate elements by selecting from several available
prototypes, including:
• Polygonal Plate With Holes
• Circular Plate With Holes
• Quad Plate
• Cylindrical Surface
• Spherical Surface
• Cooling Tower
• Hyperbolic Paraboloid Shell
For this exercise, we will use the Quad Plate prototype.

Mesh Generation
 Exercise: Using the Structure Wizard to Generate a Mesh

2 Click Geometry > Run Structure Wizard in the Menu Bar.
3 Look in the lower right corner of the Structure Wizard window to verify
that the Structure Wizard’s input units are set to ft {m}.
If necessary, input units can be revised by clicking File > Select Units in the
Structure Wizard's Menu Bar.
4 Verify that the Prototype Models radio button is selected.
5 Select Surface/Plate Models in the Model Type list.
Icons representing the available prototype models for plate-type
structures appear in the left pane of the Structure Wizard window.
6 Double-click the Quad Plate icon.
The Select Meshing Parameters dialog for the Quad Plate appears. This
dialog provides the following parameters to control the mesh generation:
• Corners category: to input the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the four
corners A, B, C and D of the plate.
• Element Type category: to choose whether to generate a mesh of
triangular or quadrilateral plates.
• Divn. column: to specify the number of divisions to create along the
AB, BC, CD and DA sides. The minimum and maximum limits of number
of divisions on each side are 1 and 100 respectively. Two opposite sides
may have a different number of divisions. However, if the number of
divisions for two opposite sides is different, and if Quadrilateral
elements are being used, then the sum of all divisions must be an even
number.

Mesh Generation
• Bias column: to create divisions of varying lengths as shown below if

desired. If the goal is to create equal divisions along the length of a
side, keep the Bias parameter set to its default value of 1. The figure
below shows an example with 5 divisions along line BC. Moving from B
toward C, the divisions vary from 1 unit long to 5 units long. A mesh
with this spacing could be created by specifying the Bias for that side
as 5.
The Bias value may also be negative. When negative biasing is specified,
the side is divided so that the first division length is the value of the
biasing times the last division length.
Note: For this example, we will create a 20 ft x 40 ft {6 m x 12 m} rectangular

mesh as shown in the figure below.
(0, 20, 0) B C (40, 20, 0)
{(0, 6, 0)} {(12, 6, 0)}
40 ft x 20 ft
{12 m x 6 m}
A D
(0, 0, 0) (40, 0, 0)
{(0, 0, 0)} {(12, 0, 0)}
Hint: The geometry must be defined either in clockwise or counterclockwise

order to avoid a warped plate.
7 Enter the values in the Select Meshing Parameters dialog as shown in the
figure below to produce a 10 x 20 mesh of 2-foot {0.6-meter} square plate
elements.

Mesh Generation
English Units:
Metric Units:
8 Leave the Element Type category set to Quadrilateral, and click Apply.
A graphical representation of the plate appears in the right pane of the
Structure Wizard window.
Any of the parameters can be revised by double-clicking on the graphic to
re-open the Select Meshing Parameters dialog, or by right-clicking on the
graphic and selecting Change Property from the pop-up menu. The effect
of changing various parameters can quickly be viewed and evaluated by
observing the resulting prototype model in the right pane of the Structure
Wizard.

Mesh Generation
9 Click File > Merge Model with STAAD.Pro Model in the Structure Wizard's
Menu Bar, and click Yes to confirm.
10 Click OK in the Paste Prototype Model dialog to complete the merge and
position the prototype at the origin.
In this model, another warning dialog pops up to indicate that duplicate
nodes have been ignored. This occurs because the dataset model already
had one node at the origin.
11 Click OK to acknowledge.
The 10 x 20 mesh will be displayed in the Main Window.
Note: By using any combination of the available prototype models, a wide

range of structure geometry can quickly be generated and transferred/
merged into the main STAAD.Pro model.
Hint: Additional information on using the Structure Wizard to model slabs may
be found in Section 2.3.6.16 of the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment
manual.
current file.
Creating a Mesh from a “Super Element”

The Generate Plate Mesh command is an excellent way to generate a mesh from a
triangular or quadrilateral “super-element”. The following exercise will
demonstrate the “super-element” method to generate the same mesh as in the
previous exercise.
 Exercise: Creating a Mesh from a “Super-Element”

This file already contains one 20 ft. by 40 ft. {6 m x 12 m} plate (or “super-
element”) that represents the overall size of the mesh to be created.
2 Click the plate with the Plates Cursor to select it. When the edges highlight
to confirm that it is selected, click the right mouse button anywhere in the
Main Window. A pop-up menu is displayed.
3 Click on Generate Plate Mesh… in the pop-up menu.

4 Choose the Quadrilateral Meshing radio button and then click OK.

Mesh Generation
The coordinates for the corners automatically appear in the Select

Meshing Parameters dialog. Node A is the first node that was clicked to
define the plate, Node B is the second one, etc.
5 Leave the Bias parameter in all four fields set to its default value of 1, so
that each side will be divided into equal proportions creating equal length
elements.
6 Set the Division parameters as follows to produce a 10 x 20 mesh of 2 ft. by
2 ft. {0.6 m x 0.6 m} elements:
• AB: 10
• BC: 20
• CD: 10
• DA: 20
7 Click Apply to mesh the plate.
8 Click on the icon that looks like a question mark as shown in the figure
below.
The Structural Diagram Info dialog opens and displays statistical

information about the model. In this case, it is useful to confirm that a
total of 200 plates exist in the model.
Note: The Generate Plate Mesh command is an excellent way to generate a

mesh from a triangular or quadrilateral “super-element”, but it cannot
be used for polygons with five or more sides. The next section presents
another method for generating meshes that allows a mesh to be
created for any shape.
current file.

Mesh Generation
Using the Generate Surface Meshing Command

First we will demonstrate how the Generate Surface Meshing command can be
used to create exactly the same 20 ft. by 40 ft. {6 m x 12 m} mesh as we created
above. Then we will explore how it can be used to generate meshes in polygons
with five or more sides.
 Exercise: Using the Generate Surface Meshing Command for Four-Sided

Polygons
2 Press the keyboard hotkey Shift + K to toggle on the display of node
points. This file already has the same four corner nodes defined.
3 Click Geometry > Generate Surface Meshing in the Menu Bar to activate
the Mesh Generation Cursor.
4 Click on the nodes in the order shown in the figure below:
5 After clicking on Node 4, right-click the mouse to close the polygon

designating the boundary of the mesh.
Note: Another option to close the polygon is to click back on the starting node.
6 Select the Quadrilateral Meshing radio button and click OK.

Mesh Generation
The Select Meshing Parameters dialog opens with the coordinates for the
corners already populated. Node A is the first node that was clicked to
define the mesh, Node B is the second one, etc.
7 Leave the Bias parameter in all four fields set to its default value of 1.
8 Set the Division parameters as follows to produce a 10 x 20 mesh:
• AB: 10
• BC: 20
• CD: 10
• DA: 20
9 Click Apply to generate the mesh.
The result is a 10 x 20 mesh of 2 ft. by 2 ft. {0.6 m x 0.6 m} elements
identical to the mesh created in the previous section.
current file.
Now let's explore STAAD.Pro's ability to generate meshes in polygons with five or
more sides using the Generate Surface Meshing command.
 Exercise: Using the Generate Surface Meshing Command for Polygons with
more than Four Sides
2 Press the keyboard hotkey Shift + K to toggle on the display of node
points. This file has been pre-populated with six nodes that will define the
vertices of a six-sided shape.
3 Click Geometry > Generate Surface Meshing in the Menu Bar.

Mesh Generation

The Boundary item in the tree view shows the coordinates of the corner
nodes used to define the polygon. It also shows the number of divisions,
that is, the number of elements to be created along each side of the
polygon, as well as the Bias value as described above. These values can be
edited directly in this table. The default is for STAAD.Pro to segment each
side of the polygon into 10 divisions, regardless of the length of the side.
6 Click OK in the Define Mesh Region dialog, and note the effect.
By allowing the program to divide every side into 10 segments, it results in
a wide range of element sizes throughout the mesh. Let's assume that we
would prefer a more uniform distribution of element sizes. To see how to
accomplish this, take the following steps:
7 Click Edit > Undo Generate Mesh in the Menu Bar.

Mesh Generation
The following figure shows the dimensions around the perimeter of the
polygon. These were displayed by clicking Tools > Display Node to Node
Distance, and then clicking around the perimeter.
By using these dimensions, or the corresponding metric dimensions, a set

of Division values can be established that will set the number of divisions
proportional to the lengths of the sides.
8 Click Geometry > Generate Surface Meshing in the Menu Bar.

Mesh Generation

11 Set the values in the Div. column as shown in the figure below:
Note: We started drawing the polygon at the extreme left node in order to
establish the correlation between the sides of the polygon and the rows
in the table shown in the Define Mesh Region dialog.
When this mesh is generated, we will see that it now consists of elements
of a much more uniform size. Before we actually generate the mesh let's
explore one more powerful function of the Generate Surface Meshing
command, which is the ability to incorporate holes into a mesh.
12 Click on the item labeled HOLES beneath the Boundary item in the tree
view as shown below:

Mesh Generation
Two new icons appear just above the tree view: Add New Hole and Delete
Hole.
13 Click the Add New Hole icon. A new item labeled Hole 1 appears beneath
the HOLES item in the tree view. Additional items will appear for each new
hole that is added.
Note: The label associated with each hole can be edited if desired. For
instance, a hole could be labeled as “Supply” or “Return” or “Elevator”
or “Stair”.
14 Click on the upper right cell of the Define Mesh Region dialog to open a
dropdown menu of available hole shapes as shown below:
15 Select the Circle option.
Note: The input cells change based on the selected Region Type, to offer
context-appropriate options for defining holes with different
geometries.
16 Enter the following parameters:
• X coordinate of Origin: 20 {6}
• Y coordinate of Origin: 10 {3}
• Z coordinate of Origin: 0 {0}
• Radius of Circle: 5 {1.5}
• Divisions Along Periphery: 30 {30}
At this point, additional holes could be entered by clicking on the HOLES
item in the tree view and then clicking the Add New Hole icon. But for this
exercise, we will only add the one circular hole.

Mesh Generation
17 Click the OK button in the Define Mesh Region dialog to generate the
mesh shown below.
The Division values that we entered created a very uniform element size
throughout the mesh.
The circular hole is not truly circular, because it is formed by the (straight)
edges of the adjacent plates. However, our use of 30 divisions around the
periphery results in a hole that appears very smooth, and the elements
around the perimeter of the hole are very close to the size of the other
plates in the mesh.
current file.

Mesh Generation
A few comments about this exercise:
With this 6-sided shape the program did not offer an option to choose between
polygonal meshing or quadrilateral meshing. That is because STAAD.Pro
automatically determines that a 6-sided shape is not a good candidate for
quadrilateral meshing. However, if a four-sided polygon is defined with the
Generate Surface Meshing command, even if it is not a rectangular shape,
STAAD.Pro offers the option of either polygonal meshing or quadrilateral meshing.
Holes can also be created in a mesh simply by selecting elements with the Plates
Cursor and deleting them, but this method can only be used after the elements
have actually been generated, and it limits the shape and location of holes to
conform to the existing mesh geometry.
Once a mesh has been generated with the Generate Surface Meshing tool, there
is no way to reopen the Define Mesh Region dialog to change parameters or
introduce new holes. If changes are required, the mesh must either be completely
regenerated or the modifications must be made manually.

Mesh Generation
Using the Editor to Create a Mesh

Actions performed in the GUI to build a model have the effect of adding new
commands to the STAAD.Pro input file.
It is also possible to modify the input file directly, rather than doing it through the
GUI. In some situations, this may be the easiest and most efficient way to add
commands or geometry to the input file. This concept holds true for mesh
generation as well. If a situation arises where the node coordinates and plate
incidences can be easily generated in a text file format, then this data can be
placed directly into the STAAD Input File.
Hint: The STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual, Section 5.14 contains a complete
description of the commands available for generating meshes.
Hint: Several examples illustrating how to create meshes using the Input File Editor
are presented in the STAAD.Pro Examples manual. See Example Problem No. 9,
No. 19 and No. 20.

Plate Specifications
This module has focused on methods of modeling with finite elements and the
tools available for mesh generation. The general guidelines presented here should
provide assistance in producing well-behaved meshes. In addition to these
considerations, the behavior of finite elements is further influenced by the
assignment of thickness, material properties, loads, and supports, all of which are
discussed in detail in another module.
There are also specifications that are available for assignment to plates, each of
which has a particular effect on the behavior of plates. The available plate
specifications are also discussed in detail in another module, but they are
reproduced here for reference.
• Release: Releases are used to modify a plate's ability to transfer load in any of
the six degrees of freedom at one of its nodes. Plate releases are specified
with respect to the plate local axis system.
• Ignore Inplane Rotation: Ignore inplane rotation is used to specify that the
program is to ignore “in-plane stiffness” associated with the Mz degree of
freedom at the nodes of plates.
• Rigid Inplane Rotation: Rigid inplane rotation is used to specify that all nodes
in a plate have an “infinite” rotational stiffness about the Mz degree of
freedom.
Note: This specification is not available through the GUI. It is only accessible by
manually entering the command into the input file.
• Plane Stress: Plane Stress is used to specify that a plate is only capable of
resisting in-plane loads, i.e. membrane stresses and in-plane shear, but is
incapable of resisting out-of-plane shears or edge moments.
Warning: Using the Plane Stress specification on a plate in a floor or roof slab
can lead to “loss” of loads such as self-weight, because, for “Plane
Stress” elements, the out-of-plane shear action and the bending
degrees of freedom are switched off.
• Ignore Stiffness: Ignore Stiffness is used to specify that the stiffness of a plate
element is to be completely ignored in the assembly of the stiffness matrix.
This specification allows plate elements to be modeled for the purpose of
applying loads to a structure without allowing those elements to contribute
resistance in any way.

Additional Considerations
Additional Considerations
One final program consideration that has an influence on finite element modeling
behavior is the option to split an existing member if a new node is placed on the
member. It can be found by clicking View > Options > Tolerance in the Menu Bar
as shown in the figure below.
When this option is selected, if modeling changes cause a new node to be placed
somewhere along the length of an existing beam member, the existing member
will automatically be split at the location of the new node, and both portions of
the split member will be connected to the new node. If this option is not selected,
then existing members will not be split if new nodes are added somewhere along
the length of the existing member. Instead, the existing member will remain as a
single, continuous member running through the new node location and having no
structural connection to the new node.
This setting is significant with respect to finite element modeling, because there
are often times where a mesh is created to represent a concrete slab that is
intended to behave monolithically with the supporting reinforced concrete frame.
If this is the intent, then it may be beneficial to keep this option selected, so that

Module Review
when a mesh is generated at a floor level, it will automatically split the beams at
the mesh nodes, and transfer load at the common nodes, to represent monolithic
behavior between beams and slab.
Module Review
Questions
1 The ideal mesh density is achieved when a polygon is segmented such that
each side has 10 divisions.
• True
• False
2 The ideal shape for a Quadrilateral plate is a square.
• True
• False
3 Three mesh generation techniques in STAAD.Pro include: Structure Wizard
method, Super-Element method, and Mesh Generation Cursor method.
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 The ideal mesh density is achieved when a polygon is segmented such that
each side has 10 divisions.
False
There are no hard and fast rules that dictate an “ideal mesh density”. The
guiding concept should be to use a mesh that is as coarse as it can be,
while still providing adequate results. The guidelines presented in this
module provide some tips to accomplish this.
2 The ideal shape for a Quadrilateral plate is a square.
True
The potential for error in the results increases as a quad plate deviates
from a square toward a rectangular shape, and as the internal angles of a
quad plate deviate from 90 degrees.
3 Three mesh generation techniques in STAAD.Pro include: Structure Wizard
method, Super-Element method, and Mesh Generation Cursor method.
True
In addition to demonstrating these three methods, this module also
discusses the fact that there may be some instances where mesh
generation may be accomplished by entering data directly into the STAAD
Input File.

Property Assignment
Module Overview
This module covers the fundamentals of defining and assigning Properties,
Specifications, Supports, Loads, and Materials in STAAD.Pro. The use of Groups is
demonstrated. Member/Plate orientations are discussed using a local coordinate
system, which is then related to the global coordinate system.
• Prior experience using STAAD.Pro, or completion of the Model Generation
module.
Module Objectives
• Describe member local coordinate system and plate local coordinate system
• Create Groups and use them to perform functions on multiple entities at one
time
• Define and assign Properties, Beta Angles, Specifications, Supports, and
Materials
• Create primary Load Cases, populate them with simple Load Items, and assign
them to the model
• Have a general familiarity with creating User Tables, adding or removing
sections from the model, modifying the section database, and creating
custom materials
May-10 111 Property Assignment

Questions
1 Model geometry can be generated using the Graphical User Interface, the
Input Editor, the Structure Wizard, imported from DXF, or a combination of
these methods.
• True
• False
2 Model geometry can be defined using a combination of nodes, members,
plates, surfaces, and solids.
• True
• False
3 A STAAD.Pro model defined as a SPACE type structure has three mutually
perpendicular global axes that are used to define the geometry of the
model.
• True
• False
Property Assignment 112 May-10

Answers
1 Model geometry can be generated using the Graphical User Interface, the
Input Editor, Structure Wizard, imported from DXF, or a combination of
these methods.
True
The GUI has many tools to create and edit model geometry. STAAD.Pro
provides the flexibility of being able to access the model geometry
through tables and the STAAD Input Editor. Model geometry can also be
created with the Structure Wizard or imported from a DXF or other file
formats.
2 Model geometry can be defined using a combination of nodes, members,
plates, surfaces, and solids.
True
All of these five entities can be incorporated to define the geometry for a
model.
3 A STAAD.Pro model defined as a SPACE type structure has a global
coordinate system defined by three mutually perpendicular global axes
that are used to define the geometry of any model.
True
A SPACE type structure defines model geometry in terms of coordinates
that refer to the global X, Y, and Z axes. Typically, the Y axis is vertical and
the X and Z axes define the horizontal plane.

Member/Plate Orientation and Local Coordinate System

Members in STAAD.Pro are defined as spanning from a starting node to an ending
node. The starting node and ending node are based on the order in which the
nodes were clicked if the beam was added graphically, or based on the order of
the member incidences if the beam was added directly in the Beams table or
STAAD Input File. STAAD.Pro provides some graphical methods of identifying the
starting and ending nodes of members.
 Exercise: Identifying Starting and Ending Ends of Beams

1 Open the dataset file named Properties 1.std.
2 Click the Symbols ad Labels icon on the Structure toolbar.
3 On the Labels tab, in the Beams category, select the option named Beam
Ends.
Note that two color swatches are displayed. These represent the colors
that will be used to identify the respective ends of beams.
The color swatches act as links to open a color palette, so beam end colors
can be configured as desired.
4 Click OK to dismiss the Diagrams dialog box.
Beam end colors will be displayed on all members until they are
specifically toggled off. The keyboard hotkey to toggle the display of beam
end colors is Shift + E.
5 Press Shift + E to toggle off beam end colors.
6 Hover the Beams Cursor over any beam in the model. In this way, beam
end colors can be observed for a single member at a time, and only for as
long as necessary.
Now that we have observed the directionality of a beam, we can introduce the
concept of the member local coordinate system. Each member has its own local
coordinate system consisting of local x, local y, and local z axes. The origin of the
local axis system for any member occurs at the starting node for that member.
The local x axis starts at the (local) origin and points toward the ending node.
Hint: Refer to Technical Reference section 1.5.2 for more on coordinate systems.

All three local axes are mutually perpendicular, and their relationships to each
other are defined by the right-hand rule (close the x axis into the y axis with the
fingers of the right hand and the right thumb will indicate the positive sense of
the z axis).
Benefits of the Local Coordinate System

The member local coordinate system offers some significant benefits during
modeling and design. For instance, having a member local coordinate system
makes it possible to specify unique member orientations, such as columns with
their webs oriented radially as shown in the figure below.
Without a member local coordinate system, there would be no way to describe

this orientation of the columns, and STAAD.Pro would have no choice but to
assume they are all oriented in the same direction as suggested in the figure
below.

As another example, consider modeling wind load on the roof of the structure in
the diagram below.
In the absence of a member local coordinate system, wind load perpendicular to

the inclined roof surface would have to be resolved into X, Y and Z components in
the global axis directions. In this case, having a member local coordinate system
provides a simple and convenient way of specifying these loads as acting
perpendicular to the roof members.
As a final example, having local y and local z axes provides a convenient way to
obtain results such as major axis bending moment and shear force in the strong
direction, etc., regardless of the orientation of the member.
The same benefits hold true when considering the local coordinate system for
plates.

Default Orientation of the Member Local Coordinate System

Since this member local coordinate system exists as soon as a member is added to
a model, STAAD.Pro has a convention for establishing the default orientation of a
member local coordinate system. The convention can be described by the
following rule based on vector cross-product concepts:
The member local x axis crossed with the global Y axis produces the positive local
z axis.
Note: It is not possible to take the vector cross-product of two parallel vectors. So in
the case of vertically oriented members, STAAD.Pro simply adopts the
convention that the positive local z axis will be oriented parallel to, and in the
same positive direction as, the global Z axis.
These rules provide a unique definition for the default orientation of any member
in three-dimensional space. In summary:
• The local x axis is defined by the starting and ending nodes.
• The local z axis is oriented based on the conventions described above.
• The local y axis can be determined by using the vector cross-product rule: z
cross x = y.
This default orientation is adopted when members are first introduced into a
model. In an upcoming section we will explain how member orientation can be
modified as necessary on a member-by-member basis through the application of
a Beta Angle.
In the same way that STAAD.Pro provides graphical tools for visualizing the
starting and ending nodes of members, it also provides tools for visualizing the
orientation of local coordinate systems.

 Exercise: Observing Member Orientation

1 Click the Symbols and Labels icon on the Structure toolbar.
2 On the Labels tab, in the Beams category, select the option named Beam
Orientation.
3 In the General category, select the option named Show Axes At Origin (I).
4 Click OK.
The option to show Beam Orientation produces color-coded local
coordinate axis triads on all of the individual members.
The option to Show Axes At Origin produces a color-coded coordinate axis
triad at the origin of the global coordinate system. Its purpose is to provide
the key to the color coding of the local coordinate axis triads. Therefore
blue represents local x, red represents local y, and green represents local z.
5 Use the keyboard hotkey Shift + O to toggle off Beam Orientation, and
Shift + I to toggle off Show Axes At Origin.
Default Orientation of the Plate Local Coordinate System

Plates in STAAD.Pro are defined by three or four corner nodes. Consider the plates
with nodes at the corners labeled A, B, C and D as shown in the figure below. The
orientation of the local coordinate system for plates is determined as follows:
• The local x-axis is defined to be parallel to the vector pointing from node A to
node B.
• The cross-product of vectors AB and AC defines a vector parallel to the local z-
axis of the plate, i.e., z = AB x AC. The local z-axis is always normal to the plate
surface.
• The cross-product of vectors z and x defines a vector parallel to the local y-
axis, i.e., y = z cross x. (Both the x and y axes always lie in the plane of the
plate.)
• The origin of the plate local axis system occurs at the mathematical average of
the plate's nodal coordinates.
This local coordinate system makes it possible to discuss the stresses on an

individual element without having to resolve those stresses with respect to the
global coordinate system.

The locations of nodes A, B, C and D are dependent solely upon the order in which
they are selected (or typed in the editor) when defining the plate element.
Therefore, the orientation of the local axis system is also solely dependent on the
order in which the plate corners are selected. The side of the plate from which the
z-axis points in the positive direction is considered to be the “top” of the plate. In
an upcoming section we will explain how plate orientation can be modified as
necessary on a plate-by-plate basis through the assignment of a plate reference
point.
 Exercise: Observing Plate Orientation

1 Click the Symbols and Labels icon on the Structure toolbar.
2 On the Labels tab, in the Plates category, select the option named Plate
Orientation.
3 In the Nodes category, select Node Numbers.
4 Click OK.
The plate local coordinate axis triad is displayed on the one and only plate
in the current model.
5 Click the Geometry tab, Plate sub-tab in the Page Control.
The orientation of the plate local axis system can be confirmed using the
rules above and the node number order as provided in the Plates table.
Note: STAAD.Pro also provides the option to display plates with a color coding,
where user configurable colors are used to distinguish the top and
bottom of plates.
6 Click File > Close to return to the Start Page.

Model Geometry
Model Geometry
Many of the exercises in this module use the model shown below to demonstrate
the assignment of member properties, material constants, supports, and loads to
the structure.
This model was created using the Mirror command. In the Mirror dialog, an
option called Mirror Member Orientation was left unselected. If the Mirror
Member Orientation feature is turned on, the program attempts to mirror the
member orientation, in addition to the member geometry, as shown below. The
implications of this selection will be explained in detail later in this module.

Working with Groups
Working with Groups

When working with structural models, it sometimes helps to cluster a set of
entities under a single umbrella for ease of handling the data associated with
those entities. For example, one may want to refer to all of the principal rafters of
a warehouse structure as a group, rather than working with all of the members
individually.
These clusters are referred to as groups in STAAD.Pro, and they can save a lot of
time when assigning attributes to members of the structure. STAAD.Pro allows
properties to be assigned to a group using a single instruction, rather than having
to repeatedly select the individual members in order to assign various properties
to them.
Group definitions are inserted into the STAAD.Pro input file, so they remain part
of the model after the current STAAD.Pro session is closed. If you provide your
input file to another STAAD.Pro user, they will be able to use the groups you
created.
Note: Creating New Views is another method of filtering STAAD.Pro entities, as

presented in a different module. However, the information required to define
views is saved in a separate file, rather than within the STAAD.Pro input file,
which makes it a little less convenient for this purpose than working with
groups.
 Exercise: Creating and Assigning Groups

Four groups will be created:
Group Name Description

_BOTC Truss Bottom Chord
_TOPC Truss Top Chord
_COL Columns
_WEB Truss Webs
2 Click Tools > Create New Group… in the Menu Bar.

3 Choose the Beam option in the Select Type list of the Define Group Name
dialog.

Working with Groups
Warning: A common mistake is to leave the Select Type option set to Node,
when the intent is to create a Beam group.
4 Enter _BOTC in the Group Name field, and click OK.
Hint: STAAD.Pro group names must start with an underscore character (refer
to Section 5.16 of the Technical Reference manual for additional
information on forming group names). However, if the underscore is not
entered manually in the Define Group Name dialog, STAAD.Pro will add
it automatically when the dialog is closed.
The Create Group dialog lists the names of groups that have been created
in the model. We will now create the rest of the groups, and then we will
assign them to the appropriate members.
5 Click the Create button in the Create Group dialog.
6 Choose the Beam option in the Select Type list.
7 Enter TOPC (but this time without the leading underscore) in the Group
Name field, and click OK.
Note: STAAD.Pro automatically inserted the required leading underscore in

_TOPC in the Create Group dialog. It can do this, because it is clear from
the context of the dialog boxes being used that the intent is to create a
group. However, if a group is being created by directly editing the STAAD
Input File, STAAD.Pro does not have the context to recognize the text as
a group name, so it would not have the ability to make this automatic
correction. For this reason, good practice dictates getting into the habit
of always using the leading underscore when referring to group names.
8 Repeat the above process twice more to create Beam type groups named
_COL and _WEB.
Note: The list of group names in the Create Group dialog provides an
indication as to which type of elements can be included in each group.
All four of our groups can only be assigned to beams.
The next step is to assign (or Associate) the appropriate members to each
group.

Working with Groups
Note: In the Assign methods category, there are three options available to
assign members to groups. These assignment methods are a common
theme throughout STAAD.Pro. A description of each option is provided
below:
• Associate to View - associates the highlighted group name with all of
the members in the view.
• Associate to Selected Geometry - associates the highlighted group
name with all of the currently selected members. (This option will
appear “grayed out” if no members are selected.)
• Associate to List - associates the highlighted group name with all of the
members whose numbers are entered in the List field.
9 Click the first line in the Create Group dialog to highlight the group named
_BOTC.
10 Leave the Create Group dialog open, and click Select > Beams Parallel To >
X in the Menu Bar.
The bottom chord members, and only the bottom chord members, will be
selected. Notice that the Associate to Selected Geometry radio button in
the Create Group dialog is now active.
11 Click the Associate button at the bottom of the Create Group dialog.
STAAD.Pro associates the bottom chord members with the group named
_BOTC. It also displays the member numbers in the List field and changes
the 1:_BOTC listing in the Create Group dialog to say Beam Assigned,
implying that the group name has been assigned to at least some beams in
the model.
12 Click inside the Main Window to deselect all members.
13 Click the second line in the Create Group dialog to highlight the group
named _TOPC.
14 Hold the Control (Ctrl) key and click the top chord members one at a time
using the Beams Cursor to select them.
Note: Due to the inclined orientation of these members, there is no easier

method to select them.
15 Verify that the Assignment Method is set to Associate to Selected
Geometry, and then click the Associate button.
The top chord members are assigned to the _TOPC group, and their
member numbers appear in the List field.
16 Click the third line in the Create Group dialog to highlight the group named
_COL.

Working with Groups
17 Click on the column at the left side of the model, then press and hold
Control (Ctrl) and click on the column at the right side of the model.
The columns are now assigned to the _COL group.
19 Click the fourth line in the Create Group dialog to highlight the group
named _WEB.
The web members could be selected using the tedious method of clicking
on them one at a time. A more efficient method would be to use the
groups we have created to select all of the members in the three existing
groups, and then use an Inverse Selection command to select the
remaining members not included in the three existing groups.
20 Click Select > By Group Name… in the Menu Bar.
21 Click on all three group names in the Select Groups dialog.
22 Click Close to dismiss the Select Groups dialog.
The top chord, bottom chord and columns will be highlighted in the Main
Window indicating that they are all selected.
23 Click Select > By Inverse > Inverse Beam Selection in the Menu Bar.
The selection is inverted so only the truss web members are selected.
The webs are now assigned to the _WEB group.
25 Click the first line in the Create Group dialog to highlight the group named
_BOTC again, and then click the Highlight button.
The members of the selected group should be highlighted in the Main
Window.
26 Verify the proper assignment of each group by selecting each group name
one at a time and clicking Highlight.
• If no members are highlighted after selecting a group name and
clicking the Highlight button, check to make sure that the group is
indicated as a Beam group type in the list of groups in the Create
Group dialog.
• If any of the groups were accidentally created as Node type groups,
they will need to be deleted and recreated as Beam type groups,
before the members of this model can be correctly assigned their
group name.

General Tab
• If any members were unintentionally omitted from a group, they can

be added to the group using the Create Group dialog, or they can be
added to the list in the Input File using the STAAD.Pro Editor.
• If, later on, a member is removed from the model, and if that member
was part of one of the defined groups, STAAD.Pro will remove the
member number from the group automatically.
Note: STAAD.Pro also allows groups of plate or solid elements to be created.

However, these options are offered only in the list of the Define Group
Name dialog if the model contains plates or solids.
27 Click the Close button to dismiss the Create Group dialog.
current file.
General Tab
In the following sections we will explore the General tab and its five sub-tabs:
• Property - defines and assigns section properties, plate thicknesses, and Beta
Angles, and allows the option of associating a material to a section.
• Spec - defines and assigns parameters that modify the way structural entities
behave
• Support - defines and assigns boundary conditions for the model
• Load & Definition - defines and assigns load conditions and combinations
• Material - defines and assigns material properties to structural entities
The general progression will be to work through these sub-tabs from top to
bottom. We will now explore each of them by way of exercises.

General Tab
Member Property
 Exercise: Define Properties
1 Continue working in the current file, or open the dataset file named
Properties 3.std.
2 Click the General tab in the Page Control area. The Property sub-tab is
active by default. The Data Area on the right side now contains a dialog
labeled Properties - Whole Structure, referred to from here on as the
Properties dialog.
Hint: If the Properties dialog is ever closed, it can be recalled by clicking on the
Property sub-tab of the General tab.
The Properties dialog is used to define and assign section properties to
members. It also offers the option of associating material properties to a
section.
Standard cross sections can be chosen from tables, or custom sections can
be defined. The following standard sections from the American steel table
are used in the current exercise:
Columns Wide Flange: W 18 x 35

Bottom Chord Channel: C 12 x 30
Top Chord Rectangular HSS: 7 in x 4 in x 3/6 in
Webs Angle: 3 in x 3 in x 1/2 in
3 Click the Section Database button in the Properties dialog.
Note: The tabs across the top of the Section Profile Tables dialog provide
access to section tables for different materials.
• Steel - provides access to a list of steel tables of more than fifteen
different countries.
• Cold formed Steel - provides access to a list of tables from various
manufacturers of cold-formed steel products.
• Timber - provides access to an extensive list of wood sections
comprised of various combinations of species, grades, and sawn
lumber sizes. Also includes properties for Glued-Laminated material.
• Aluminum - provides access to the American Aluminum table.
4 Select the American group, W Shape table from the Steel tab.

General Tab
5 Scroll down through the shapes listed in the Select Beam category, and
click on W18x35. Make sure that the ST radio button is selected under the
Type Specification heading, but notice that there are a variety of options
available:
• ST specifies a single section from the standard table.
• T is used to indicate a T-shaped section formed by cutting a standard W
section at the mid-depth of the web.
• D specifies a double profile where the clear spacing can be defined.
• CM specifies a composite section comprised of a concrete slab on top
of a wide flange steel shape. This specification requires the definition
of some additional related variables.
• TC, BC, and TB allow the specification of top and/or bottom cover
plates.
Hint: Information on all these specifications is available in Section 5.20.1 of

the Technical Reference manual.
Note: Below the Select Beam list is the View Table button. This button
accesses a section properties table for the section type selected (in this
case, the American W-Shapes).
Note: Below the View Table button is the Material checkbox. This provides an
option to associate a material with the current Property. If the checkbox
is selected, members that receive the Property assignment also receive
a material assignment. If the checkbox is deselected, the material will
need to be assigned as a separate step.
6 Leave the Material checkbox toggled on and the material set to STEEL.
This will associate steel material properties with the W18x35 once it is
added to the list of available sections.
Hint: Section 5.26.2 of the Technical Reference manual provides the values
associated with each of the four hard-coded materials.
7 Click Add. W18x35 appears as an available section in the Properties dialog.
8 Click the Channel item in the Section Profile Tables dialog.
9 Scroll down to the C12 sections, and click on C12X30.
10 Leave the Type Specification set to ST (Single Section from Table), but
notice that there are other options available including Double Channels in
the Back-to-Back and Front-to-Front configurations.

General Tab
11 Ensure that the Material checkbox is checked, and that the material is set
to STEEL.
12 Click the Add button. The C12X30 section is added to the list of sections in
the Properties dialog.
13 Click the HSS Rectangle item in the Section Profile Tables dialog.
14 Scroll through the list of profiles and click on HSST7X4X0.188. (This
represents an HSS7x4x3/16).
to STEEL.
16 Click the Add button. The section is added to the list of sections in the
Properties dialog.
17 Click the Angle item in the Section Profile Tables dialog.
Hint: The following figure illustrates how angles are specified in STAAD.Pro.
L 40 35 6 = L 4 x 3 -1/2 x 3/8
Angle Symbol Thickness in
sixteenths of an inch
Leg Length in Leg Length in
tenths of an inch tenths of an inch
Note: The angle code L is followed by numbers representing the length of the
longer leg in tenths of an inch, the length of the shorter leg in tenths of
an inch, and the thickness of the angle in sixteenths of an inch.
Therefore, the 3 in. x 3 in. x ½ in. angle section for the truss webs would
be specified as L30308.
18 Click on L30308 to highlight it.
19 Leave the Type Specification set to ST (Single Section from Table), but
notice that there are other options available including double angles in
various configurations.
to STEEL.
21 Click the Add button. The L30308 section is added to the list of sections in
the Properties dialog.
22 Click the Close button to dismiss the Section Profile Tables dialog.

General Tab
At this point, all of the sections that will be used in this model are added to
the Properties list, but none have actually been assigned to the members
of the model. This will be the subject of the next exercise, but first, a word
of caution is warranted.
Warning: If this model was saved and closed at this point, without actually
assigning sections to any of the members, ALL OF THE SECTIONS
WOULD BE REMOVED from the list in the Properties dialog when
the model is reopened.
The important thing to remember is to ASSIGN each of the sections to at

least one member prior to closing the model.
 Exercise: Assign Properties

1 Click on W18X35 in the section list in the Properties dialog.
2 Select the Use Cursor To Assign option in the Assignment Method area.
3 Click the Assign button in the lower left corner of the Properties dialog.
The name of this button changes to Assigning, and the cursor changes to a
steel beam shape with a triangle in the upper left corner, indicating that
we are now in an active assignment mode.
4 Click on each of the two columns with the cursor to assign the W18x35
section to them.
The label “R1” appears near the center of both columns. This is a
reference number that corresponds to the W18X35 section, and it appears
just to the left of the section name in the Properties dialog, in a column
labeled “Ref”.
5 Click the Assigning button in the lower left corner of the Properties dialog
to toggle off the active assignment mode.
Hint: To toggle between the display of full section names or reference

numbers on members, use the keyboard hotkey Shift + X, or follow the
steps below:
• Right-click in the Main Window.
• Select Labels from the pop-up menu.
• Click the Sections radio button under the Properties category on the
Labels tab of the Diagrams dialog.
• Click OK.
6 Click on C12X30 in the section list in the Properties dialog.

General Tab

8 In the Select Groups dialog, click the line that says G1: _BOTC and leave
the dialog open.
The bottom chord is highlighted in the Main Window and the Assignment
Method automatically changes to Assign To Selected Beams.
9 Click the Assign button, and click Yes in the pop-up message box to
confirm.
The label “C12X30” appears near each bottom chord segment.
Warning: If properties get mistakenly assigned, it can be very difficult to

detect. Take the time to:
• Check that only the intended members have been selected.

• Check that the Assignment Method option is properly set.
10 Click on HSST7X4X0.188 in the section list in the Properties dialog.
11 Click the line that says G2: _TOPC in the Select Groups dialog to select the
top chord members, and click the line that says G1: _BOTC to deselect the
bottom chord members. Again, leave this dialog open.
The top chord is highlighted in the Main Window, and the Assignment
Method defaults to Assign To Selected Beams.
12 Click the Assign button, and then click Yes in the pop-up message box to
confirm.
The label “HSST7X4X0.188” appears near each top chord segment.
13 Click on L30308 in the section list in the Properties dialog.
14 Click the line that says G4: _WEB in the Select Groups dialog to select the
web members, and click the line that says G2: _TOPC to deselect the top
chord members.
The web members are highlighted in the Main Window, and the
Assignment Method defaults to Assign To Selected Beams.
15 Click the Close button to dismiss the Select Groups dialog.
16 Click the Assign button, and then click Yes in the pop-up message box to
confirm.
The label “L30308” appears near each web member.
This completes the process of assigning properties to all members in the
model.

General Tab
This is a relatively simple model, and it is fairly easy to see that all members have
received a property specification by looking at the labels. But in a more
complicated model, it may not be so easy to observe that all members have been
assigned a section. For this reason, STAAD.Pro provides a tool to confirm that
every member in the structure has been assigned member properties.
 Exercise: Searching for Members with Missing Properties

1 Continue to work in the current model, or open the dataset file named
Properties 4.std.
2 Click the General tab, then press the keyboard hotkey Shift + X.
This toggles off the display of section labels and reverts to viewing the
section reference numbers. It is one simple thing that can be done to help
identify members with missing properties.
To use a search tool to positively identify any entities with missing
properties, perform the following steps:
3 Click in the Main Window to ensure that no members are currently
selected.
4 Click Select > By Missing Attributes > Missing Property in the Menu Bar.
In this model, the pop-up dialog should indicate that there are no entities
with missing properties found.
5 Click OK.
If any member in the structure did not have a section property assigned to
it, this command would have highlighted those members in the Main
Window.

General Tab
 Exercise: Exploring the Remaining Functions in the Properties dialog

1 Continue to work in the current model, or open the dataset file named
Properties 4.std and click the General tab.
2 Click any Section listed in the Properties dialog box, and then click the
Edit… button. This reopens the dialog box used to define the section, and
permits changes to be made to that particular Property.
3 Click Close to dismiss the dialog.
The Delete… button will offer the option to delete the currently selected
Property.
4 Click the Values button to view the section properties for each Section
that is currently listed in the Properties dialog.
5 Close the Section Properties dialog.
6 Click the Define… button.
The Property dialog provides input forms to define various types of
sections, including:
• Circle
• Rectangle
• Tee
• Trapezoidal
• General - Used to define section properties of an irregular-shaped
section. The following prismatic properties are required for analysis:
AX = Cross sectional area, IX = Torsional constant, IY = Moment of
inertia about y-axis, IZ = Moment of inertia about z-axis.
• Tapered I - Used to define I-sections whose dimensions vary from one
end of the member to the other.
• Tapered Tube - Used to define tube sections whose dimensions vary
from one end of the member to the other.
• Assign Profile - Used to implicitly assign a steel section property to a
member by selecting a profile category.
Note: The Material checkbox and associated list can be used to assign a
material to a Property if desired.
7 Click Close to dismiss the Property dialog.

General Tab
8 Click the Materials… button.

The Materials dialog lists the currently defined materials and their values
for modulus of elasticity E, Poisson's ratio, density, and alpha (coefficient
of thermal expansion and contraction). Materials are defined in another
area of the program. The values cannot be edited in this table, but the
dialog provides access to the table for convenient viewing.
9 Close the Materials dialog.
10 Click the Thickness… button.
The Plate Element/Surface Property dialog is used to assign thickness to
plates or surfaces.
11 Close the Plate Element/Surface Property dialog.
12 Click the User Table… button.
This button provides access to user-defined section properties tables, if
any exist. Since none exist in this model, a warning box pops up to indicate
that no user tables were found, and offers the option to create one.
13 Click Yes to the warning box.
14 Click the New Table button on the Create User Provided Table dialog.
The Select Section Type list is used to define the section type: wide flange,
channel, angle, etc…, and to indicate whether the new table will be
created as an External table or an Internal table.
• External table: the table data will be saved in a separate file that is
external to the current STAAD Input file. This can be a convenient way
to make the table data accessible to others or to make it available for
reuse on another project.
• Internal table: the table data will be saved within the current STAAD
Input file. This can be a convenient way to keep the table data
accessible to the current model without having to manage an external
file.
Keep the External Table checkbox deselected for this exercise.
Note: An example of an application for user tables is pre-manufactured

building design where steel sections of I-shapes are used, but they are
fabricated out of plates to optimize a design, and therefore are not
standard sections listed in the steel tables.

General Tab
Hint: Section 5.19 of the Technical Reference manual provides instructions for
specifying a user steel table. A sample project illustrating the
application of user tables is provided in Example Problem 17 of the
STAAD.Pro Examples manual.
15 Ensure that the Select Section Type dropdown list box is set to WIDE
FLANGE.
This list box provides access to a variety of section type options.
16 Click OK.
The Create User Provided Table dialog now indicates that Table 1 is
selected.
17 Click the Add New Property button to view the input form for Wide Flange
sections.
For the purpose of this exercise, we will not actually define any sections in
this User Provided Table. But the process of defining sections is as follows:
• Provide a meaningful Section name.
• Enter values in the required data fields.
• The OK button adds the section to the table, and closes the current
dialog so the newly defined section can be seen in the Table Data list in
the Create User Provided Table dialog.
18 Click Cancel in the Wide Flange window, and then click Close in the Create
User Provided Table dialog to return to the Main Window.

General Tab
Modify Section Database

To complete the discussion on Properties and Sections, it is important to know
that STAAD.Pro offers the ability to edit the section databases that are included
with the program. We will not make any edits to the databases at this time, but
note that Tools > Modify Section Database opens the Section Database Manager,
which allows access to the section database tables, and provides tools to modify
them if necessary.
Two examples of potential reasons to modify a table:

1 The steel tables provided with STAAD.Pro are based on the most current
tables available. Some older steel sections may not be listed, so the
Section Database Manager is a way to introduce an older section in order
to analyze an existing structure.
2 Some of the sections in the table may be undesirable for various reasons
such as limited availability. Editing a steel table with the Section Database
Manager is a way to delete sections that are undesirable.
Note: The file containing the American steel table is named AISCSections.mdb, and it
is typically located in the \SProV8i\STAAD\Sections\ directory.

General Tab
Hint: Before making any edits to a standard section table, consider saving a backup
copy of that table.
Warning: If a standard section table is edited, and if the STAAD.Pro model is later sent
to another STAAD.Pro user, the modified section database file will also
need to be provided to run the model correctly.
file.
Modifying Member/Plate Orientation

This module began by establishing the existence and default orientation of the
local coordinate system for members and plates. In that section, we also
mentioned that there were tools available to conveniently reorient members and
plates. This is the last topic to discuss on the Property sub-tab of the General tab,
and will be demonstrated by way of a series of exercises.
 Exercise: Observing Section Orientation

2 Click the Geometry tab. The Beam sub-tab will be active by default.
3 Stretch the Beams table wide enough to view the column labeled Beta,
representing Beta Angle, and note that the Beta Angle is zero for every
member in this model.
This represents the default condition; the way beams automatically occur
when they are first modeled and no Beta Angle modifications have been
made.
Note: This is referred to as the Beta = 0 condition.

4 Click back in the Main Window to put the focus on the Structure Diagram,
and then use the hotkey Shift + O to turn on Member Orientation.
Recall that STAAD.Pro uses a specific set of rules to define the default or
Beta = 0 orientation of all members, and that the colored coordinate axis
triads are currently showing the result of applying those rules. As a point
of interest, the bottom chord members point in opposite directions in this
model, because the model was generated by mirroring one half of the
structure about a vertical plane.
5 Click View > 3D Rendering.

General Tab
The orientations of the individual steel sections are now visible in the
rendered view. The key to these orientations is identified in the following
figure (Figure 1.6a from the Technical Reference manual). The figure
illustrates the relationships between different types of steel sections and
the local coordinate system in STAAD.Pro.

General Tab
Note: Local axis system for various cross sections when global Y axis is vertical.
The local x-axis of the above sections is going into the paper.
The note at the bottom of the figure says, “The local x-axis of the above
sections is going into the paper.” Recall that the local x-axis is a line defined
by the two ends of the member, and that the positive direction of the local
x-axis is defined by a line going from the starting end (node A) to the
ending end (node B) of the member.
Two items worth noting in the rendered view:
• The bottom chord section orientations change at midspan, relating
back to the use of the Mirror command.
• The angle sections of the web members take on an orientation that is
based on the principal axes rather than the geometric axes.
Both of these items will be addressed in the following exercises.
6 Close the Rendered View, but keep the current model open for use in the
next section.

General Tab
Redefine Incidence
 Exercise: Modifying Section Orientation by Redefining Member Incidences

1 Using the Beams Cursor, select the four bottom chord members to the left
of midspan.
2 Click Tools > Redefine Incidence.
This tool provides an option to simply switch the order of the starting and
ending nodes for selected members. The other options provide ways to
revise the incidence of selected members so that the starting node is
closer to the origin than the ending node, or farther from the origin than
the ending node.
3 Keep the radio button set to the default option to simply switch the
incidence, and then click OK.
The selected bottom chord members will be redrawn so that the blue local
x axis points to the right and the flange tips of the channel point in the
positive global Z direction to match the other bottom chord members.
Beta Angle
The Beta Angle describes a member’s orientation about its longitudinal axis with
respect to a default, or Beta Equals Zero, condition.
The sign convention for Beta Angles can be visualized by using a right-hand rule.
When the thumb of the right hand is pointed in the positive local x direction of a
member, the natural curl of the right fingers indicates the direction of rotation
that will occur as a result of a positive Beta Angle.

General Tab
Note: In the previous example, another option to reorient the bottom chord
members would be to apply a 180 degree Beta Angle to the four bottom chord
members to the left of midspan. While this WOULD have the effect of
coordinating the orientation of the channel flange tips, it would NOT alter the
fact that half of the bottom chord members have a local x axis that points to
the left and half have a local x axis that points to the right. In addition, this
option would create a situation where half of the bottom chord members had a
local y axis that points up, while the other half of the members would have a
local y axis that points down. This could create some confusion when
interpreting the results, so this method would not be advisable for this
particular situation.
The following exercise demonstrates the application of a Beta Angle. Assume that
the goal is to rotate member number 1 circled in the figure below such that its
flange tips point downward.
By observing the current orientation of member number 1, we can see that a

positive 90 degree rotation will achieve the desired orientation.
Hint: Figures are provided in Section 1.5.3 of the Technical Reference manual
to quickly determine the beta angle to apply for commonly
encountered cases.

General Tab
 Exercise: Modifying Section Orientation by Applying an Explicit Beta Angle

1 Click the General tab. The Property sub-tab will be active by default.
2 In the Properties dialog, click the Beta Angle tab.
3 Click the Create Beta Angle button.
There are three options for specifying a Beta Angle. First, we will use the
default method, which is to explicitly define a rotation angle.
4 Enter a value of 90 in the Angle in Degrees field and click OK.
“Beta 90” appears on the Beta Angle tab. If more Beta Angle specifications
are created, they will appear in this list and be available for assignment to
the members of the model.
5 Click the Beta 90 item to highlight it.
6 Ensure that the Assignment Method is set to Use Cursor to Assign.
7 Click the Assign button.
The cursor temporarily changes to the special graphic that indicates that
STAAD.Pro is in the Beta Angle assignment mode.
8 Click on member number 1 to apply the Beta 90 assignment.
The member should immediately show a label to indicate that Beta 90 has
been applied.
Hint: It sometimes helps to roll the wheel of the mouse forward and backward
to force the screen to redraw by changing the scale.
9 Click the Assigning button to toggle the assignment mode back off.
We have already identified the fact that the single angle section used in the webs
of the truss will require some attention. Steel angle sections have geometric and
principal axes, and by default, STAAD.Pro coordinates the principal axes of a steel
angle section with the local axes of the member. In the current model, this results
in steel angle member orientations that do not place either angle leg in the plane
of the truss, and may not be conducive to making connections. The angle
between the geometric and the principal axes of every steel angle section is called
α (alpha), and it is a property that is available in the steel angle section database.
STAAD.Pro provides a convenient tool that can quickly look up that characteristic
angle α, and use it to calculate a Beta Angle that will bring one of the angle legs
into a convenient alignment in a model. This tool is demonstrated in the following
exercise.

General Tab
 Exercise: Modifying Section Orientation by applying an Implicit Beta Angle

1 Ensure that the focus is still on the Beta Angle tab in the Properties dialog
in the current model.
2 Click the Create Beta Angle button.
In the Beta Angle dialog box, the options named Angle and RAngle are
specifically for use on angle sections. Their functions are described and
illustrated below.
• The Angle option rotates a section (90 - α) degrees.
• The RAngle option rotates a section (180 - α) degrees.
3 Click the radio button associated with the option named Angle, and then
click OK.
Beta Angle appears on the Beta Angle tab.
4 Click the Beta Angle item to highlight it.
5 Select the web members by any convenient method.

General Tab
6 Ensure that the Assignment Method is set to Assign to Selected Beams,

and then click the Assign button and confirm by clicking Yes.
This assignment instructs STAAD.Pro to do the following for each selected
member:
• Look up the characteristic angle α.
• Calculate Beta = 90 - α. (Always 45 degrees for equal leg angles.)
• Populate the Beta Angle tab with an item corresponding to the
calculated value of Beta.
• Assign the calculated value of Beta to the appropriate member.
Note that all web members now show a label to indicate that Beta 45 has
been applied, and the “Beta 45” item now appears in the list on the Beta
Angle tab. This makes that specification available to quickly assign to other
members in the model if necessary.
Some items to note:
• In this exercise, all of the web members were assigned the same steel
angle section size. So they all had the same characteristic angle α, and
all received the same Beta angle of 45 degrees.
• If this specification had been assigned to unequal leg angles of a
variety of sizes, then the list would have displayed all of the unique
Beta Angles that were calculated and assigned.
• While this tool is convenient for quickly calculating the appropriate
Beta Angle for a variety of angle sections, the result is saved in the
STAAD Input File in the form of numerical values. These numerical
values are NOT automatically updated in the event that any of the
angle section sizes change during the design process. To ensure that
Beta Angles are coordinated, repeat the steps above after section sizes
are modified.
7 While the truss web members are still selected, click View > 3D
Rendering. Rotate and zoom in on the rendered view of the steel angle
members to see that they have been rotated into an orientation that
places one leg in the plane of the truss.
8 Close the rendered view.
current file.

General Tab
Some final notes on Beta Angle:

• Remember that the Beta Angle of any member can always be confirmed by
viewing the Beta column in the Beams table. The Beams table is accessible
from the Geometry tab, Beam sub-tab.
• The Beta Angle can also be reviewed and revised through the Member Query
function. Member Query can be launched by double-clicking on any member
of interest.
• An alternate method of assigning a Beta Angle is accessible from the Menu
Bar in the form of Commands > Geometric Constants > Beta Angle….
Plate Orientation
The final exercise in this section will demonstrate how to modify the orientation
of plates.
 Exercise: Modifying Plate Orientation

2 Press the hotkey Shift + T to view Plate Orientation.
Note: Some of the plates are oriented so that their local z-axes point upward,
and some point downward. (Recall that STAAD.Pro identifies the
positive local z-face as the “top” of a plate.) Since this could lead to
confusion when interpreting output results, it would be desirable to
coordinate the plates so that they are all oriented the same way. Also
note that plate number 31 is currently oriented such that its local z-axis
points downward.
3 Press the hotkey Shift + T again to toggle off Plate Orientation.
4 Press the hotkey Shift + P to display Plate Numbers, and press Shift + N to
display Node Numbers.

General Tab
5 Using the Plates Cursor, double-click plate number 31 shown highlighted

in the figure below to launch the Plate Query function.
The Plate Query data indicates that the mesh has been created in the Y=0
plane. The nodes are listed in the order 1 - 41 - 32 - 33. The plate and its
nodes are shown for reference in the figure below.
6 Close the Query dialog box.

7 Click Commands > Geometric Constants > Plate Reference Point.
8 Enter any positive value in the Y coordinate input field.
9 Set the Local Z Axis to point Towards the Reference Point.
10 Set the Assign category To View, and click OK.
11 Press the hotkey Shift + T to view Plate Orientation again. Note that all
plates (including plate number 31) are now oriented such that their local z
axes point upward (in the positive global Y direction).
12 Press the hotkey Shift + T again to toggle off Plate Orientation.

Specifications
13 Compare the node numbers for plate number 31 on the Structure Diagram
with those shown in the figure above. They remain in the same relative
locations after the Plate Reference Point command is issued.
Note: The Plate Reference Point command does not move any nodes.
14 Again, use the Plates Cursor to recall the Plate Query function by double-
clicking plate number 31. Observe that the nodes are now listed in the
order 33 - 32 - 41 - 1, the opposite order compared to what was observed
above.
Note: When STAAD.Pro reorients a plate, it simply reorders the nodes used to
define that plate.
15 Close the Query dialog box.
current file.
Specifications
Now that we have defined member cross sections and member orientation, we
are ready to move to the next item in the Page Control.
Open the dataset file named Properties 6.std, and move to the General tab, Spec
sub-tab.
The Specifications dialog appears in the Data Area. It is used to define and assign
Specifications for Nodes, Beams, and Plates, each of which has some effect on the
behavior of the entities to which it is assigned.

Specifications
Node Specifications
The Node button on the Specifications dialog is used to assign a Master/Slave
specification to nodes. The general purpose for a Master/Slave specification is to
define a constraint of some sort that requires “slaved” nodes to translate and/or
rotate the same amount as some “master” node.
Note: For each Master/Slave specification, a Master Node is identified in the

dropdown list.
The behavior of each Master/Slave specification is controlled by the checkboxes in

the Slaved Directions category as follows:
• Rigid: Slaved nodes translate and rotate the same amount as the master in all
six degrees of freedom. (Note that this is NOT the intent when defining what
structural engineers typically refer to as a “rigid diaphragm” in a building.)
• XY: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global X and Y
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the Z axis.
• YZ: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global Y and Z
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the X axis.
• ZX: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global Z and X
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the Y axis. (Note
that this IS the intent when defining what structural engineers typically refer
to as a “rigid diaphragm” in a building.)
Any other combination of the six available degrees of freedom can be slaved to a
master node by using the individual checkboxes at the right side of the Slaved
Directions category.
No Node Specifications will be assigned to the current model.

Specifications
Beam Specifications
The Beam button on the Specifications dialog is used to define member
conditions such as:
• Released or partially-released degrees of freedom at either end of a member
• Member offsets
• Reduced section properties due to cracking in concrete members.
• Truss member, cable member, tension-only member or compression-only
member
• Inactive member
• Fire proofing and imperfections
Releases
There are six degrees of freedom in a structural connection or support:

• Three translational degrees of freedom - (δx, δy and δz)
• Three rotational degrees of freedom - (θx, θy, and θz)
Member releases are specified with respect to the member's local axis system.
• FX corresponds to force along the local x-axis (axial force)
• FY corresponds to shear force along the local y-axis
• FZ corresponds to shear force along the local z-axis
• MX corresponds to moment about the local x-axis (torsion)
• MY corresponds to moment about the local y-axis (the weak axis of a wide
flange beam)
• MZ corresponds to moment about the local z-axis (the strong axis of a wide
flange beam)

Specifications
By default, all six degrees of freedom are fixed, so initially all connections are
considered to be moment-resisting connections. If one or more of those forces or
moments cannot be transferred by a connection, the force or moment can be
released at the appropriate end of the member in the model. Any of the six
degrees of freedom at either end of a beam can be fully or partially-released using
the Release tab.
The first step in setting a release is to select either Partial Moment Release or
Release in the Release Type category. Based on the setting in the Release Type
category, the options become active in either the Partial Moment Release
category or the Release category, and the options in the other category are grayed
out.
• To specify a full release, set the Release Type category to Release, and toggle
the checkboxes labeled FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY and MZ in the Release category.
• To specify a spring release, set the Release Type category to Release, toggle
the appropriate checkboxes labeled KFX, KFY, KFZ, KMX, KMY and KMZ in the
Release category, and enter the spring constant(s) for the selected degree(s)
of freedom.
• To specify a Partial Moment Release, set the Release Type category to Partial
Moment Release. Then specify the fraction of the full moment capacity of the
connection that is to be released for the indicated rotation degrees of
freedom. The value should be entered as a decimal value between 0.0 and 1.0
in the MPX, MPY, and/or MPZ fields.
• To specify a partial release for all the 3 moment degrees of freedom, MX, MY,
and MZ, use the MP option and a single factor is applied to all 3.
Note: A Partial Moment Release specifies the percentage to be released, not the
percentage to be resisted. For example, a value of zero means no release, i.e.
full moment restraint. A value of 1.0 means a full release, i.e. no moment
restraint.
Hint: A note to this extent has been placed on the Release tab as a reminder.
Note: At any end of a member, for any particular degree of freedom, STAAD.Pro only
allows one of the following: full release, partial release, or spring release. It is
not permitted to apply more than one simultaneously for a given degree of
freedom at a given member end.

Specifications
Offsets
Offset conditions at the ends of members are specified on the Offset tab in the
Member Specification dialog. In the mathematical model, assumptions are made
that do not necessarily reflect the actual conditions on the physical structure. One
of these assumptions relates to the actual START and END locations of members.
Beams and columns, modeled as lines, are assumed to meet at a point in space
defined by the intersection of their centerlines. By comparison, in the physical
structure, a beam might be attached to a column at the outer surface of the
column flange. In the figure below, a beam is shown framing into a column. If both
are wide flange members, the beam stops at the column flange. This may create a
rigid zone at the connection where very little relative deflection will occur
between the beam and the column within this zone.
Therefore in the physical structure, the beam may behave more nearly as though
it connects to the column face as opposed to the column centerline. However, in
the mathematical model the length of the beam is treated as though it spans to
the centerline of the column.
If the size of the rigid zone is significant with respect to the span length of the
beam, then you may want to incorporate these effects into the mathematical
model. The Member Offset specification provides a convenient way to account for
these effects by declaring that the beam Start and/or End faces are a certain
distance away from the column centerline.
The length of a Member Offset (and therefore the size of the rigid zone) can be
assigned based on engineering judgment.

Specifications
Member offsets may be modeled in any direction relative to either the local or
the global coordinate system.
Another example of an offset connection is a situation where the centerlines of

the connected members do not intersect at a common working point as shown in
the figure below.
The member offset dimensions shown in the figure above could be represented in
the input file by the following commands:
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 7.0 0.0 0.0
1 END -6.0 0.0 0.0
2 END -6.0 -9.0 0.0
Another example that could be modeled using a Member Offset specification is a

beam supporting a slab as shown in the figure below.
This arrangement might be modeled as plates and beams that connect at

common nodes, but with Member Offsets applied to the beam to accurately
model the true geometry.

Specifications
Hint: Additional information on the Member Offset specification may be found in

Section 5.25 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual and in Example 7 in
the STAAD.Pro Examples manual.
Property Reduction Factors
Property Reduction Factors provide a method to specify reduced effective section

properties. They are intended to represent the loss of stiffness due to cracking in
concrete sections. The approach follows recommendations in ACI 318, which
suggests the use of reduction factors dependent upon the nature of stresses to
which a member is subjected.
Cable, Truss, Tension-Only and Compression-Only
The Cable specification is used to declare that a member has no ability to resist
shear, bending, or torsional forces. This specification requires the user to input
either an Initial TENSION or an unstressed LENGTH.
Warning: The Cable specification does not imply tension-only. If members are to be
considered tension-only, they must be explicitly defined as such.
The Truss specification also has the effect of declaring that a member has no
ability to resist shear, bending, or torsional forces, but it does not provide the
ability to incorporate an initial tension as in the Cable specification.
The Tension-only or Compression-only specification can be used to create

tension-only and compression-only members, respectively.
• A Compression-only specification has the effect of making a member inactive
under conditions where it would tend to experience tensile forces.
• A Tension-only specification makes a member inactive under conditions
where it would tend to experience compressive forces.
Note: A member declared as a TENSION only or COMPRESSION only member will cary
axial forces only. It will not carry moments for shear forces. In other words, it is
a truss member. The Tension-only or Compression-only specifications can be
used to overcome code restrictions related to KL/r slenderness limits.

Specifications
Inactive
The Inactive specification provides a way to inactivate selected members. One

potential application is for modeling stages of construction of a structure. The full
structure is first defined, and then members may be selectively inactivated to
account for their “absence” at particular stages of construction.
Hint: Example 4 in the Application Examples manual illustrates the use of this
specification.
Fire Proofing
The Fire Proofing specification provides a method to automatically consider the

weight of fireproofing material applied to structural steel. Two types of
fireproofing configurations are currently supported - Block Fire Proofing and
Contour Fire Proofing. If a Fire Proofing specification is assigned, the weight of the
fireproofing material is automatically included as part of the self-weight when the
self-weight load is assigned.
Note: We will introduce the self-weight command in an upcoming section.
Imperfection
The Imperfection specification provides a method to apply a camber or drift value

to a member to be considered for secondary effects. It is used to compute an
additional loading on the selected imperfect members that are in compression,
and it works in conjunction with a specific type of analysis available in STAAD.Pro
called an Imperfection Analysis. Member imperfection specifications only have an
effect on members that are in compression.

Specifications
The Plate button on the Specifications dialog is used to define plate conditions
such as:
• Release: Releases can be applied to one or more of the 6 degrees of freedom
at any node. Plate releases are specified with respect to the plate local axis
system.
• Ignore Inplane Rotation: Ignore inplane rotation is used to specify that the
program is to ignore “in-plane stiffness” associated with the Mz degree of
freedom at the nodes of plates.
• Rigid Inplane Rotation: Rigid inplane rotation is used to specify that all nodes
in a plate have an “infinite” rotational stiffness about the Mz degree of
freedom.
• Plane Stress: Plane Stress is used to specify that a plate is only capable of
resisting in-plane loads such as axial load and in-plane shear, but is incapable
of resisting out-of-plane shears or moments that create out-of-plane bending.
Warning: Using the Plane Stress specification on a structure like a floor slab
can lead to “loss” of loads such as self-weight, because, for “Plane
Stress” elements, the out-of-plane shear action and the bending
degrees of freedom are switched off.
• Ignore Stiffness: Ignore Stiffness is used to specify that the stiffness of a plate
element is to be completely ignored in the assembly of the stiffness matrix.
This specification allows plate elements to be modeled for the purpose of
applying loads to a structure without allowing those elements to contribute
resistance in any way.
No Plate Specifications will be assigned to the current model.
To demonstrate the process of assigning Member Specifications in the next

exercise, assume that the goals are to:
• Specify a full moment release of all three bending degrees of freedom at the
left end of the bottom chord of the truss, where it joins the column (left end
of beam number 22), and
• Specify all truss web members as being incapable of resisting shear, bending,
or torsional forces.

Specifications
 Exercise: Assigning Member Specifications

1 Ensure that the dataset file named Properties 6.std is currently open, and
that the General tab, Spec sub-tab is active.
2 Determine that the node attached to the column is the starting node of
beam 22. Refer to the suggestions below for four ways to do this:
• Hover the Beams Cursor over member 22 and observe green for
starting node at left (at column) and blue for ending node at right end
of beam, or
• Click View > Structure Diagrams > Labels, select Beam Ends in the
Beams category, and click Apply, or
• Right-click in the Main Window, click Labels… in the pop-up menu,
select Beam Orientation in the Beams category, and click Apply, or
• Click on member number 22 with the Beams Cursor to select it. Click
the Geometry tab. The line for member number 22 is highlighted in
the Beams spreadsheet. Note that Node A (the starting node) is
indicated as node 15 and Node B (the ending node) is node 14.
Compare the X coordinates of nodes 14 and 15 in the Nodes
spreadsheet to see that member number 22 starts on the left and ends
on the right.
3 One way to access the Release tab would be to open the Member
Specification dialog by clicking the Beam… button in the Specifications
dialog. However, to illustrate an alternate method, double-click member
number 22 with the Beams Cursor to activate the Member Query
function.
4 Click Change Releases At Start.
The Member Specification dialog opens to the Release tab, and the
Location is automatically set to Start.
5 Make sure that the Release radio button is selected under the Release
Type category.
6 Click the MX, MY and MZ checkboxes under the Release category, and
then click the Assign button.
The Releases category of the Member Query dialog now indicates MX, MY
and MZ next to the Start label.
7 Click Close to dismiss the Member Query dialog.
Hint: If you changed to the Geometry tab to check the beam and node
numbers, return to the Spec tab by clicking on the General tab in the
Page Control, then click on the Spec sub-tab.

Specifications
8 Click in the Main Window to deselect all members. A small circle now
appears at the left end of member number 22. This symbol is a visual cue
to indicate that there is a release of some type defined there.
To view the release graphic, you can click the Magnifying Glass icon and
then press and hold the left mouse button to see an enlarged view of an
area on the Main Window. Click the Magnifying Glass icon again to turn it
off.
9 Click Select > By Group Name.

10 Click the _WEB group to select all web members, and then click the Close
button.
11 Click the Beam… button on the Specifications dialog.
12 Click the Truss tab.
Note: Note that the Assign button is active, because the webs were already
selected.
The truss specification is assigned to all web members, and MEMBER
TRUSS now appears in the Specification dialog. This makes the truss
specification available to assign to any other members in the model if
necessary.
Toggle Specification and Highlight Assigned Geometry

The Toggle Specification checkbox appears in the Specifications dialog. Its
operation can be described as follows:
• When the Toggle Specification checkbox is activated, the Assignment Method
works as a toggle to alternately apply and remove the assignment of the
selected specification by repeatedly clicking on an entity.
• When Toggle Specification is deselected, a specification can be assigned by
clicking on an entity, but clicking on the same entity again has no effect.
Hint: It is recommended to generally work with the Toggle Specification option

turned off, and to only turn it on when the function is required. This helps to
avoid making unintended specification changes if a member is clicked for some
other purpose while the Toggle Specification option is still active.

Supports
The Highlight Assigned Geometry option provides a convenient way to visually

verify which members have been assigned a particular Specification. When the
Highlight Assigned Geometry checkbox is activated, all members that have
received the currently selected Specification will be highlighted graphically on the
screen.
file.
Supports
Open the dataset file named Properties 7.std, and move to the General tab,
Supports sub-tab.
The Supports dialog is used to define support or boundary conditions for a

structure.
Click the Create button to open the Create Supports dialog and view the available
types of supports.
Note: On the individual support tabs, the checkboxes labeled FX, FY, and FZ stand for
“force” and correspond to restraints against translation in the respective
directions. The checkboxes labeled MX, MY, and MZ stand for “moment” and
correspond to restraints against rotation about the respective axes.
Fixed and Pinned

At a fixed support, all degrees of freedom are restrained to prevent any
translation or any rotation.
At a pinned support, the three translational degrees of freedom are restrained,

but the three rotational degrees of freedom are unrestrained.
On the Fixed and Pinned tabs of the Create Support dialog, the controls for the six
degrees of freedom are “grayed out”, making them unavailable to edit.

Supports
Fixed But
A Fixed But support provides checkboxes to individually control the fixity or
release of the three translational and three rotational degrees of freedom. The
Fixed But support also provides the ability to assign a spring constant to any of the
six degrees of freedom in lieu of full fixity or full release.
Note: If a degree of freedom is fully released by toggling the checkbox on, the
associated Define Spring field becomes inactive, or “grayed out.”
Any combination of fully or partially released translational and/or rotational

degrees of freedom is permitted.
Enforced and Enforced But

An Enforced or an Enforced But support perform the same basic functions as the
Fixed and Fixed But supports. They are different from Fixed and Fixed But in the
following ways:
• First, the Fixed and Fixed But supports cannot handle Support Displacement
loading if plates and/or solids are present in the model. The Enforced and
Enforced But supports were introduced to handle these conditions.
• Second, the Fixed and Fixed But supports restrain certain degrees of freedom
when the global stiffness matrix is assembled. By contrast, the Enforced and
Enforced But supports actually maintain all degrees of freedom as active in
the global stiffness matrix, but they assign springs with extremely high
stiffness to the supports that are supposed to be restrained in certain
directions.
If a model does not include any support displacement loads for plates or solids, a
Fixed or Fixed But support offers faster calculation speed than Enforced or
Enforced But supports, because the program needs to include only those degrees
of freedom that are unrestrained (restrained degrees of freedom are known to
have zero displacement, and hence need not be considered). Thus, the stiffness
matrix will be smaller with Fixed or Fixed But supports as compared to Enforced
or Enforced But supports. If the model is large, using Fixed or Fixed But supports
where possible may result in a significant reduction in analysis time as compared
to using Enforced or Enforced But supports.

Supports
Multilinear Springs
Multilinear Springs provide the ability to model situations where the support
spring constant varies, depending on the magnitude of the deflection. As an
example, consider a cantilever beam that can deflect only a limited distance
before it encounters an obstruction, such as another structure.
As load is applied to the end of the cantilever in the negative Y direction, it

deflects downward. For a deflection between 0 and δ, the magnitude of the
displacement is equal to the applied force divided by some spring stiffness
constant K1, where K1 represents the amount of force required to displace the
“spring” a given unit of length. Once the deflection reaches δ, additional
displacements are dictated by some new spring constant K2, where K2 represents
the higher stiffness of the supporting material. In other words, once the
displacement reaches δ, it takes a much larger force to achieve an additional unit
of deflection of the beam.
Another example of a situation that can be modeled effectively with the

Multilinear Spring option is a pile, where the resistance varies in a manner that is
not linear with displacement.
Implementing multilinear spring supports is a four-step process:

1 A FIXED BUT support is created to define the initial stiffness value and the
direction(s) in which the spring(s) is/are active.
2 The FIXED BUT support is assigned to the appropriate nodes.
3 The Multilinear Spring is created by defining values of displacement versus
spring constant on the Multilinear Spring tab of the Create Support dialog.
(Up to 10 values of δ vs. K can be entered.)
4 The Multilinear Spring is assigned to the appropriate nodes.

Supports
Foundations
A Foundation type of support is available to model the effect of soil acting as a
linear elastic spring. A discrete spread footing or a mat foundation can be
modeled using this support specification. Foundation supports incorporate the
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, a quantity that specifies the amount of force
required to displace a unit area of soil by a unit distance.
Note: Modulus of Subgrade Reaction has units of (Force/Area)/Displacement, e.g.

kip/ft2/ft {kN/m2/m}.
In a model, the spring constant for the soil at a particular node can be determined
by multiplying the subgrade modulus by the area of a spread footing or by the
influence area of the node in a mat foundation.
For irregularly-shaped or large mat foundations with many nodes, computing the
influence area by hand for each node can become quite tedious and time-
consuming, as shown in the figure below.
STAAD.Pro offers two Mat foundation options that can calculate all of the
tributary areas and derive the spring constants for each node automatically. These
are referred to as PLATE MAT and ELASTIC MAT, and they differ in the algorithm
used to determine the influence areas.
Hint: Refer to section 5.27.3 of the Technical Reference manual for additional
information.
When Mat foundations are used, there is an option to have them behave as
compression-only springs, so they will not resist any uplift forces if they tend to
develop. Also, there is an option to include in the output file the area that has
been used in the calculation of the spring stiffness of each joint used when
defining a Mat foundation.
Hint: See examples 23 and 27 in the STAAD.Pro Examples Manual.

Supports
Inclined
The Inclined Support resists displacements along user-defined directions that are
not constrained to be parallel to the global axes. Inclined supports are defined by
establishing a reference point, and orienting the support axes at a joint as follows:
The Y and Z axes of the inclined support axis system have the same orientation as
the local Y and Z axes of an imaginary member whose Beta Angle is zero and
whose incidences are defined from the inclined support joint to the reference
point.
One example of an application of an Inclined Support would be the cooling tower

shown below. When the cooling tower experiences expansion and contraction
due to temperature loads, the force at the supports is directed radially and
circumferentially, rather than along a particular global axis direction. The inclined
support could be used for this situation by specifying a reference point at the
center of the cooling tower.
Another example of an application of an Inclined Support would be the support at

the base of the sloping leg of the frame shown below.

Supports
An Inclined support at this location might be useful for at least two reasons:
• First, it would resolve the reactions at the base of the sloping leg into
meaningful components acting parallel and perpendicular to the sloping leg.
• Second, it would make it possible to define unique support conditions such as
a roller that would resist translation parallel to the sloping leg but would
permit translation in the direction perpendicular to the sloping leg.
In all other respects, the inclined support is the same as any other support.
Tension / Compression Only Springs

The Tension-only and Compression-only spring specifications are technically not
supports, but are actually modifiers to an existing spring type support. Therefore,
creating a support that behaves as a tension-only or compression-only support is
a two-step process, beginning with the assignment of a spring support followed
by the assignment of the appropriate tension-only or compression-only modifier.
As the name suggests, the assignment of this modifier permits only one type of
reaction force to develop, either tension or compression, in the selected
direction(s).
The assignment of Tension/Compression Only Springs triggers an iterative

solution if, after any of the cycles of analysis, the direction of the force in the
spring is in the “wrong” direction. If this is detected, then the support is removed
from that direction and a new analysis is performed.
The method of assigning supports to a structure is very similar to the method

used to assign member properties and specifications. The process will be
demonstrated in the following exercise.
 Exercise: Assign Supports

1 The dataset file named Properties 7.std should currently be open. The
Support sub-tab of the General tab should be active, and the Create
Support dialog should still be open.
For this example, we will assume that the base of the column on the left
side of the model is to receive a Fixed support, and the base of the column
on the right is to receive a Pinned support.

Supports
2 Click on the Fixed tab, and click the Add button.

The Fixed support now appears as “Support 2” in the list of supports at the
top of the Supports dialog.
3 Click the Create button.
4 Click on the Pinned tab, and click the Add button.
The Pinned support now appears as “Support 3” in the list of supports at
the top of the Supports dialog.
5 Click the Support 2 (S2) (the Fixed Support) in the Supports dialog.
6 Click the Use Cursor to Assign radio button under the Assignment Method
category.
7 Click the Assign button, and then click on the bottom of the left column.
The fixed support symbol appears at the bottom of the left column.
8 Click the Support 3 (S3) (the Pinned Support) in the Supports dialog.
9 Click the bottom of the right column in the model.
The pinned support symbol appears at the bottom of the right column.
10 Click the Assigning button to turn off the assign mode.
Hint: It is good practice to turn off assign modes like this as soon as possible to
avoid assigning properties to the model unintentionally.
Note: In addition to the Fixed and Pinned supports, there is another item
called No support in the Supports dialog. This option is used to remove
a support that has already been assigned. Unlike the Toggle
Specification option discussed earlier, or the Toggle Load option coming
up in the next section, there is no Toggle Support option. To remove a
support from the model, the No support option is assigned to a
particular node by any of the available Assignment Methods.
current file.

Loads and Load Definitions

Open the dataset file named Properties 8.std, and move to the General tab, Load
& Definition sub-tab.
The Load & Definition dialog is used to define, assign, and combine loads.
Click the New… button to open a dialog named Create New Definitions / Load
Cases / Load Items. Note the four tabs across the top of the dialog: Definitions,
Load Case, Load Items, and Load Envelopes.
Definitions
The Definitions tab contains the options used to generate the “DEFINE” block of
data in the input file. If any Code-specified load cases such as wind, seismic, and
snow are used in a model, the “DEFINE” block is used to store the values for all of
the parameters required to define the load according to the specified Code. It is
also used to generate moving load cases, time history load cases, and pushover
loads.
Hint: The command syntax for these cases is explained in section 5.31 of the
STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual.
Load Cases
The Load Case tab contains the dialog used to initiate a new load case (primary
load, moving load, or load combination) and assign it a case number.
When creating a Primary Load Case, the Loading Type list can be used to associate
the load case with one of the Building Code definitions of Dead, Live, Wind, and
so forth. This association is only required in two situations:
• If load combinations will be generated automatically using STAAD.Pro's Auto
Load Combination Generator, and/or
• If STAAD.Pro's Live Load Reduction feature will be used.

Live Load Reduction
When the Loading Type is set to Live, an option becomes available to specify that
the Live Load is to be considered reducible. STAAD.Pro has the ability to
automatically account for live load reduction, with some limitations. Some things
to remember about live load reduction in STAAD.Pro:
• Only the rules for live load reduction on Floors have been implemented, not
the rules for Roofs.
• Only the rules for live load reduction on Beams have been implemented, not
the rules for Columns.
• Some codes prevent live load reduction for buildings designated as having
public assembly occupancies. In STAAD.Pro, there is no direct method for
specifying the occupancy type, so it cannot automatically account for this
provision. It is the user's responsibility to decide when it is or is not
appropriate to use the live load reduction feature based on this code
provision.
• Some codes place limits on the amount of reduction that may be applied to
structures of certain other use groups such as garages. Again, in STAAD.Pro,
there is no direct method for specifying the occupancy type, so it cannot
automatically account for this provision. The user must decide when it is or is
not appropriate to use the live load reduction feature based on this code
provision.
• Live Load Reduction is only applied to two specific types of loads that are
available in STAAD.Pro, namely the FLOOR LOAD and ONEWAY LOAD types. In
other words, Live Load Reduction will not be applied to some of the other
available load types that we will discuss next, such as nodal loads for example.
Load Combinations
When creating Load Combinations, STAAD.Pro offers the option to either Define
Combinations manually, or create them using the Auto Load Combination
Generator.
The Auto Load Combination Generator applies user-configurable rules to generate

combinations of loads based on their Loading Type. This is a very powerful
function, and it is covered thoroughly in another module.

The manual method of creating combinations is called Define Combinations. It

provides a variety of methods to factor and combine the results of selected load
cases:
• Normal: Multiplies the results of selected load cases by the specified factor
and sums the factored results algebraically.
• SRSS: Combines the results of selected load cases by calculating the Square
Root of the Sum of Squares of the results from the selected load cases.
Note: STAAD.Pro also provides the ability to combine loads in a mixed

algebraic and SRSS combination. The mixed combination could be
created by selecting the SRSS combination type, and then activating and
deactivating the checkbox labeled SRSS Component as necessary. When
the SRSS Component checkbox is activated, the selected load cases are
added to the load combination in the Square Root of the Sum of
Squares method. When the SRSS Component checkbox is deactivated,
the selected load cases are added to the load combination in the basic
algebraic format.
• Absolute Value: Combines the results of selected load cases by calculating the
absolute values of the results of individual load cases, multiplying them by a
factor, and then summing them algebraically.
These options make it possible to create load combinations such as:

2 2
LC1 + LC2  LC3 + LC4
LC1 + LC2 + LC3 + LC4
Hint: More information on combining load case analysis results is provided in Section
5.35 of the Technical Reference manual.
Warning: The Load Combination methods mentioned here provide combinations of

the results from the individually analyzed constituent load cases. These
should be thought of as “results combinations”, since they do not actually
instruct STAAD.Pro to analyze the constituent load cases concurrently. As
such, they should only be used when the theories of superposition and
linear elasticity are valid. For all other situations, STAAD.Pro offers another
option called REPEAT LOAD, which serves as an instruction to analyze
combinations of load cases concurrently.

Load Items
The Load Items tab contains the dialogs used to add load data to Load Cases.
Some examples of Load Items are Nodal Loads, Member Loads, and Plate Loads.
The process of creating and assigning Load Items will be demonstrated in some
upcoming exercises.
Load Envelopes
The Load Envelope tab can be used to create Load Envelopes, which are groups of
Load Cases and/or Load Combinations created for convenience. The use of Load
Envelopes is optional, but an example of their use might be as follows:
• An Envelope number 1 might contain all of the Load Combinations that are
appropriate for the LRFD design of steel members, and
• An Envelope number 2 might contain all of the Load Combinations that are
appropriate for the design of concrete members, and
• An Envelope number 3 might contain all of the Load Cases that are
appropriate for evaluating the seismic drift of the structure.
When Load Envelopes are created, they become a fast and convenient way to
select a particular set of loads to work with in the Post Processing mode.
Before you begin the exercises, please close the Create New Definitions / Load
Cases / Load Items dialog.
The following series of exercises will illustrate the process of creating Load Cases,
populating the Load Cases with Load Items, assigning the Load Items to the
model, and creating a Load Combination.
For the first exercise, we will create three primary load cases to represent a dead
load case, a live load case, and a wind load case.

 Exercise: Creating Load Cases

1 The dataset file named Properties 8.std should currently be open. The
Load & Definition sub-tab of the General tab should be active.
2 In the Load & Definition dialog, click on the Load Cases Details line as
shown below:
3 Click the Add button.

The Add New: Load Cases dialog will appear, and the Primary item will be
selected by default.
4 Leave the Number field set to 1.
5 Select Dead from the Loading Type list.
Note: Setting the Loading Type is optional throughout this exercise, because
neither Live Load Reduction nor the automatic load combination
generator will be used.
6 Enter Dead Load in the Title field.
The Dead Load case now appears in the Load Cases Details category of the
Load & Definition dialog as shown below:
It also now appears in the list at the right end of the View toolbar at the
top of the screen as shown below. Until now, this field has been empty.

In the Add New: Load Cases dialog, note that the Number field has
automatically incremented to 2.
8 Select Live from the Loading Type list, and ensure that the Reducible per
UBC/IBC checkbox is deselected.
9 Enter Live Load in the Title field.
11 In the Add New : Load Cases dialog, select Wind from the Loading Type
list.
12 Enter Wind Load in the Title field.
14 Click the Close button to dismiss the Add New : Load Cases dialog.
This completes the process of creating the three primary Load Cases.
For the next exercise, we will assign the following loads to the model:
• Dead Load: The self-weight of the structure only.
• Live Load: A uniformly distributed load of 2 kip/ft {30 kN/m} in the downward
direction along the full length of the bottom chord of the truss.
• Wind Load: Nodal loads of 1.2 kips {5 kN} in the X direction applied to each of
the top chord nodes on the left half of the truss.
 Exercise: Populating the Load Cases with Load Items and Assigning them to
the Model
1 In the Load & Definition dialog, click on the Dead Load case in the list of
Load Cases Details as shown below:
2 Click the Add… button.

The Add New : Load Items dialog contains all of the available load types
that can be defined.

Currently, the Selfweight Load item is selected. The default Direction

parameter is Y and the default Factor is -1. These parameters indicate an
unfactored load acting in the negative global Y (downward) direction.
3 Click the Add… button, and then close the Add New: Load Items dialog.
The reference to the self-weight load will appear under the Dead Load
case as shown below:
The small graphic in front of the SELFWEIGHT Y -1 expression includes a

question mark. This is an indication that STAAD.Pro is expecting this load
to be assigned to specific members.
4 Click on the expression SELFWEIGHT Y -1.
5 Click the Assign To View option in the Assignment Method category of the
Load & Definition dialog, and then click the Assign button.
6 Click Yes in the pop-up dialog confirming the assignment.
The small graphic in front of the SELFWEIGHT Y -1 expression no longer
includes a question mark. This indicates that the load has been applied to
at least one member.
7 Click the cursor anywhere in the Main Window to deselect all of the
members.
8 Click on the Live Load case in the list of Load Cases Details as shown
below:
9 Click the Add... button.

10 Click the Member Load item in the Add New: Load Items dialog, and then
select the Uniform Force option.
A diagram is provided within the dialog to graphically describe the
meanings of the parameters available to define a Uniform Force.
• The W1 parameter is the load intensity.
• The parameters d1 and d2 allow the load to be applied to a specified
portion of the beam length (d1 and d2 are both distances measured
from the starting end of the member).
Note: If parameters d1 and d2 are left at their default value of zero, the load
will be applied along the full length of the member.
• The parameter d3 can be used to specify a load that is offset from the
shear center.
The Direction category is used to specify the direction of the load.
• X, Y, Z indicate directions relative to the local coordinate system axes.
• GX, GY, GZ indicate directions relative to the global axes.
• PX, PY, PZ indicate that a load acts in a particular global axis direction,
but the magnitude of the load is to be based on the projected length of
the member rather than the actual length measured along a slope.
Note: When loads are indicated to be along the projected length of the
member, the parameters d1, d2 and d3 are still measured along the
length of the member, not along the projected length.
Hint: Additional information is available in Section 5.32.2 of the STAAD.Pro

Technical Reference manual.
11 Enter -2 kip/ft {-30 kN/m} in the W1 field. The value is negative because
the load should act downward, that is, in the negative global Y direction.
12 Leave the parameters d1, d2 and d3 set to their default values of 0 so the
load will act at the shear center along the entire length of the beam.
13 Click the GY radio button in the Direction category.
14 Click the Add button followed by the Close button.

The reference to the uniform load appears under the Live Load case as
shown below:
Again, the graphic with the question mark indicates that STAAD.Pro is
expecting this load to be assigned to specific members.
15 Click on the expression UNI GY -2 kip/ft {UNI GY -30 kN/m} in the Load &
Definition dialog.
17 Click _BOTC, and then click Close.
18 Click the Assign to Selected Beams option in the Assignment Method
category of the Load & Definition dialog, and then click the Assign button.
20 Click the Loads icon on the Structure toolbar to view the uniformly
distributed load on the bottom chord.
21 Click the cursor anywhere in the Main Window to deselect all of the
members.
22 Click on the Wind Load case in the list of Load Cases Details as shown
below:
23 Click the Add... button.

24 Click the Nodal Load item in the Add New: Load Items dialog. The Node
option will be selected by default.
25 Enter 1.2 kips {5 kN} in the Fx field, then click Add followed by the Close
button.
The reference to the nodal load will appear under the Wind Load case as
shown below:
26 Click on the expression FX 1.2 kip {FX 5 kN} in the Load & Definition dialog.
27 Click Use Cursor to Assign in the Assignment Method.
28 Click the Assign button. The text in the button changes to “Assigning” as
before, and the cursor graphic changes to the special assign nodal loads
cursor.
29 Click on each of the six nodes circled in the figure below:
30 Click the Assigning button to toggle the Assign mode off when finished.

Some final notes on populating the Load Cases with Load Items and assigning
them to the model:
• This exercise demonstrated the use of explicitly defined and assigned Nodal
loads to represent wind load on the model. Be aware that STAAD.Pro also has
the ability to calculate code-specified wind pressures, determine influence
areas, and resolve pressures into Nodal loads. This method of generating wind
loads on a structure would be useful in a situation where there are influence
areas such as glass panels receiving wind pressure and transferring it to the
building frame. (See Example 15 in the STAAD.Pro Examples manual.)
• The Load & Definition dialog has a Toggle Load checkbox located just above
the Assignment Method area. Its function is analogous to the Toggle
Specification checkbox described previously.
• The Edit… button provides the ability to edit the parameters used to define
whichever Load Item is currently selected in the Load & Definition dialog.
Within the Edit dialog there is a column headed with the check symbol. It
provides a checkbox for every node in the model that has been assigned the
selected load. All of these checkboxes are checked by default. Removing the
check from one of these checkboxes will remove the selected load from the
corresponding node. There is another column headed with the light bulb
symbol. It also provides a checkbox for every node in the model that has been
assigned the selected load. All of these checkboxes are unchecked by default.
Placing a check in any of the “light bulb” checkboxes will highlight the
corresponding node in the Main Window. This helps to establish which node is
which without having to relate to node numbers.
• The Delete… button can be used to delete a selected Load Item.
• When the Load & Definition sub-tab of the General tab is active, STAAD.Pro
displays the graphic icons representing the Load Items assigned to the model.
Navigating to any other sub-tab will remove the display of the load icons.
There may be some times where modeling work needs to be done from a
different tab, but it would be helpful to be able to concurrently view the load
icons. The following exercise demonstrates how this can be done.

 Exercise: Viewing Load Icons on Tabs other than the Load & Definition sub-
tab
Hint: Load icons should be visible on the screen because the Load & Definition
sub-tab of the General tab is currently active.
1 Click the Support sub-tab, and note that the load icons disappear.
2 Right-click the mouse inside the Main Window and select the Labels…
command from the pop-up menu.
3 Click the Loads and Results tab in the Diagrams dialog.
4 Click OK to acknowledge the warning box that Force results are not
available.
5 Click the Loads checkbox, and ensure that the Show Load Arrow checkbox
is also selected in the Loads category, and then click Apply.
The load arrows for each of the nodal loads should now be displayed. Now,
to see the load values:
6 Click the Labels tab of the Diagrams dialog.
7 Click the Load Values checkbox in the Loading Display Options category,
and then click OK.
The load values are displayed on the structure.
The final exercise demonstrates the creation of a Load Combination that

combines the analysis results for the dead, live and wind loads.
 Exercise: Creating a Load Combination

1 Click the Load & Definition sub-tab.
2 Click the Load Cases Details item in the Load & Definition dialog as shown
below:
3 Click the Add… button.

4 In the Add New : Load Cases dialog, click the Define Combinations item.
The Load Number is automatically incremented to 4, and the Normal type
of combination is selected by default.

5 Enter LC1 + LC2 + LC3 in the Name field.

The Default factor is currently set to 1, which will be acceptable for the
purposes of this exercise.
All three of the existing load cases are currently listed in the Available Load
Cases box.
6 Click the double-right arrow button.
All three load cases are moved from the Available Load Cases box to the
Load Combination Definition box, with factors of 1.
To apply different factors for different Load Cases, either add the Load
Cases one at a time and edit the value in the Default factor field each time,
or add all Load Cases with a single factor and then edit the factors
individually in the Load Combination Definition box.
7 Click the Add button, and then click Close to dismiss the Create New
Definitions dialog.
The load combination now appears in the Load & Definition dialog with
the reference number 4. It has a blue graphic with the letter “C” for
“combination” to differentiate it from the load cases, which have a graphic
with the letter “L” in a box in the Load Case Details list.

Materials
Materials
The Materials dialog is used to define and assign materials to entities in a model.
Let's review the Material sub-tab. If the model is not currently active, open the
dataset file named Properties 9.std. To access the Material sub-tab, click the
General tab, Material sub-tab.
The Isotropic tab of the Material dialog lists the four materials that are available
by default: steel, stainless steel, aluminum, and concrete. STAAD.Pro also allows
custom materials to be defined to represent plastic, fiberglass, etc… Isotropic
materials consist of four material properties: Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's
Ratio, Density, and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion and Contraction.
Note: Yield strength is NOT one of the four material properties associated with a
Material specification. Material strengths are specified in a different location of
the program having to do with design.
Hint: For models that will incorporate custom materials, it may be more efficient to
create the materials prior to assigning Properties. This way, the custom
materials are available to incorporate into the model when section properties
are assigned.
The Orthotropic tab can be used to create custom materials for plates that have a
different Modulus of Elasticity and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion and
Contraction in different directions.
The process of using this tab to assign materials to entities in a model is analogous
to the assignment methods we have already reviewed. In this particular model
there is no need to assign materials from this tab, because we associated the steel
material with all of our members when we defined Properties on the Property
sub-tab.
file.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 STAAD.Pro offers a variety of built-in section tables from which to select
Beta Angles and yield strengths.
• True
• False
2 A member's local coordinate axis system has no defined orientation until a
section is assigned to that member.
• True
• False
3 Specifications can be assigned to nodes, members, or plates to alter the
way they behave.
• True
• False
4 STAAD.Pro offers a variety of Supports that perform various functions, but
they are all limited to providing reactions with respect to the three global
axis directions.
• True
• False
5 STAAD.Pro has a way to automatically account for the weight of the
members in a model.
• True
• False
6 The yield strength is one of the required values when defining a custom
material.
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 STAAD.Pro offers a variety of built-in section tables from which to select
Beta Angles and yield strengths.
False
It is true that STAAD.Pro offers a variety of built-in section tables. However,
neither Beta Angles nor yield strengths are found in the section tables.
2 A member's local coordinate axis system has no defined orientation until a
section is assigned to that member.
False
A member's local coordinate axis system takes on a default orientation as
soon as the member is added to a model. That default orientation is
described by rules presented in this module, and it is independent of the
section that eventually gets assigned to the member.
3 Specifications can be assigned to nodes, members, or plates to alter the
way they behave.
True
Master/Slave, Property Reduction Factors, and Releases are all examples
of Specifications that are available in STAAD.Pro.
4 STAAD.Pro offers a variety of Supports that perform various functions, but
they are all limited to providing reactions with respect to the three global
axis directions.
False
It is true that a variety of Supports are available, and they do generally
provide reactions with respect to the three global axis directions.
However, the Inclined Support type allows the user to specify an arbitrary
orientation for supports. This makes it possible to specify support
conditions, for example, in radial and circumferential directions for a
circular structure, or parallel to and perpendicular to a plane in a sloping
structure.
5 STAAD.Pro has a way to automatically account for the weight of the
members in a model.
True
The Load Item called Selfweight can be added to any Load Case and
selectively assigned to any members for which the self-weight is to be
automatically considered.

Module Review
6 The yield strength is one of the required values when defining a custom
material.
False
The four values that are required to define any Material in STAAD.Pro are:
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, Density, and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion and Contraction. Yield strength not considered in a stiffness
analysis, so it doesn't come into play until code checking and design
parameters are assigned.

Analyzing the Model
Module Overview
STAAD.Pro can perform various types of analyses on a structure and offers options
for obtaining a printout of model information and the results of an analysis. This
module demonstrates how to perform an analysis in STAAD.Pro and obtain
printed output results.
• Ability to create structure geometry using STAAD.Pro
• Ability to assign member and material properties, supports, and loads in
STAAD.Pro
Module Objectives
• Add analysis commands at the appropriate location in the input file
• Add commands for printing model information and analysis results in an
output file
• Perform an analysis
• View the output file
May-10 181 Analyzing the Model

Questions
1 Is a first-order linear-elastic analysis the only type of analysis that can be
performed in STAAD.Pro?
2 Can analysis results be easily viewed in STAAD.Pro?
Analyzing the Model 182 May-10

Answers
1 Is a first order linear-elastic analysis the only type of analysis that can be
performed in STAAD.Pro?
No
STAAD.Pro has the ability to perform numerous other types of analyses,
including a P-Delta Analysis and a Direct Analysis in accordance with AISC
360-05.
2 Can analysis results be easily viewed in STAAD.Pro?
Yes
STAAD.Pro offers two methods for quickly and easily viewing analysis
results. The Output File, which is discussed in this module, offers the
ability to print a wide array of analysis results directly to a text file in a
user-friendly tabular format. The Post-Processor, which is discussed in
another module, allows graphical display of results and creation of
customized output reports.

Preparing for the Analysis

This module begins at the point where all of the steps needed to create and load a
complete model have been performed. The next step is to perform the analysis to
obtain the forces, moments, displacements, support reactions, and so forth.
STAAD.Pro offers several analysis methods as shown below:
• Perform Analysis - instructs STAAD to perform a linear elastic (stiffness)
analysis
• P-Delta Analysis - performs a second-order elastic analysis that considers the
effects of the applied loads acting on the displaced structure (P-Δ effect). This
type of analysis is generally preferred by most building codes. This is an
iterative analysis process. This analysis type also has options to specify the
number of iterations to be performed or to place a convergence tolerance on
the displacements from successive iterations. There is also an option to
include the P-δ (small delta) effect, which considers the effect of applied loads
acting on the deformed shape of individual members. Finally, this analysis
includes an option to include the Geometric Stiffness (Kg) matrix, which
modifies the member stiffnesses based on the applied loads.
• Cable Analysis - performs a non-linear cable analysis on a structure that
contains non-linear cable members
• Direct Analysis - performs a Direct Analysis in accordance with Appendix 7 of
AISC 360-05. This method accounts for the second-order effects resulting
from deformation in the structure due to applied loading, imperfections, and
reduced bending stiffness of members due to the presence of axial loads. This
analysis is similar to a P-Delta Analysis with the Use Geometric Stiffness (Kg)
and Small Delta options selected. However, this analysis calculates
modifications to the stiffness matrix using the τb factors described in AISC
360-05.
• Generate Floor Spectrum - used to request the calculation of floor and/or
joint response spectra from time history results. This is particularly useful in
the analysis of floor systems supporting vibrating equipment. This feature
requires a license for the Advanced Analysis Engine.
• Imperfection Analysis - considers the secondary effects of loads acting on
members that have an initial curvature (camber) or an initial drift (out-of-
plumbness). This analysis is used on structures that have members with an
Imperfection specification applied to them.
• Buckling Analysis - identifies the factor by which the loads in the selected load
case should be increased (or decreased if the factor is less than 1) such that
Euler buckling first occurs in any member of the structure.

• Pushover Analysis - performs a static, non-linear procedure in accordance

with FEMA 356. In this method, a lateral “push” load is applied to the
structure and increased progressively according to a predefined loading
pattern until either the loading or the structure displacement reaches a
prescribed level. This method considers the non-linear behavior of the
structure, allowing plastic hinges to form in the structure until a collapse
mechanism is created. This technique is typically applied for the seismic
rehabilitation of structures.
Most of the analysis types also contain the following print options:
• No Print - none of the Print Options will be included in the output file.
• Load Data - includes an interpretation of all the load data in the output file.
• Statics Check -includes a report in the output file that will provide, for each
load case:
• The total load acting on the structure.
• The forces in the X, Y, and Z directions.
• The moments about the X, Y and Z axes acting at the origin.
• A support reaction summary.
• The maximum displacements in the model.
• The maximum translation in the X, Y and Z directions.
• The maximum rotations about the X, Y and Z axes.
In a concise form the Statics Check provides an equilibrium check and a maximum
displacement summary.
The Statics Check output can be used to compare the total loading to the total
reactions. These two quantities should be equal in magnitude and opposite in
sense for a linear-elastic analysis. If they are not, it is an indication that some of
the applied load is not being considered, and it may indicate that there is a
problem with the model.

Note: Do not confuse the Statics Check option with the Statics Load option directly
below it.
• Statics Load -includes an equilibrium check at every joint in the structure,
instead of the concise check for only support reactions versus applied loading.
• Mode Shapes - includes a report of frequencies and modes when a dynamic
analysis is performed.
• Both - equivalent to selecting Load Data and Statics Check.
• All - equivalent to selecting Load Data and Statics Load.
This module demonstrates how to instruct STAAD.Pro to perform a specific type

of analysis, and to provide certain types of output.
 Exercise: Issuing an Analysis Command

1 Open the dataset file named Analysis 1.std.
The general workflow process continues to move from top to bottom in
the Page Control area.
2 Click the Analysis/Print tab in the Page Control area.
Three sub-tabs are displayed in the Page Control area: Pre-Print, Analysis
and Post-Print. The Analysis sub-tab is active by default and the Analysis/
Print Commands dialog is open.
The Analysis/Print Commands dialog allows specification of the type of
analysis to be performed as well as providing options for printing analysis-
related information into an output file.
There is a tab on this dialog for each of the analysis types described. In
addition, there is a tab that is used to insert a Change command into the
input file. The Change command is used to reset the stiffness matrix, and
is typically required in models that include multiple analysis instructions.
A linear-elastic analysis will be performed on this model.
3 Click the Perform Analysis tab in the Analysis/Print Commands dialog.
4 Select the Statics Check radio button. Click Add, then Close.
This instructs the program to perform an analysis and to include in the
output file the information listed above in the description of the Statics
Check option.

Understanding the STAAD.Pro Input File

The Analysis-Whole Structure dialog (hereafter referred to as the Analysis dialog)
in the Data Area displays an outline of commands that are included in the input
file for the model. The order of commands in the STAAD.Pro input file is very
important.
Note the PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK command that was just added
appears at the bottom of the command list. Also, click the Define Commands…
button and note the checkbox labeled After Current in the lower left-hand corner
of the Analysis/Print Commands dialog. This checkbox influences the location
where a new command is inserted into the STAAD.Pro input file.
It refers to the currently selected line in the Command Tree shown in the Analysis
dialog. If left unchecked, a new command will always be added to the end of the
STAAD.Pro input file. As an example, a Perform Analysis command must precede a
Check Code command in the input file. In the following exercise, we will assume
that a Check Code command was inadvertently placed in the input file without a
preceding Perform Analysis command.
If STAAD.Pro adds new commands to the end of the input file by default, how can
you insert a Perform Analysis command above the line containing the Check Code
command? This is where the After Current checkbox is useful.
 Exercise: Adding Commands to the middle of the STAAD.Pro Input File

1 In the Analysis dialog in the Data Area, double-click the line that starts
with LOAD 2.
That folder expands to reveal its contents.
2 Double-click the line that says MEMBER LOAD to expand that item as well.
3 Click on the line that says UNI GY -2 {UNI GY -30}. It becomes highlighted
to indicate that it is now the “current” line.
Suppose that we wish to insert a new analysis command immediately
after this location in the input file.
4 Click the Define Commands… button at the bottom of the Analysis dialog.
5 On the Perform Analysis tab, click the Both radio button.
6 This time, click the After Current checkbox to activate it, and then click
Add, followed by Close.
The new command, PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT BOTH, is inserted after the
currently selected line in the input file.

Note: This command was only added to demonstrate the function of the After
Current option. It should not be left in the input file.
7 Right-click the PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT BOTH line in the Analysis
dialog.
8 Click Delete Command in the pop-up menu, and then confirm by clicking
Yes.
Note that the command disappears from the input file.
9 Leave the command that says PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK.
 Exercise: Adding Additional Print Commands to the Input File
Note: STAAD.Pro provides numerous options for including information about

the model and the results of the analysis in the output file.
1 Click the Pre-Print sub-tab in the Page Control, and then click the Define
Commands… button at the bottom of the Pre Analysis Print dialog in the
Data Area.
The Analysis/Print Commands dialog opens. Note the Analysis/Print
Commands dialog has different options when it is accessed from the Pre
Analysis Print dialog than when it is accessed from the Analysis dialog.
This dialog is used to include in the output file certain items related to the
input data, such as joint coordinates, member properties, and material
properties.
2 Click the Material Properties tab, click the Add button, and then click
Close.
This places a command in the input file requesting STAAD.Pro to print the
material properties of members in the output file.
Note that the command appears in the Pre Analysis Print dialog, and that
it has a question mark graphic in front of the command. This indicates that
the command has not yet been assigned to any members.
3 Click the PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES command in the Pre Analysis Print
dialog.
4 Click the Assign To View radio button in the Assignment Method category,
and then click the Assign button.
5 Click Yes in the pop-up dialog to confirm the assignment.
All members in the Main Window become highlighted, indicating that the
command was applied to every member in the model.

Note that even if no Pre Analysis Print commands were issued, STAAD.Pro
will still echo the input data in the output file.
However, the Pre Analysis Print commands display information in a more
user-friendly, tabular format.
6 Now, click the Post-Print sub-tab in the Page Control, and then click the
Define Commands button at the bottom of the Post Analysis Print dialog in
the Data Area.
Another Analysis/Print Commands dialog opens with a large number of
post-analysis printing options available.
Some of the available options to place in the output file include analysis
results, joint displacements, support reactions, member forces, member
section forces (all 6 forces at 1/8th intervals along the member length),
member stresses, etc.
7 Click the Analysis Results tab, and then click Add followed by Close.
The PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS command now appears in the input file in
the Post Analysis Print dialog.
About the Print Analysis Results Command

The Print Analysis Results command does not need to be assigned to any specific
member. It automatically is assigned to every node and member in the structure.
By adding this command, all joint displacements, support reactions, and member
end forces are included in the output file.
It is always possible to come back later, add more analysis/print commands, and
re-run the analysis. In addition, there are other methods of obtaining analysis
results besides the output file.
For example, the Post Processor, which is covered in detail in another module,
offers a variety of ways to view results graphically. It is also used to create
customized reports that can include information in both tabular and graphical
format.

The commands in the Post Analysis Print dialog now include:

• PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
• PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES
• PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
• FINISH
Note that when the command list is viewed from the Post Analysis Print dialog,
most of the commands are grayed out, and only the PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
command is in bold text with a green checkmark.
The other items are grayed out to indicate that they cannot be modified from the
current location in the Page Control. Edits to those items require moving to a
different tab in the Page Control first.
For example, if it is necessary to modify the edit list of members for the PRINT
MATERIAL PROPERTIES command, it requires clicking on the Pre-Print sub-tab
first. Then the PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES command would be in bold text,
indicating that it is accessible to modify.

Performing the Analysis
Performing the Analysis

Now that preparations are complete, it is time to perform the analysis.
 Exercise: Performing the Analysis

1 Continue working in the same file, or open the dataset file named Analysis
2.std.
2 Click Analyze > Run Analysis…. Click Save if a confirmation dialog appears.
A dialog labeled STAAD Analysis and Design displays a series of messages
as the analysis proceeds.
While the analysis is in progress, a button labeled Abort is provided in the
lower right corner. It can be used to stop the processing and abort the run.
In the case of this example model, the processing time is so short that it
may be difficult to see the Abort button before it changes to the Done
button.
When the analysis is complete, STAAD.Pro displays the message: “End
STAAD.Pro Run…” and reports the total processing time.
Three options are now available in the lower left corner of the dialog:
• View Output File
• Go to Post Processing Mode
• Stay in Modeling Mode
3 Click the View Output File radio button, and then click Done.
The STAAD Analysis and Design dialog is dismissed and the output file
opens in the STAAD Output Viewer.
4 Keep the STAAD Output Viewer window open for reference in the next
section.

How STAAD.Pro Generates Results
How STAAD.Pro Generates Results

In a linear elastic analysis, a fundamental equation is used to generate the results:
• [K] {u} = {P}
It states that the stiffness, K, of the structure multiplied by the displacement

vector, u, must be equal to the applied loading vector, P, in order to satisfy the
requirement that the structure is in a state of equilibrium.
The stiffness of a structure is a composition of the individual stiffnesses of each

member and each degree of freedom in the structure.
The simplest case of this concept, a single member with a single degree of
freedom, can be illustrated by considering a weight suspended at the end of a
spring of stiffness K.
K = P/
The weight applies a load to the spring, causing it to deflect a distance δ as shown
in the figure above. This is a simple example. However, even when looking at only
a single beam in a three-dimensional structure model, the problem immediately
becomes more complicated.
Each beam has six degrees of freedom at each end of the beam; three
translational degrees of freedom and three rotational degrees of freedom. So
there are twelve degrees of freedom for each beam element, and each degree of
freedom has its own stiffness.
There are also coupling effects which have to be taken into account. For instance,
when one portion of the structure pushes on another portion, the second portion
pushes back, and when one end of a beam moves, the other end moves too, and
so forth.

Viewing the Output File
All of these stiffnesses must be assembled into a stiffness matrix. The magnitudes
of the stiffness factors are known. The stiffnesses are a function of member
properties, material properties, member orientation, beta angles, and so forth
The load values are also known. The only unknown values are the displacements,
and this is the quantity for which STAAD.Pro is actually solving.

During the analysis, an output file is produced containing results, warnings and
messages associated with errors if any. The output file has the extension .ANL and
may be viewed using the STAAD Output Viewer or any other text file viewer. Use
the scroll bar to scroll down through the report.
The first section displays any job information that was entered in the Job Info
dialog, followed by an echo of the input file. Below that is a list of PROBLEM
STATISTICS: number of joints, members and elements, supports, load cases, and
other data.
Following the statistics is information associated with the Statics Check requested
with the PRINT STATICS CHECK command. The Statics Check was requested in
order to verify that the structure is in equilibrium for the various load cases. For
each primary load case, the Statics Check report provides:
• Summary of total applied loads for all 6 degrees of freedom, with moments
calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0).
• Summary of total reactions from the supports of the structure, with moments
calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0).
• Maximum displacements (3 translations and 3 rotations) in the structure
induced by this load case.
To check equilibrium for a given load case, verify that each of the 3 applied forces
and 3 applied moments is equal in magnitude and opposite in sign to the 3
reaction forces and 3 reaction moments.
Hint: A failure to achieve equilibrium could imply that the analysis results (for a
linear elastic analysis) are erroneous. Factors such as instability conditions or
improperly applied loads can cause the equilibrium check to fail.

It is also important to examine the maximum displacements for two reasons:

• First, to verify that the displacements seem reasonable and not extreme,
which could indicate a modeling error, an instability, or a drastically
disproportionate member stiffness somewhere in the model.
• Second, to simply verify that the deformations are within tolerable limits.
Following the statics check is the material properties information for all members
in the model.
The next block of data is the analysis results, which includes:

• Joint displacements for every joint
• Support reactions for every support
• Member end forces for every member
Finally, a message is printed indicating the end of the STAAD.Pro run.
The output report for this very simple structure is several pages long. This
underscores the need to be judicious when choosing analysis/print commands. It
can be very easy to end up with an output report that is hundreds of pages in
length, making it difficult to find the desired results.
Bear in mind that the output file is just one method of obtaining output results
from STAAD.Pro. The Post Processor, which is covered in detail in a different
module, is specifically for the purpose of observing and reporting analysis results.
Close the STAAD Output Viewer window by clicking File > Exit. Be careful to select
the STAAD Output Viewer's File menu, not the File menu in the STAAD.Pro Menu
Bar.
Click File > Close to return to the Start Page.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 Which of the following is NOT an analysis type in STAAD.Pro:
• P-Delta Analysis
• Direct Analysis
• Mode Shape Calculation
• Buckling Analysis
2 In order to include an equilibrium check at every joint in the Output File,
which Print Option must be selected when the analysis type is being
specified?
3 A STAAD.Pro file can only contain one analysis command.
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 Which of the following is NOT an analysis type in STAAD.Pro:
Mode Shape Calculation
STAAD.Pro can perform a mode shape calculation, but this is not one of
the basic analysis types available in STAAD.Pro.
2 In order to include an equilibrium check at every joint in the Output File,
which Print Option must be selected when the analysis type is being
specified?
Statics Load
The Statics Load option will print an equilibrium check at every joint of the
structure. The Statics Check option provides an equilibrium check for the
structure as a whole.
3 A STAAD.Pro file can only contain one analysis command.
False
Several analysis commands can be issued within a single STAAD.Pro file.
The CHANGE command must often be used between analysis commands
in order to reset the stiffness matrix.

The Post Processor
Module Overview
The module covers the fundamentals of the Post Processor in STAAD.Pro. Various
methods are demonstrated to review and verify analysis results in the Post
Processor.
STAAD.Pro
• Ability to issue analysis commands and perform an analysis in STAAD.Pro
Module Objectives
• Understand the coordinate system and sign convention for reporting results
• Activate the Post Processor and verify analysis results
• Review node analysis results including nodal displacement and reactions
• Review beam analysis results including beam forces and stresses
• Animate the structure due to the forces acting upon it
• Plot Output from STAAD.Pro
May-10 197 The Post Processor

Questions
1 In the STAAD.Pro Post Processor, what are the three major types of output
results available for an analyzed model that consists of linear entities?
2 In what coordinate system are the results reported for nodal
displacements, support reactions, and member end forces?
• Global Coordinate System
• Local Coordinate System (of the member)
3 In STAAD.Pro, a positive axial member force would indicate that the
member is under compression.
• True
• False
The Post Processor 198 May-10

Answers
1 In the STAAD.Pro Post Processor, what are the three major types of output
results available for an analyzed model that consists of linear entities?
• Nodal Displacements
• Support Reactions
• Member End Forces
Other types of results involving stresses on plate and solid elements are
discussed in another module.
2 In what coordinate system are the results reported for nodal
displacements, support reactions, and member end forces?
• Nodal Displacements: Global Coordinate System
• Support Reactions: Global Coordinate System
• Member End Forces: Local Coordinate System (of the member)
Member loads that are skewed with respect to the global axis system are
resolved into their global components for the purpose of analysis.
However, when viewing the results of the analysis, member end forces are
reported with respect to the member's local coordinate system. It is logical
and convenient to express nodal displacements and support reactions in
terms of the global coordinate system.
3 In STAAD.Pro, a positive axial member force at the starting node of a
member would indicate that the member is under compression.
True
An axial force (Fx) acting in the positive direction of the local x-axis is
considered to be a positive force. At the starting node of a member, a
positive force would be pushing into the member and therefore would be
a compressive force. A negative force would then be a tensile force.
At the ending node of a member, a positive force would be pulling away
from the member, which would be a tensile force. A negative force would
then be a compressive force.

Introduction to the Post Processor

This module begins at the point where:
• All of the major modeling has been completed using STAAD.Pro's Pre
Processor
• The analysis instructions have been issued
• The analysis has been performed
The next step is to view the results of the analysis. Structural analysis software
can generate hundreds of pages of output results, even for relatively small
structures. The STAAD Post Processor is designed to assist in interpreting analysis
results and creating well organized reports, complete with tables and supporting
graphics.
Coordinate Systems for Reporting Results

An awareness of coordinate systems and sign conventions used by the program is
fundamental to understanding the output. STAAD.Pro produces three major types
of output results:
• Nodal Displacements
• Support Reactions
• Member End Forces
STAAD.Pro's stiffness matrix is a global stiffness matrix. Member loads that are
skewed with respect to the global axis system are resolved into their global
components for the purpose of analysis. However, when viewing the results of the
analysis, member end forces are reported with respect to the member's local
coordinate system. It is logical and convenient to express nodal displacements
and support reactions in terms of the global coordinate system.
The following is a brief refresher on establishing the starting end and ending end
of a member, and the orientation of a member's local axis system.
Hint: Additional information is available in Chapter 1 of the Technical Reference

manual.

Refresher on Local Coordinate System

The local x-axis is a line defined by the two ends of the member. The positive
direction of the local x-axis is defined by a line going from the starting end, node
A, to the ending end, node B, of the member.
Each member also has a local y- and local z-axis. The local x, local y, and local z
axes are always mutually perpendicular, and conform to the right-hand rule; so
local x cross local y equals local z. The local y-axis is normally parallel to the web of
a wide flange beam section, and the local z-axis is normally the major axis. The
actual orientation of each member's local coordinate system, within the global
coordinate system of the model, is defined by the order in which the member's
end nodes were selected and by any beta angle that may have been assigned to
the member.
The axes for the local coordinate systems of all members in the model can be
displayed with the keyboard shortcut Shift + O.
Symbols indicating the orientation of the local coordinate system and showing the
cross section shape of each member appear in the Main Window. The local axis
system is color-coded as follows: local x = blue, local y = red, and local z = green.
Hint: The STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual contains thorough explanations for
the orientation of the local coordinate system for an individual member.
Sign Conventions for Reporting Member End Forces

Results for member end forces are reported with respect to the member's local
coordinate system, as mentioned above. The following statement establishes the
sign convention used by STAAD.Pro for reporting axial member end forces:
• An axial force (Fx) acting in the positive direction of the local x-axis is
considered to be a positive force.
• At the starting node of a member, a positive force would be pushing into the
member and, therefore, would be a compressive force. A negative force at the
starting node of a member would then be a tensile force.
• At the ending node of a member, a positive force would be pulling away from
the member, which would be a tensile force. A negative force at the ending
node of a member would then be a compressive force.

The following figure summarizes the sign convention for axial member end forces:
Shear forces also conform to the rule that a force in the positive direction of the
local axis system is considered to be a positive force, as shown in the figure below.

The moments at each end of a member are treated in a similar way in terms of
the sign convention. The right-hand rule is used to dictate the positive sense of
rotation about each of the local axes.
For example, Mx, the moment about the local x-axis, is considered a positive
torsion if the rotation produces a vector having the same sense as the positive
local x direction, and similarly for the other moments. The following figure from
Section 1.19 of the Technical Reference manual illustrates the sign convention for
moments about a member's local axis system.
The moments shown in the figure above all represent positive bending or torsion,
since they all coincide with the positive directions of the axes based on the right-
hand rule.

Activating the Post Processor

In order to view the results of the analysis in the Post-Processor, the results must
first be available. There are two ways to quickly determine if analysis results are
available in a model:
1 STAAD Output icon on the File toolbar: Opens the output file in the
STAAD.Pro Viewer when current results are available. If icon is “grayed
out,” current results are not available.
• No Results Available:
STAAD Output icon

• Results Available:
STAAD Output icon
2 Mode Menu: Another way to tell whether results are available is to look at
the selections in the Mode menu, as shown in the diagram below. If the
Post Processing option is “grayed out,” it cannot be activated.
• No Results Available:
• Results Available:

If results are not available, it could either be because an analysis has not been
performed yet, or because the model has been changed since the last analysis
was run, making the previous results invalid.
Even if an analysis has been run on a model, there are conditions that can cause
the Post Processing mode to be unavailable. These include:
• Errors were encountered during the analysis
• Discrepancies exist between the input file and the output results.
STAAD.Pro will try to protect the integrity of the results by deleting those results if
any change is made to the input file. For example, suppose an analysis is run, and
then changes are made to the model. The program offers a warning that changes
were made and the results will no longer be available. If you confirm that you
want to proceed with the change, the program will delete the existing analysis
results and the Post Processing mode will not be available. Even seemingly
insignificant things such as opening the input file editor to add a blank line or a
comment will be interpreted as changes to the input file and will cause the output
results to be deleted.
A STAAD.Pro output file can be identified by the .ANL extension. The output file is
just a text file, so it can be viewed with any text editor. If you want to make
changes to a model after running the analysis, but think you might want to keep
the original analysis results, there are two options. Either:
• Create a backup copy of the original output file, and then make revisions as
necessary in the original model file, or
• Create a copy of the model using File > Save As, and then make changes to the
new model and allow STAAD.Pro to delete the associated results file created
by the Save As operation. The original model and its results file remain intact.

 Exercise: Activating the Post Processor

1 Open the dataset file named Post Processor 1.std.
2 Pull down the Mode menu from the Menu Bar. Notice that the Post
Processing option is “grayed out,” indicating that results are not available.
Also notice that STAAD Output icon in the File toolbar is also “grayed out.”
3 Select Analyze > Run Analysis from the Menu Bar.
4 When the analysis is complete, select the Go to Post Processing Mode
radio button in the STAAD Analysis and Design dialog, and then click Done.
5 The Results Setup dialog appears. Click the Loads tab. This page is used to
select the load cases for which analysis results are viewed.
Note: By default, all the load cases in the project are selected. In a large
structure with many load cases, it might be very cumbersome to view
the results for all load cases at the same time. The Loads page provides
a convenient way to work with results from only selected load cases at
one time.
6 Click the Range tab in the Results Setup dialog. This page can be used to
specify particular nodes, members and elements for which analysis results
are desired.
Note: By default, all entities are selected. Results can, however, be displayed
for just the entities of a certain group, for the members with a given
cross sectional property, or for entities with numbers that fall within a
given range.
Note: The Increments option is used to specify the number of segments into
which a member is divided for printing section forces, displacements,
etc.
7 Click the Result View Options tab. This page provides access to
STAAD.Pro's automatic scaling controls.
Note: Scale is the relationship between the magnitude of forces and

displacements in the real structure and the units used to represent
them on graphs and diagrams. Depending on the type of forces,
moments, load intensities and displacements represented, the
magnitude of the units will vary greatly from member to member.
Scaling units are chosen to make diagrams and graphs convey the
desired information concisely and in a way that is visually attractive.
(More to come on this topic.)

Note: STAAD.Pro has the ability to set the scaling controls automatically.
Remember that this option is available, but for training purposes, leave
the Enable Automatic Scaling checkbox turned off. It is instructional to
set the scaling manually in order to demonstrate how to use the scaling
commands.
8 Leave all selections in the Results Setup dialog at their default values.
9 Click OK to dismiss the dialog and enter the Post Processing mode.
Hint: The selections made in the Results Setup dialog determine the load
cases, members, nodes, etc. for which results will be viewed in this Post-
Processing session. Results for a different set of loads or members can
be viewed by returning to the Results Setup dialog and revising these
selections. To do this, select Results > Select Load Case in the Menu Bar
while in the Post-Processing Mode.
10 Pull down the Mode menu from the Menu Bar. Notice that the Post
Processing option is now active, indicating that results are available. Also
notice that STAAD Output icon in the File toolbar is also active.

Node Results
Node Results
The Post Processing mode presents a new set of tabs in the Page Control: Node,
Beam, Animation, and Reports. The first category of results that can be viewed in
the Post Processor is found on the Node tab in the Page Control. From here, you
can view the displacement diagram, review the nodal and beam relative
displacements, and review the support reactions.
Displaying the Displacement Diagram

The Node tab, Displacement sub-tab is active by default, and a displacement
diagram is shown in the Main Window with colored lines superimposed on the
structure. The appearance of the displacement diagram depends on which load
case is active, and on how the diagram is scaled.
 Exercise: Display the Displacement Diagram

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still open. The
Displacement sub-tab of the Node tab should currently be active.
Note: The current Load Case is 1: DEAD LOAD as shown in the Active Load list
in the View toolbar.
Note: The current Load Case is also reported in the Status Bar at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
It may not be possible to see any actual displacement of the structure at

this time. Instead, the displacement diagram may appear to be
superimposed directly on top of the structure without any apparent
deflection. The diagram should be re-scaled to be able to see an
exaggerated deflected shape of the structure due to the self weight
loading.
Hint: The Main Window can be maximized to enlarge the displacement

diagram if necessary. This will cover the tables in the Data Area, but
these can be restored later.

Node Results
2 Right click in the Main Window and click Structure Diagrams… in the pop-
up menu.
3 Click the Scales tab in the Diagrams dialog.
Hint: A second way to display the Scales tab is by selecting the Scale icon on
the Structure toolbar. The toolbar names are visible only when the
toolbars are floating, not when they are docked.
Hint: A third way to display the Scales page is by selecting the Results > Scales
command.
4 Toggle on the Apply Immediately checkbox to view the following changes
immediately.
5 Click the down arrow in the Displacement field to decrease the scale value
to 0.01 in per foot {0.8 mm per m}. At this scale, the deflected shape
should be readily apparent.
Note: The Displacement scaling parameter field under the Result Scales
category is labeled with units of “in per ft {mm per m}.” A setting of 12
means that for every 12 inches {12 mm} of calculated displacement due
to the current load case, STAAD.Pro will plot it as a scale 1 foot {1 meter}
on the diagram. When thought of this way, it may be more intuitive to
decrease the scale to emphasize the deflection. For a given deflection,
the deflection diagram shows a larger apparent deflection when the
scale is “1 inch {millimeter} of deflection per scale foot {meter} on the
diagram” than when the scale is “12 inches {millimeters} of deflection
per scale foot {meter} on the diagram”. Another way of looking at it
would be to say if a structure actually deflects 0.01 inch {0.01
millimeters}, it can be made to look like a foot {meter} of deflection
relative to the scale of the diagram by setting the scale value to 0.01.
Hint: Scaling works the same for all the different types of diagrams: moments,
shears, axial forces, etc. The choice of a scale value is arbitrary. Choose
whatever scale value produces a good looking diagram. For any given
type of diagram (deflection, axial, moment, etc.) the “ideal” scale value
will almost certainly be different, depending on which load case is
active.
6 Click on the Loads and Results tab within the Diagrams dialog.
7 Select 2: LIVE LOAD from the Load Case list, and click Apply.

Node Results
With the Deflection scale still set at 0.01 inches of deflection per scale foot
{0.8 mm per m} on the drawing, the deflected shape is wildly exaggerated.
This is because the displacement due to Load Case 2 is so much greater
than that for Load Case 1. The scale value will have to be increased to
make the deflected shape more reasonable.
Note: A second method of changing to Load Case 2 is select 2: LIVE LOAD from
the Active Load list in the View toolbar, but this method requires the
Diagrams dialog be closed first.
Hint: Changing the load case from the Loads and Results tab within the
Diagrams dialog makes it convenient to quickly return to the Scales tab
to rescale the view for the new load case.
8 Click back to the Scales tab in the Diagrams dialog.
9 Click the up arrow for the Displacement scale to increase the value to 0.2
in per foot {20 mm per m} to adjust the scale for better viewing.
10 Click back to the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog.
11 Select 3: TRANSVERSE WIND LOAD ALONG GX from the Load Case list,
and click Apply.
12 Click back to the Scales tab in the Diagrams dialog.
13 Click the OK button to close the Diagrams dialog and experiment to find a
comfortable viewing scale for the wind load case.
Note: The scaling controls only change the appearance of the Structure
Diagram by scaling the way the results are drawn on the diagram. They
do not change the results themselves in any way.
Displacement Tables
The Node Displacements and Beam Relative Displacement Detail tables are
displayed in the Data Area when the Displacement sub-tab, under the Node tab, is
active. In both tables, the results presented depend upon the selections made
previously in the Results Setup dialog.
Hint: Remember that the Results Setup dialog can be displayed again by selecting
Results > Select Load Case from the Menu Bar while in the Post Processing
Mode.

Node Results
 Exercise: Viewing the Displacement Tables

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still open. The
Displacement sub-tab of the Node tab should currently be active.
Note: If the Displacement Diagram was enlarged previously, restore the

default view of this page by selecting the Displacement sub-tab in the
Page Control area.
2 Review the Node Displacements table in the Data Area. This table contains
two tabs: All and Summary.
3 In the Node Displacements table, ensure that the All tab is selected.
The All tab reports translations and rotations for every load case and node
that were included in the selection set on the Results Setup dialog. For this
example, all load cases and all nodes were included. The following items
are available from the All tab in the Node Displacements table:
• Node Number
• Load Cases
• Translational Displacements in each of the global X, Y, and Z directions
• Resultant Displacement - This magnitude is the square root of the sum
of the squares of the X, Y and Z displacements
2 2 2
R = x +y +z
• Rotational Displacements for the three rotational degrees of freedom

4 In the Node Displacements table, select the Summary tab.
The Summary tab reports maximum and minimum translations and
rotations for each degree of freedom, the node where each maximum
value occurred, the Load Case that produced each maximum value and the
other displacements associated with that particular node and load case.
For visual clarity, the extreme values are shown in bold font. The other
values in normal font are “associated values”.
Note: This table is compatible with Microsoft Excel, as are all results tables in
STAAD.Pro. Values can be copied and pasted from this table directly into
an Excel spreadsheet to work with the data in Excel. To select data to
copy to a spreadsheet, either:
• Click on the top left corner of the table to highlight its entire contents,
or
• Click and drag in the first column to select a subset of the entire table.

Node Results
Hint: The usual Windows selection methods are supported; i.e. Shift + click can
be used to select multiple contiguous rows, Control (Ctrl) + click can be
used to select multiple rows, even if noncontiguous. After the selection
is made, right-click, select Copy, go to Excel, right-click and select Paste.
5 Review the Beam Relative Displacement Detail table in the Data Area. This
table has two tabs: All Relative Displacements and Max Relative
Displacements.
6 In the Beam Relative Displacement Detail table, ensure that the All
Relative Displacements tab is selected.
The All Relative Displacements tab shows relative displacements for all
beams. Relative displacements are reported in terms of the member's
local coordinate system. They are measured with respect to a chord
through the member endpoints at their displaced locations, so the relative
displacement at the starting end and ending end will always be zero by
definition. The All Relative Displacements tab shows x, y, z and Resultant
relative displacements at the beam's starting end, ending end, and at a
number of intermediate points along the beam's length.
Hint: The number of intermediate points to be reported is dictated by the

Increments setting on the Range tab of the Results Setup dialog. When
the Increments setting is set to 4, the members are divided into four
equal segments. Thus, three intermediate points are created - the ¼
point, midpoint, and ¾ point - in addition to the start and end points.
Results are then reported at these points.
7 In the Beam Relative Displacement Detail table, select the Max Relative
Displacements tab.
The Max Relative Displacements tab lists maximum relative displacement
values and distances from the starting end of the beam to the locations
where the maximum displacements occur. Results are shown for
displacements in the local x, y, and z directions as well as a resultant value.
In the far right-hand column, the ratio of member span length to
maximum displacement is reported.
Hint: The units and decimal precision displayed in the results tables can be
controlled by selecting Tools > Set Current Display Unit… from the
Menu Bar or by clicking the Change Graphical Display Unit icon from
the Structure toolbar. In the Options dialog that appears, select the
Structure Units option. The Dimensions category provides controls for

Node Results
the units and decimal precision for Dimensions and Displacement values
that are displayed in the results diagrams and tables.
Reaction Results
The Support Reactions and Statics Check Results tables are displayed in the Data
Area when the Reactions sub-tab, under the Node tab, is active. In both tables,
the results presented depend upon the selections made previously in the Results
Setup dialog.
 Exercise: Viewing Support Reaction Information

1 Ensure that the dataset file named Post Processor 1.std is still the active
file.
2 In the Page Control area, select the Reactions sub-tab of the Node tab.
In the Main Window, the structure diagram is displayed with the support
reactions annotated on the diagram.
3 Review the Support Reactions table in the Data Area. This table has three
tabs: All, Summary, and Envelope.
4 In the Support Reactions table, ensure that the All tab is selected.
The All tab displays reactions for all six degrees of freedom, at all nodes,
for all load cases.
5 In the Support Reactions table, select the Summary tab.

Node Results
The Summary tab displays the extreme reactions (max and min) for all six
degrees of freedom, along with the load case that caused the extreme
value, the support node where this reaction occurs, and the other
reactions that are associated with that load case at that node. The
Summary tab will always have twelve lines of data corresponding to
maximum and minimum of Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, and Mz, regardless of how
many nodes or load cases were selected for viewing in this Post Processing
session.
Note: For structures with multiple supports, the Summary tab may never
report the reactions for some of the supports, if they do not represent
an extreme value for any of the six degrees of freedom.
On the Summary tab, the column labeled “L/C” indicates the controlling
load case for each extreme reaction. The extreme value is shown in bold
font, and the other reaction values associated with that node and load
case are shown in regular font.
6 In the Support Reactions table, select the Envelope tab.
The Envelope tab displays results for each support node in the model. The
maximum positive and maximum negative reactions for all six degrees of
freedom are shown for each support, as well as the load case that causes
the extreme.
Note: The Envelope tab and the Summary tab differ in two ways:
• The Envelope tab reports values for all nodes, where the Summary tab
only reports on the maxima and minima considering all nodes.
• The Summary tab reports the associated reactions from the other
degrees of freedom, where the Envelope tab does not provide the
associated values.
7 Review the Statics Check Results table in the Data Area.
The Statics Check Results table provides a tabular presentation of the
equilibrium check on the structure for each load case. This is the same
information that can be viewed in the Output File by including PRINT
STATICS CHECK in the PERFORM ANALYSIS command. However, this table
just presents the information in a more concise format.

Beam Analysis Results

The next category of results that can be viewed in the Post Processor is found on
the Beam tab in the Page Control. From here, you can view beam end and
intermediate forces and moments and beam stresses, and plot shear and moment
diagrams on the entire structure or only on individual members.
Beam Forces
The Beam End Forces and Beam Force Detail tables are displayed in the Data Area
when the Forces sub-tab, under the Beam tab, is active. In both tables, the results
presented depend upon the selections made previously in the Results Setup
dialog.
 Exercise: Viewing Beam Force Results

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still the active file and
the Post Processing Mode is currently active.
2 Select the Beam tab in the Page Control area. The Forces sub-tab is active
by default.
3 Review the Beam End Forces table in the Data Area. The Beam End Forces
table reports the forces at member ends. There are three tabs in this
table: All, Summary, and Envelope.
4 In the Beam End Forces table, ensure that the All tab is selected.
The All tab displays beam end forces for both ends of all members for each
load case.
Note: When viewing member results, the member local axis system is used as
the basis for reporting results. Therefore, Fx is an axial force, Fy and Fz
are shear forces, Mx is a torsional moment, and My and Mz are bending
moments about the weak and strong axis, respectively. Thus, on the All
tab, an axially loaded member has Fx forces at each end that are equal
in magnitude but opposite in algebraic sign.
5 In the Beam End Forces table, select the Summary tab.
The Summary tab reports exactly twelve different conditions consisting of
the maximum and minimum beam end forces for all six degrees of
freedom. These maximum and minimum values are each reported for the
single member and load case where the extreme value occurred. For
example, the Max Fx row reports the maximum positive axial force found
in the model, considering all members and load cases. This tab also then

reports the associated member end forces for all of the other 5 degrees of
freedom for that member for that particular loading condition, even
though these values may not be a maximum or minimum value for that
degree of freedom.
6 In the Beam End Forces table, select the Envelope tab.
The Envelope tab reports the envelope of member end forces by providing
the maximum positive and maximum negative member end forces for all
member ends, along with the name of the loading condition that causes
the envelope value.
7 Review the Beam Force Detail table in the Data Area. The Beam Force
Detail table reports beam forces at intermediate points along the member
length, rather than only at the member ends.
8 In the Beam Force Detail table, ensure that the All tab is selected.
The All tab shows the magnitude of the three forces and three moments at
each intermediate point for every member and load case.
Hint: Recall that the number of intermediate points along the member is
specified by the Increments setting on the Range tab of the Results
Setup dialog. The Results > Select Load Case command on the Menu Bar
can be used to open the Results Setup dialog and change this
Increments value.
9 In the Beam Force Detail table, select the Max Axial Forces tab.
The Max Axial Forces tab shows the maximum positive and maximum
negative axial force values for each member, for each load case. The
distance from the start node of the member to the location of the
maximum axial force is also provided.
10 In the Beam Force Detail table, review the Max Bending Moments and
Max Shear Forces tabs.
The Max Bending Moments and Max Shear Forces tabs are similar to the
Max Axial Forces tab, except that they display maximum bending
moments and maximum shear forces, respectively. The moments and
shears are provided about both the local-y and the local-z axes.
There is one major difference regarding the sign convention for forces as
reported in the Beam End Forces table and the Beam Force Detail table.
This difference will be explored in the following exercise.

 Exercise: Beam End Forces results versus Beam Forces Detail results
1 The dataset file named Post Processor 1.std should still be open, and the
Post Processing Mode should be active.
2 Select the Beam tab in the Page Control area. The Forces sub-tab is active
by default.
3 Click the Menu Bar item Results > Select Load Case to open the Results
Setup dialog.
4 Make 2 LIVE LOAD the only selected load case, and then click OK to close
the dialog.
5 Set force units to kip {kN} and to display zero decimal places.
Hint: To do this, click the Menu Bar item Tools > Set Current Display Unit…,
then select the Force Units option.
6 Click the top chord member just to the left of the ridge (member #23).
Note: The corresponding member information becomes highlighted in the

Beam End Forces table and the Beam Force Detail table.
7 Review the All tab of the Beam End Forces table and note the following:
• Member end force Fx (axial force) at the starting end (node #6) is
positive 61 kips {276 kN}.
• Member end force Fx at the ending end (node #16) is negative 61 kips
{276 kN}.
Here, Fx follows the sign convention that member end forces are positive
in the positive direction of the local-x axis. Therefore, this member is in
compression, which makes sense for a top chord member under this type
of loading. The magnitude of the compression is 61 kips {276 kN}.
8 Review the All tab of the Beam Force Detail table and note the following:
• The value of Fx (axial force) for member #23 is consistently positive 61
kips {276 kN} at all five points along the length of the member.
The magnitude of the force is consistent between the two tables. This is as
expected. Similar comparisons between the two tables for other degrees
of freedom will establish that the sign convention used in the Beam Force
Detail table is consistent with the sign convention used in the Beam End
Forces table for the forces at the starting end of beams. For example,
when considering axial forces, compressive axial forces are indicated as
positive values in the Beam Force Detail table.
9 Click the Results > Select Load Case command from the Menu Bar again.

10 Move all load cases to the Selected window, then click OK.
In a previous exercise, the displacement diagram for the structure was displayed
in the Main Window. STAAD.Pro also provides the ability to display axial force,
shear, and moment diagrams on the structure. This exercise demonstrates how to
view these diagrams in the Main Window.
The Main Window is currently showing a Bending Z moment diagram for the
entire structure for the active load case, although it may not be obvious. As was
demonstrated earlier with the Displacement diagrams, the issue here is one of
selecting an appropriate scale.
 Exercise: Viewing Force and Moment Diagrams for the Structure

Post Processing Mode should be active. The Forces sub-tab of the Beam
tab should currently be active.
2 Click the Menu Bar item View > Structure Diagrams…, then select the
Labels tab (or right-click in the Main Window and select the Labels option
on the pop-up menu). In the General category, note the options to Show
Axes Window and Show Diagram Info. Ensure that both options are
selected. These settings provide:
• A coordinate axis system for reference in the lower left corner of the
Main Window, and
• A line of text in the lower right-hand corner that indicates the Active
Load case and the type of diagram being displayed.
3 Select the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog.
4 Select 2: LIVE LOAD in the Load Case category.
5 Enable the Bending zz checkbox in the Beam Forces category.
Note: The other diagrams that may be plotted, such as Shear yy or Torsion, can
be selected from this same area.
6 Click the Scales tab, and activate the Apply Immediately checkbox in the
upper right-hand corner of the dialog.
7 Set the Bending Z scale to 150 kip·in per ft {50 kN·m per m}, and click OK.
The Structure Diagram now displays a diagram of the bending moments
about the local z axis at a scale that makes the diagram clearly readable.

Hint: To properly interpret a bending moment diagram in STAAD.Pro:

STAAD.Pro always draws the bending moment diagram on the tension
side of the member.
Note: More than one type of diagram can be displayed at one time and each
diagram can be displayed in a characteristic color on the structure. The
colored boxes to the right of each item in the Beam Forces category
(located on the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog, as shown
previously) indicate the color that will be used for each type of diagram.
To change any of these colors, just click on the box. A standard Windows
color palette opens to offer a variety of color options.
Hint: Icons are provided on the Results toolbar to quickly access the available
diagrams. This toolbar is shown in the figure below.
Beam Stresses
STAAD.Pro can show stress contour plots for a member's cross section at any
point along the length of the member. The following exercise demonstrates the
use of this feature.
 Exercise: Review the Beam Stresses

Post Processing Mode should be active.
2 Click on the Stresses sub-tab of the Beam tab in the Page Control.
The screen is now split into three parts:
• The 3D Beam Stress Contour diagram, also referred to as the “splitter
window”, appears at the top of the view.
• The Main Window appears in the lower left corner of the screen and
displays the structure diagram.
• The Beam Combined Axial and Bending Stresses tables appear in the
lower right corner of the screen.
3 Review the structure diagram. It displays the Beam Stress diagram
superimposed on the entire structure. Compressive and tensile stresses

are shown on this diagram. Default colors for the stresses are red for
compressive stresses and blue for tensile stresses.
Hint: If the current scale is not set to view the diagram clearly, the following
steps may be necessary:
• Right-click in the structure diagram, and click Structure Diagrams… in
the pop-up menu.
• Click the Scales tab, and check the Apply Immediately checkbox in the
upper right-hand corner.
• Modify the Beam Stress scale value in the Results Scales category until
the diagram appears at an appropriate scale.
• Click OK.
Hint: Recall that in order to increase the size of the stress diagram with respect
to the structure, the value of the scaling parameter should be
decreased.
4 In the structure diagram, click on beam number 1, the bottom chord
member immediately to the right of midspan.
Selection
Note: The Select Section Plane dialog opens. This dialog may need to be
moved on the screen so that the 3D Beam Stress Contour dialog can be
clearly seen.

5 Review the 3D Beam Stress Contour dialog. The 3D Beam Stress Contour
dialog displays a three-dimensional view of the selected member in the
left portion of the dialog. The right side of the dialog shows the combined
stress of the selected member on a cross section view. The cut location of
the cross section is indicated by the yellow rectangle on the three-
dimensional view of the member.
Note: This dialog is often referred to as a “splitter window” because of the

separator, or splitter, bar near the middle of the window, which can be
moved to change the relative size of the two sections of the dialog.
6 Activate the Display Legend checkbox in the Select Section Plane dialog. A
legend appears in the stress contour plot showing the combined stress
range and associated color gradient.
Note: Combined stress is the algebraic combination of the stresses resulting

from FX, MY and MZ. Positive values represent compression, and
negative values represent tension.
7 Activate the Display Corner Stress checkbox in the Select Section Plane
dialog. The stress values at the four corners of the cross section now
appear on the stress contour plot.
8 Click and drag the slider in the Select Section Plane dialog, and note that
the yellow cut rectangle moves along the length of the beam in the three-
dimensional view. Also note that the corner stress values in the stress
contour plot change continually as the slider is moved along the length of
the member.
9 Review the Beam Combined Axial and Bending Stresses table in the lower
right corner of the Main Window.
This table reports combined axial and bending stresses as the algebraic
combination of the stresses resulting from FX, MY and MZ. There are three
tabs for this table:
• The All tab shows the stresses for all members in the model, for all load
cases.
• The Max Stresses tab reports the magnitude and locations of the
maximum tensile and compressive stresses for each load case on every
member in the model.
• The Profile Stress Points tab reports stresses at user-defined points on
the cross-section.
On the All tab, cross sectional stresses are reported at both ends as well as
at multiple intermediate points along the length of each beam.

Note: The number of intermediate points is again determined by the

Increments setting on the Range tab of the Results Setup dialog.
Some Discussion about the Corner Stresses…
The stresses are reported at the four corners of the cross section. The corner
numbers STAAD.Pro uses to identify the corners of various typical cross sections
are shown in the following figure.
The maximum compressive and tensile stresses for the cross section are also
reported at each point along the length of the member. Tensile stresses are
reported as negative values, and compressive stresses are considered positive.
This is consistent with the sign convention for axial forces in the Beam Force
Detail table discussed earlier.
Hint: For more information on the sign conventions used for reporting member
stresses, please see Section 1.19 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual.

Some Discussion about Profile Points…
The Select Profile Point category in the Select Section Plane dialog provides tools
to determine combined stresses at specific points on the cross section and to
record those values in a table if desired. A Profile Point is defined by its local y-axis
coordinate and local z-axis coordinate, and must fall within the outline of the
cross section to be valid. Profile Points can either be defined by entering
coordinate values in the Y Point and Z Point fields, or by clicking on the cross
section diagram with the cursor.
Once a valid Profile Point has been defined, it appears as a small green dot on the
cross section in the right side of the splitter window. The coordinates of the
Profile Point and the combined stress value are displayed just below the cross
section diagram.
To save the data for a Profile Point, click the Add Stress to Table button in the
lower right corner of the Select Section Plane dialog. The data for all saved points
is accessible from the Profile Stress Points tab of the Beam Combined Axial and
Bending Stresses table. For each Profile Point added to the table, a new line is
created in the table, and the following data is saved:
• Beam number
• Load case number
• Location of section along length of member
• Location of point of interest in y-z plane of section
• Magnitude of axial force
• Magnitude of both bending moments
• Combined stress value at point of interest
Beam Graphs
The Beam tab and Graphs sub-tab of the Page Control displays force and moment
diagrams for individual members of the structure, as shown in the following
exercise.
 Exercise: Viewing Beam Graphs

1 Post Processor 1.std should still be the current file, and the Post
Processing Mode should still be active.
2 Click the Graphs sub-tab in the Page Control.

3 Select 2: LIVE LOAD in the Active Load list in the View toolbar.
4 Select member number 1 on the structure diagram in the Main Window.
This is the bottom chord member immediately to the right of mid-span.
Selection
The corresponding bending moment (Mz) diagram, shear diagram (Fy) and
axial force (Fx) graphs for the selected member are displayed in the Data
Area. The axial load graph indicates a constant value of -57.3 kips {-261
kN}, which implies tension. Tension makes sense for the bottom chord of a
truss subject to 2: LIVE LOAD. The top and middle graphs are currently
blank.
Note: For demonstration purposes during the creation of this model, this
member was rotated 90° from the typical orientation of the bottom
chord members. Therefore, the 2: LIVE LOAD load case produces weak
axis shear and bending (Fz and My, respectively) for this member. As a
result, the Fy and Mz graphs currently display a constant value of zero.
5 Right-click inside the “Mz” graph and click Diagrams… from the pop-up
menu.
Note: Bending zz is currently selected, corresponding to the display of the

“Mz” graph.
6 Activate the Bending yy checkbox to view the bending moment in this
member due to the applied live load.

Note: It is not necessary to deselect the Bending zz checkbox in order to select

Bending yy. This makes it possible to superimpose the graphs of
multiple forces at one time. More to come on this topic…
7 Click OK. The top graph is now labeled “My” and “Mz” as a result of having
both options selected.
Note: The horizontal scale is graduated in units of feet {meters}, and the x-
coordinate of the point of maximum moment is automatically indicated
for convenience, along with magnitudes of maximum moments. The
vertical scale is automatically set to maximize the graph.
8 Right-click inside the “Fy” graph in the middle window, and click
Diagrams… from the pop-up menu.
9 Activate the Shear zz checkbox, disable the Shear yy checkbox, and click
OK. The middle graph now displays a shear force diagram labeled “Fz”,
which makes sense for the applied loading.
Note: Back to the concept of superimposing more than one force on a graph at
one time. For this example, we will assume that the goal is to view the
shear force “Fz” superimposed on the bending moment “My” in the
graph in the top window.
10 Right-click on the graph in the top window and click Diagrams… from the
pop-up window.
11 Leave Bending yy selected, but disable Bending zz and activate Shear zz.
Note: Note that the color swatches indicate the colors that will be used to plot
the selected graphs. To change the colors that will be used, click on the
swatches to open color palettes for each of the two selected forces, and
choose colors from the palettes as demonstrated earlier.
12 Click OK.
Note: Although both the shear and moment diagrams are being graphed, it
may be necessary to adjust the unit scales to perfect the appearance of
the diagram. Sometimes the appearance of a graph can be improved by
changing the force units used to plot the diagram.
13 If necessary, change the units for the moment graph by clicking Tools > Set
Current Display Unit.... Then click the Force Units option and set the
moment units to kip-ft {N-m}.

Verifying the Results

Before exploring any more features for displaying tables, diagrams, etc., let's take
a few minutes to examine some of the results from the steel design project to
verify that they make sense. This is an opportunity to confirm that the output
from the program is as expected, based on the input provided: geometry,
member properties, beta angles, member specifications, etc.
 Exercise: Verify the Results

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still open, and the Post
Processing Mode is still active.
2 Click the Beam tab and Forces sub-tab in the Page Control.
3 Click the left-hand column of the structure (member #35). The
corresponding row in the Beam End Forces table is highlighted.
4 Set the units for Force to kips {kN} and for Moment to kip-ft {kN-m}, with
three decimal places, in order to validate the results.
Hint: Click Tools > Set Current Display Unit… in the Menu Bar, then select the
Force Units option.
5 Refer to the Beam End Forces table, and look at the results for member 35,
for Fx, Load Case 1 DEAD LOAD.
Note: The forces at nodes 15 and 20 are not equal and opposite. This relates
back to that fact that the load case under consideration is the self-
weight of the structure, and also that the force under consideration is
the axial force in a vertically-oriented member. The difference between
the two forces is due to the self-weight of the column.
6 Click the right-hand column with the Beams Cursor.
7 Determine which node is at the top of the column and which is at the
bottom using only the Beam End Forces table.
Note: Recall that the support at the bottom of the right-hand column is a
pinned support. The node at the bottom of the column will be the one
at which there is no moment. Therefore node 11 must be the bottom
node.
Hint: Another way to distinguish the top node from the bottom using only the
Beam End Forces table would be to compare the Fx (axial) forces for the
self-weight case as described above.

8 Click the left-most member of the bottom chord of the truss. The left end
of this member is pinned.
9 Determine which node is at the left end of the member and which is at the
right using only the Beam End Forces table again.
Note: Because the left end of this member is pinned, the moment at that end
will be zero. Node 14 indicates at least some non-zero moments,
therefore node 15, for which the moment is always zero, must be the
node at the left end of the member.
10 Verify by double-clicking this member (beam number 22) to open the
Member Query dialog.
Note: The Releases category indicates releases for MX, MY, and MZ for the
Start node (which we already know to be the node at the left end). The
table of coordinates in the center of the dialog always lists beam nodes
in order; starting node in the first line, ending node in the second line.
The starting node is node 15. Therefore, node 15 is the left node.
Hint: This could also be confirmed just by observing that node 15 is the left-
hand node based on the X-Coord values in the table, too. This is a good
way to verify that the program is giving the results we expect.
11 Click member number 1, which is just to the right of mid-span in the
bottom chord of the truss.
Note: The Beam End Forces table indicates that this member has moments
acting about its local-y axis, where other nearby members have
moments acting about their local-z axis. The reason relates back to the
fact that member number 1 was assigned a beta angle of 90 for the
purpose of seeing how it affected the results.
12 Press Shift + O to turn on Beam Orientation.
Note: Most of the bottom chord members are oriented such that their local z-
axes (green arrows) are parallel to the global Z axis. However, member
number 1 is unique, because its local y-axis (red arrow) is parallel to the
global Z axis. It now makes sense that vertical forces caused by member
self-weight or applied live load cause bending about the local y-axis of
member number 1 due to its beta angle.

Viewing Results with Member Query

The Member Query function provides a powerful way to view results for
individual members. Member Query is accessed by:
• Double-clicking on a member of interest, OR
• Selecting the member of interest on the structure diagram in the Main
Window, and then clicking Tools > Query > Member.
Now that an analysis has been performed, the Member Query dialog is populated
with more information than just the original geometry and property data.
Analysis results are now available in the Member Query dialog through two new
tabs: Shear Bending and Deflection.
The Shear Bending tab displays one of four available types of diagrams:
• Bending about local z axis
• Bending about local y axis
• Shear force along the local y axis
• Shear force along the local z axis
The Deflection tab provides the ability to select the load and to specify a point of
interest by its distance from the starting end. A table of displacement results is
provided in the form of displacement versus distance from the starting end.
Note: The Member Query dialog is modeless, meaning that it can be left open and its
focus can be shifted by double-clicking on another member, at which time it
will display the properties and results of the newly selected member.
 Exercise: View the Results with the Member Query

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still open, and the Post
Processing Mode is still active. The Forces sub-tab of the Beam tab should
currently be active.
2 Double-click on member number 1, the bottom chord member just to the
right of mid-span. The dialog that pops up is the same Member Query that
is available in the Pre Processing (Modeling) mode.
3 Click the Shear Bending tab. This tab provides access to shear and bending
results.
4 Select 2:LIVE LOAD in the Load Case list.

5 Click the Bending-Y radio button in the Selection Type category. The
bending moment diagram is now displayed.
Hint: Based on the beta angle of member number 1, the diagram for bending
about the local y-axis should be meaningful.
The bending moment diagram indicates values of bending moment at
each end, and it provides x coordinates for the two points of inflection.
The Dist field directly above the Selection Type category is linked to the
slider bar below the beam diagram. Both provide a method to enter the
distance from the starting end to a point of interest on the beam.
The value of the shear and bending moment at the location of interest is
displayed in the boxes labeled Fz and My. Note that the labels of these
boxes changes based on the selection made with the radio buttons in the
Selection Type category.
A table of distances vs. member forces is provided in the category labeled
Section Forces. Thirteen distance values divide the beam into twelve
equal-length segments. The corresponding shear and bending moment at
each location is given in the table. The distance values can be edited
within this table, and STAAD.Pro will calculate the shear and bending at
the distances entered.
6 Click on the Deflection tab in the Member Query dialog.
Note: The Deflection tab provides access to deflection diagrams and data, and
the operation is very similar to the Shear Bending tab.
7 Select 2:LIVE LOAD in the Load Case list.
8 Select the Global Deflection and Y Dir radio buttons in the Selection Type
category. The diagram indicates downward deflection at each endpoint of
the member.
This makes sense based on the uniform distributed Live Load in the global
-Y direction that causes deflection of the truss as a whole. The diagram
also indicates some additional downward deflection near the mid-span of
the member. This represents the deflection of this individual member with
respect to its own endpoints.

9 Select the Local Deflection radio button. The deflection diagram

disappears.
This makes sense, because the direction is still set to Y Dir. Due to the beta
angle applied to this member, its local y-axis is perpendicular to the gravity
direction, so 2:Live Load causes no deflection about the member's local y-
axis.
10 Click the Z Dir radio button. The deflection diagram now indicates a
deflected shape that has zero deflection at the endpoints.
This makes sense, because it is specifically a Local Deflection diagram,
meaning that it reports deflections of the selected member as if the
member endpoints had no translation. In other words the horizontal line
in the diagram can be thought of as the straight-line chord that connects
the two endpoints of the member, and the deflected shape is shown with
respect to that straight line. The deflected shape also implies tangents
with nearly zero slope at the two endpoints. This is logical due to the
assumed continuity of member number 1 with the adjacent bottom chord
members.
The diagram lies entirely above the horizontal line. Is this contrary to the
shape of the Global Deflection diagram? The answer lies in the fact that
this diagram is not literally a physical representation of the deflected
member, but rather it is a graph of the deflection in the local z direction.
When interpreted this way, the positive values in the graph imply
deflection in the positive local z direction, which is downward in the
model, so the results are consistent.
A steel design has not yet been performed for this structure, so at present,
the results are based on an analysis of members whose properties have
been explicitly specified. If the program had been requested to perform a
steel design, a tab labeled Steel Design would be displayed in the Member
Query dialog. The Steel Design tab provides access to a page of
information on steel design results for the member including critical load,
Pass/Fail status, design ratio, design code, governing clause, etc. Similarly,
after performing a concrete design, a Concrete Design tab would appear in
the Member Query dialog.
11 Click Close to dismiss the Member Query dialog.
12 Press Shift + O to turn off the Beam Orientation.

Using Structural Tool Tip to View Results
Using Structural Tool Tip to View Results

The Structural Tool Tip, or Bubble Help as it is also called, displays some
information about a member. Once an analysis has been performed on the model,
Structural Tool Tip can be used to display certain analysis results.
 Exercise: Use the Structural Tool Tip to View Results

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is the currently active
model.
Note: The model should still be in the Post Processing mode from the previous
section.
2 Select the Graphs sub-tab of the Beam tab in the Page Control.
3 Activate the Beams Cursor on the Selection toolbar, and hover the cursor
over the column at the left end of the model to see an example of
Structural Tool Tip.
4 Click the View > Structural Tool Tip Options… command on the Menu Bar.
Note: For this exercise, assume the goal is to have member end forces
displayed in the Structural Tool Tip.
5 Click the Beam item under the Tool list in the Tool Tip Options dialog.
6 Click the + (plus) symbol beside the End Forces option in the Options
category to display all of the End Forces options.
7 Activate the End Forces checkbox, the Starting checkbox, and all of the
options within the Starting category.
Note: Toggling the End Forces checkbox automatically toggles the Starting and
Ending checkboxes as well.
8 Click OK.
9 Hover the Beams Cursor over any member. Structural Tool Tip now
includes the member end forces for the currently active load case.

Annotating the Structure Diagram

Before we begin this section, do the following:
1 Post Processor 1.std should be the currently active model.
Note: Post Processing mode should be active and 2:LIVE LOAD should be the
active load case. For this exercise, assume the goal is to display the
nodal displacements on the Structure Diagram.
2 Click the Node tab, and then click the Displacement sub-tab in the Page
Control.
3 Click the Results > Scale… command in the Menu Bar.
4 Activate the Apply Immediately checkbox in the upper right corner of the
Scales tab.
5 Set the Displacement scale to 0.2 inches per foot {20 mm per m} in the
Results Scales category, and then click OK.
Hint: The deflected shape of the model should be more apparent at this scale.
6 Click the Results > View Value… command in the Menu Bar.
The Annotation dialog contains controls for viewing the result values on the
Whole Structure diagram. This Annotation dialog contains four tabs:
• Ranges: used to select which beams and nodes will have their results
displayed
• Beam Results: used to select which types of results will be displayed for beams
• Node: used to select the global directions for which nodal displacements will
be displayed
• Reactions: used to select the degrees of freedom for which reactions will be
displayed
Under the Ranges tab, all the members are selected by default. However, the
Ranges tab can be used to display results for only:
• Members of a certain group
• Members with a given cross sectional property
• Nodes and beams with numbers that fall within a given range

If saved views exist in your model (using View > View Management > Save
View…), the View option is also active, offering the ability to select all members in
a given view for annotation simply by selecting the name of the saved view. The
Ranges tab is almost identical to the Range tab in the Results Setup dialog.
 Exercise: Label the Structure Diagram

1 Still in the Annotation dialog, click the Beam Results tab. Options are
available for showing the values for beam shears, moments, axial forces,
displacements, and combined stresses.
2 Click the Reactions tab. The degrees of freedom for which to view reaction
values can be chosen from this tab.
Note: The Diagram category provides the option to view reactions in tabular
or graphical format. If graphical format is chosen, then scaling controls
are available to adjust the appearance of the graphics.
3 Click the Node tab. Options are available for selecting the global axis
directions or a resultant for which to view node displacement values.
4 Activate the Global Y checkbox, and then click the Annotate button.
5 Click Close to dismiss the Annotation dialog.
Hint: If annotation is not displayed:

• Verify that a Node Displacement diagram is currently being shown.
• Verify that the None radio button has not been selected on the Ranges
tab of the Annotation dialog.
6 Press Shift + N to turn on node numbers.
7 Press Shift + B to turn on beam numbers.
Note: Now that we have decided what to display, let's explore the options we
have to control how things are displayed.
8 Right-click the mouse in the Main Window, and click Labels… from the
pop-up menu.
Note: We have already seen many examples of how the Labels tab can be used
to affect how things are displayed on the screen.
9 Click the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog. This tab can be
used to change any of the colors on the diagrams by clicking the color
swatch for the function.

Hint: By specifying characteristic colors for each type of results available, the
user can establish at-a-glance recognition of what type of results are
being displayed.
Note: Options are available to specify whether the beam forces diagrams are
to be hatched, filled with a solid color, or outlined. Settings such as color
options, current display units and precision are saved in an INI file and
in the Windows Registry. Therefore:
• When one model is closed and another model is opened, the same
settings will be applied to the new file.
• The display settings on one engineer's workstation can be completely
different from the settings on another engineer's workstation, even for
the same STAAD.Pro model.
10 Click the Cancel button to dismiss the Diagrams dialog.
11 Click the View > Options… command in the Menu Bar.
12 Click the Annotation option. This page offers controls that affect the style,
alignment, and font used to display all of the different types of results
annotation that are available.
The Annotation item in the Options dialog (accessed using the View >
Options command) offers controls that affect the style, alignment, and
font used to display all of the different types of results annotation that are
available. In this sense, “results annotation” pertains to the options
offered in the Annotation dialog as described above. It includes things like
reaction, beam shear and moment, and nodal displacement values.
Note: There may be a tendency to try to use Beam Labels and Node Labels to
control the annotation of beam and node results. Instead, remember
that results annotation settings are controlled from a separate tab
within the Options dialog, called the Annotation tab. The separation of
these controls was provided so that font (and related display settings)
could be used to distinguish between results annotation and other
labels on the diagrams.
13 Click the Font button.
14 Choose 18 in the Size category.
15 Click OK in the Font dialog.
16 Click Apply in the Options dialog. The effect is to change the font size used
to display the annotation text, which is currently set to display nodal
displacement in the Global Y direction.

Note: In the upper left corner of the Annotation page is a list labeled Style. The
effect of the two Style settings are to either append a units indicator to
the end of every results value, or to not display the units.
Hint: If the Diagram Info label was turned off in the Labels tab, it might be
helpful to append the units indicator to all results on the screen. On the
other hand, including the units label in the annotation can sometimes
cause the structure diagram to become cluttered with too much
annotation. In this case it might be preferable to turn the Diagram Info
label on, and annotate the structure with the result values only, since
the Diagram Info reports the units.
17 Set the Style to 123.4, and then click OK. The structure diagram now
shows nodal displacement values for deflection in the global Y direction,
and the Diagram Info label indicates that the units are inches
{millimeters}.

Animation
Animation
Animation can be used to dynamically display the movement of the structure due
to forces acting upon it. It can be a very effective way of displaying and checking
the results of an analysis. Animation can often reveal problems with the model.
For example if there is no connection between members at a location where a
connection was intended, this will become immediately apparent when
animation of the deflections is viewed.
 Exercise: View the Animation of the Structure

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is the currently active
model. The Post Processing mode should be active.
2 Select 2: LIVE LOAD in the Active Load list in the View toolbar.
3 Click the Animation tab in the Page Control. The Diagrams dialog opens
with the Animation tab active.
4 Click the Deflection radio button in the Diagram Type category, and then
click the Apply button. The structure diagram is now moving, but the
deflection may not be visible due to the current scale.
5 Click the Scales tab in the Diagrams dialog.
6 Click the Apply Immediately checkbox in the upper right corner of the
dialog.
7 Set the value of the Displacement field to 0.1 inches per foot {8 mm per
m} using the arrows beside the field in the Result Scales category. The
deflection should be easily visible at this scale, but the animation may be
moving too fast to interpret easily.
Hint: To review, the concept with scaling in STAAD.Pro is that the scale can be
thought of as “number of force units or deflection units per scale unit of
length measure on the screen.” Therefore larger scale values result in
smaller graphical deflections on the screen, and vice versa.
8 Click the Animation tab in the Diagrams dialog, and adjust the Target FPS
to 5 frames per second.
Note: This parameter controls the number of frames per second displayed in
the animation, which is a measure of the speed of the animation. The
minimum value of Target FPS is 5, and the maximum value is 99.
9 Click Apply and observe the animation. The structure should now deflect
and return to its original shape more slowly, but the animation is not
smooth.

Animation
10 Set the value of the Extra Frames parameter to 20, and then click the
Apply button. This should make the animation appear more fluid and
smooth, while slowing the animation as well.
Note: Including additional frames in the animation can make the animation
considerably smoother. The maximum number of Extra Frames is 99.
Note: In the current animation, both columns are rotating as rigid bodies,
showing no deformation along their lengths.
11 Click the Section Displacement radio button in the Diagram Type
category, and then click OK.
Note: Now note the difference in the appearance of the deformed columns.
The column on the left displays reverse curvature due to the fact that it
was modeled as being fixed at the support, and because there is
continuity between the top of the column and the top chord member.
The column on the right displays single curvature because it is pinned at
the support but there is continuity between the top of the column and
the top and bottom chord members.
12 To stop the animation, press the <esc> key.
Hint: To reopen the Animation tab, do one of the following:

• Click again on the Animation tab in the Page Control.
• Right-click in the Main Window, select Structure Diagrams… from the
pop-up menu, and then click on the Animation tab in the Diagrams
dialog.
• Pull down the Results menu and select the Animation… command.
Using this method, note the icon that looks like a television set to the
left of the Animation command.
• Select the Animation icon on the Results toolbar.

Plotting Output from STAAD.Pro
Plotting Output from STAAD.Pro

STAAD.Pro offers a variety of options for plotting output. These different options
are explored in detail in a different module, but the following is a brief list of the
plotting options that are available.
• The Print Current View icon is available from the Print toolbar.
• The Print Preview Current View icon is also available from the Print toolbar.
• The Take Picture icon is available from the Print toolbar.
Note: When images are captured with the Take Picture icon, they can be
incorporated into printed output through the Report Setup icon, which
is accessible from the Print toolbar as shown below.
• The Export View icon, also available on the Print toolbar, provides the ability
to export a view or the screen to a graphic image file.
• The Copy Picture option is available from the Edit item in the Menu Bar.

Simple Query
Note: Graphic images captured using the Copy Picture option can be pasted
into a program capable of handling graphics such as Microsoft Paint,
Adobe Photoshop, etc.
• The “Print Screen” key or “Shift-Print Screen”, depending on the keyboard
configuration, can be used.
Note: Images captured this way will be copied to the Windows clipboard,
where they can then be pasted into another graphics program.
Simple Query
STAAD.Pro has a tool called Simple Query that can be used to search the results
for very specific information, such as results that meet a combination of specified
criteria. The search results can also be saved so they will be available later if the
Report Setup facility is used to prepare a report.
Note: Report Setup is discussed in detail in another module.
 Exercise: Perform a Simple Query

1 Ensure that the file named Post Processor 1.std is still the current model
and that the Post Processing Mode is active.
Note: To demonstrate the use of the Simple Query feature, let's assume that
the goal is to study vertical deflections of the truss and to identify any
nodes along the bottom chord that deflect 1/2 inch {12 mm} or more
under load condition 4, the combination of dead, live, and wind loads.
2 Select the nodes along the bottom chord.
Hint: See the commentary below for some options.

• Choose the Nodes Cursor, and to use the point and click method to
select each node individually while holding down the Control (Ctrl) key,
OR
• View the model from the +Z or -Z direction, and then drag a fence
around the bottom chord with the Nodes Cursor.
3 Click the Menu Bar item Tools > SQL Query > Simple Query.
4 Click the New Query button.

Simple Query
Note: Queries consist of logical or conditional statements that filter for desired
information.
5 Click on the arrow in the Select Table Type list to see the different types of
tables that can be searched with the Simple Query tool.
6 Select Node Tables from the list.
Note: This controls what tables will be available to choose from when
developing the conditional statement.
7 Click the Node Displacements checkbox.
Note: This identifies the specific table that will be used to develop the
conditional statement. The checkboxes listed below Node
Displacements represent the individual fields that are in the Node
Displacements table.
8 Click the checkboxes to select Node No., Load Case, and Y Displacement.
Note: This identifies which fields will be included in the results of the query. By
default, if no checkboxes are selected, all fields in the table will be
included in the results.
9 Click the radio button labeled Where, under the Select Condition category.
Note: Several more options are now activated in the Select Condition category.
10 Choose the Load Case option in the Select Field list.
11 Choose the = (equals) symbol in the Operator list.
12 Enter a value of 4 in the Value field.
13 Click the double-right-arrow button to the right of the Value field.
14 Select the AND command from the pop-up menu.
Note: The Select Field, Operator and Value options will be cleared to allow
another conditional statement to be entered.
15 Select the Y Displacement option in the Select Field list.
16 Choose the <= (less than or equal to) symbol in the Operator list.
17 Enter a value of -0.5 {-0.012} in the Value field, and then click the Done
button.

Simple Query
Note: Note the need to use the negative value here, because of the sign
convention used on downward displacements in the model. Also note
that the default units for displacement in the Simple Query dialog are
inches {meters}, because this is how the data is saved in the internal
data tables.
Note: The Select Table and Fields and the Select Condition categories are now
grayed out, indicating that they are no longer active.
18 Click the radio button for Selected Node No. in the Query for category.
Note: This indicates that STAAD.Pro is only to consider the currently selected
nodes as it processes the query. Currently, the only nodes that are
selected are those in the bottom chord of the truss.
19 Click the OK button. The query now appears under the Query Statement
category in what is known as SEQUEL syntax.
Note: The Query Statement could be edited manually at this point if necessary.
Even without knowing SEQUEL syntax, it is easy to modify the query by
changing the node numbers, displacement values, logical operators,
etc…
20 Click the Execute Query button.
Note: STAAD.Pro runs the query and displays the results in a table in the Query
Result section. The results indicate that several nodes (1, 2, 3, 4, 12, 13
and 14) all experienced downward vertical deflections of 1/2 inch {12
mm} or more under load condition 4.
Hint: STAAD.Pro allows both a query and the query results to be saved.
Depending on the stage of design, if there is reason to think that
analysis results are likely to change, it might be wise to save the query,
so it could be rerun at a later date.
21 Click the Save Query button.
22 Edit the title to read Deflections One-Half Inch or Greater {Deflections 12
mm or Greater}, and then click OK. The saved query name now appears in
the Query List on the left side of the Simple Query dialog. It will be
available to rerun at any time in the future.
23 Click the Save Query Result button to save a copy of the results just
produced by this query.

Simple Query
24 Enter Bottom Chord Deflections in the Title field. The text entered in the
Title field will appear as a title at the top of the query results if the results
are printed in a report.
Note: The Save Report checkbox will be toggled on by default. If it is toggled

off, the query results will not be available after the program is closed
and reopened at a later date.
25 Revise the Id to read Bot Chord.
Note: The Id is used to assist in identifying the query results if they are to be
incorporated into a report.
26 Click the OK button.
Note: The program saves the query result, and it will appear in a list of
available report items if the Report Setup facility is used to prepare and
print a report. Note that in order to save query results, the query itself
must be saved first.
27 Click the Close button to dismiss the Simple Query dialog.
28 Click the Menu Bar item File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not
necessary to save a copy of this file.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 In STAAD.Pro, what are two ways to quick determine if analysis results are
available in a model?
2 When in the Post Processor, a displacement diagram is displayed in the
Main Window while the Node tab, Displacement sub-tab is active. If the
deflection diagram appears to be superimposed directly on top of the
structure without any apparent deflection, how should the diagram be
scaled to be able to view an exaggerated deflected shape?
• The Displacement scale should be increased in the Scales tab in the
Diagrams dialog.
• The Displacement scale should be decreased in the Scales tab in the
Diagrams dialog.
3 In the STAAD.Pro Post Processor, force and moment diagrams for
individual members are available.
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 In STAAD.Pro, what are two ways to quick determine if analysis results are
available in a model?
• STAAD Output icon on the File toolbar: If the icon is “grayed out,”
current results are not available.
• Mode menu: If the Post Processing menu option is “gray out,” current
results are not available.
If results are not available, it could either be because an analysis has not
been performed yet or because the model has been changed since the last
analysis was run, making the previous results invalid. In an analysis had
been run, but the Post Processor is still not available, it could be because
errors were encountered during the analysis or discrepancies exist
between the input file and the output results.
2 When in the Post Processor, a displacement diagram is displayed in the
Main Window while the Node tab, Displacement sub-tab is active. If the
deflection diagram appears to be superimposed directly on top of the
structure without any apparent deflection, how should the diagram be
scaled to be able to view an exaggerated deflected shape?
The Displacement scale should be decreased in the Scales tab in the
Diagrams dialog.
A setting of 12 means that for every 12 inches {12 mm} of calculated
displacement due to the current load case, STAAD.Pro will plot it as a scale
of 1 foot {1 meter} on the diagram. When thought of this way, it is more
intuitive to decrease the scale to emphasize the deflection.
3 In the STAAD.Pro Post Processor, force and moment diagrams for
individual members are available.
True
In the Post Processor, when the Beam tab, Graphs sub-tab of the Page
Control is active, force and moment diagrams for individual members of
the structure can be displayed for the following:
• Bending about the local Y axis or Z axis
• Torsion
• Stress
• Shear about the local Y axis or Z axis
• Axial

Steel Design
Module Overview
STAAD.Pro offers to option to perform code checking of steel members for a wide
selection of steel design codes. Member selection can also be performed in
accordance with these codes. This module discusses both steel design options.
• Knowledge of general structural engineering principles, specifically steel
design concepts
STAAD.Pro
• Familiarity with the basic Post Processing functions in STAAD.Pro
Module Objectives
• Apply design parameters to members of the structure
• Perform code checking of members using a variety of steel design codes
• Instruct STAAD.Pro to select (design) members to meet code requirements
• Apply techniques to optimize the design of steel members
May-10 245 Steel Design

Questions
1 Can STAAD.Pro design members, or will it just perform a code check for
user-provided member sizes?
2 Is STAAD.Pro limited to a small number of codes for which to perform steel
design?
• Yes
• No
Steel Design 246 May-10

Answers
1 Can STAAD.Pro design members, or will it just perform a code check for
user-provided member sizes?
Both
STAAD.Pro can select members for you, and has the ability to optimize
these selections.
2 Is STAAD.Pro limited to a small number of codes for which to perform steel
design?
No
STAAD.Pro can perform steel design for numerous international codes and
standards. However, additional licenses may be required in order to access
the design features of all of these codes.

Introduction to STAAD.Pro Steel Design
Introduction to STAAD.Pro Steel Design

Steel design in STAAD.Pro involves two basic kinds of activities:
• Code Checking
• Member Selection
Check Code is a request to determine if the member properties that the user has
provided are adequate to carry the forces that are applied to the members. One
application for Check Code is in situations where existing construction is being
evaluated. If the Code Check finds members that are inadequate, you will be
responsible for finding a new set of members to replace the inadequate ones.
By contrast, Member Selection is a request to have STAAD.Pro indicate the

minimum weight cross section that is sufficient to carry the design loads safely. In
a Member Selection, STAAD.Pro finds the lightest acceptable section while
incorporating any specified constraints, such as minimum depth or sections of a
particular size category. This means that if, for example, STAAD.Pro is restricted to
choose from among W12 sections, it will not look for any W8 sections that might
be sufficient. Additionally, STAAD.Pro only considers sections that have the same
cross sectional shape as the initial member. For example, if a member is initially
specified as an angle, only other angle shapes are considered when the selection
routine is run. The optimization process is as follows:
• The actual optimization process starts with the lightest possible section within
the specified constraints, and verifies whether or not that section is adequate.
• If it is not adequate, the program checks the next heavier section and keeps
going until it finds the first one that satisfies the code requirements within any
specified constraints.
• If it is unable to find any section that satisfies both the specified constraints
and the code requirements, the program reports the last section tried, and
the results of that check, including why that section fails the code check.
The sequence of commands for performing a Check Code and those for
performing a Member Selection are similar.

Specifying the Design Code
Specifying the Design Code

The model to be used in this module has been constructed and loaded using the
STAAD.Pro Pre Processor. Preliminary member sizes have been assigned, and the
model is prepared for the design/code checking process.
The commands related to design and code checking will be added to the input file
in the modeling mode of the program.
Before adding these commands, let's first introduce an additional command that
is quite useful in certain situations: the Load List command.
 Exercise: Specifying the Load List Command

1 Open the dataset file named Steel Design 1.std.
This model contains three primary load cases: Dead, Live, and Wind. A
fourth load case is a load combination case: LC1 + LC2 + LC3.
It is common to consider only load combinations, instead of the primary
load cases, when performing member design or code checking operations.
In this example, we use the Load List command to instruct STAAD.Pro to
consider only Load Case 4 when performing the design and code check
operations.
2 Select Commands > Loading > Load List.
3 In the Load Cases window of the Load List dialog, select 4: LC1 + LC2 + LC3.
4 Move this load to the Load List window by selecting the single right arrow
button. Click OK.
Load Case 4 is now the only load case considered for any commands that
are issued hereafter, until another Load List command is issued.
5 View the Input file, and note that the command LOAD LIST 4 has been
added at the end of the file, just above the FINISH command. Close the
STAAD Editor.

Steel Design Parameters
Hint: The Load List command can be used to differentiate between unfactored
and factored load combinations within a model. To do this, a Load List
command can be used to select the unfactored load combinations in
order to print support reactions for foundation design. Then, a second
Load List command can be used to select the factored load
combinations for use in member design or code checking using LRFD
procedures.
 Exercise: Specifying the Design Code

1 With the file Steel Design 1.std still open, click the Design tab at the
bottom of the Page Control to activate the Design page.
Five sub-tabs labeled Steel, Concrete, Timber, Aluminum, and Shearwall
now appear in the Page Control area.
The Steel sub-tab is active by default. In the Data Area, the Steel Design -
Whole Structure dialog is displayed. This dialog box will be referred to
from here on as simply the Steel Design dialog.
2 Click the Current Code list at the top of the Steel Design dialog to view the
available codes for steel design.
STAAD.Pro offers the choice of designing using many different codes from
numerous countries, some of which require specific licenses.
3 Select the AISC 360-05 code.
4 Leave the model open for the next exercise.

In the lower portion of the Steel Design dialog, note the three buttons labeled
Select Parameters, Define Parameters and Commands. Clicking the Define
Parameters button opens the Design Parameters dialog. The category window on
the left side of this dialog lists all of the available design parameters from which to
choose.
This dialog is used to specify values for the different design parameters. The
parameters listed are those that are referenced in the various sections of the
currently selected design code.
All of the parameters are initially set to default values. In the absence of any other
instruction, STAAD.Pro will use the default values shown.

Yield Strength
One common example of the use of parameters is to correctly set the yield
strength of the different members in the model. You will do this in the exercise
following this discussion.
Slenderness Checking
Some other commonly used parameters are the ones which affect slenderness
checking; that is the Kl/r ratio. In the Kl/r ratio, the definitions are as follows:
• The effective length factor, K, addresses the end conditions of the columns.
• The unsupported length, l, represents the distance between two points at
which the member is braced against lateral buckling.
• The radius of gyration, r, is a property of the cross section, expressed as the
square root of the moment of inertia divided by the area.
r = ---I-
A
Since r is a function of the member cross section, it is available to STAAD.Pro from

the section database, and thus, is not a user-input value. However, you do have
influence over the values used for K and l.
For buckling about the Y-axis, the parameter names are Ky and Ly; for buckling
about the Z-axis, they are called Kz and Lz.
In the absence of any user input, the K values are assigned a default value of 1.0
and the L values are assigned to be equal to the node-to-node member length. It
is up to you to assign the correct K and L values to the members.
For example, the columns supporting the truss in the current model might
actually be braced by wall girts at intermediate points, in which case, the value for
L could be smaller than the overall length of the member.
It is important that you understand the system of bracing in the model. For
example, a member that is braced at a point against buckling in one plane may
not necessarily be braced for buckling in the orthogonal plane at that point.
Under these conditions, it may be necessary to modify the default value of 1.0 for
K in one of the directions. The columns in the figure below illustrate an example
of the condition where it is likely that the product of KyLy would be significantly
different than the product of KzLz.

STAAD.Pro has a third parameter called Kx which affects the slenderness

calculation for Flexural Torsional Buckling (failure by twisting). A similar set of
parameters affects the capacities in bending by specifying unbraced lengths for
bending members.
Under normal conditions, when a beam bends, one flange is in tension, the other
in compression. Compression flanges can buckle, either local buckling or lateral
torsional buckling, between points of bracing. Two parameters called UNT and
UNB are used to define these unbraced lengths for bending. UNT is the unbraced
length for the top flange of the beam, and UNB is the unbraced length for the
bottom flange.
“Top flange” and “bottom flange” are defined with reference to the orientation of
the member’s local axis system. The flange in the positive local-y direction is the
top flange; the flange in the negative direction is the bottom flange.

There may be instances where the top flange of a wide flange beam is braced by a
deck or slab of some type, precluding any kind of buckling of the top flange;
whereas, the bottom flange may be supported at discrete distances.
Under this condition, the unsupported length for the top flange will be one value,
and the unsupported length for the bottom flange will be another value.
These parameters require the application of engineering judgment.
Deflection Checking
Parameters can also be applied to assist with deflection checking. The deflection
limits in most codes are considered serviceability requirements as opposed to
strength or life safety requirements.
For this reason, deflections are not automatically investigated when the Check
Code or Member Selection commands are used. To specifically instruct STAAD.Pro
to perform deflection checking, the variables Dff, Dj1 and Dj2 can be specified.
In the case of the current steel design example, STAAD.Pro needs input from the
user as to what to consider as the “length” of the top and bottom chords of the
truss, if a deflection check is to be performed. It can’t determine the length
automatically, because those structural elements are represented by a series of
individual member segments connected at nodes.
The details of all of these parameters are explained in Chapter 2 of the Technical
Reference manual. There are also several examples in the Examples manual that
illustrate the use of parameters to control the design.

Using the Select Parameters Button

Select Parameters is a convenient feature to help configure the display to
individual preferences. It does not control any type of program function; rather, it
offers control over which parameters are displayed in the Design Parameters
dialog.
The Parameter Selection dialog is divided into two sides: Available Parameters and
Selected Parameters. Items can be moved between the two sides by using the left
and right arrow and double-arrow buttons that are familiar from other similar
selection dialogs in STAAD.Pro.
To reduce the number of parameters listed in the Design Parameters dialog, the
Parameter Selection dialog can be used to remove any parameters that will not be
used in the current model. Only parameters that are in the Selected Parameters
list will be listed in the Design Parameters dialog and will be accessible for use in
the model. This makes it more convenient to locate the parameters that will be
used on a regular basis.
The example problem will make use of just a few parameters for illustration
purposes.
 Exercise: Selecting Specific Parameters to include in the Steel Design Model

1 With Steel Design 1.std still open, verify that the current input units are
set to kip and inches. If not, set the current input units to these values.
2 Click the Define Parameters button at the bottom of the Steel Design
dialog.
The Design Parameters dialog opens. On the left of the dialog is a list of all
of the parameters that are available for the selected design code.
On the right side of the dialog is a description of the currently selected
parameter as well as a field to enter the desired value for that parameter.
Note that the default value for the parameter is currently shown in this
field.
3 Note the number of parameters currently shown in the list on the left,
then click Close to dismiss the Design Parameters dialog for now.
4 Click the Select Parameters button.

5 In the Parameter Selection dialog, click the double-left arrow to move all
parameters from the Selected Parameters window to the Available
Parameters window.
6 Press and hold down the CTRL key. Select FYLD, Method, and Track in the
Available Parameters window, and click the single-right arrow to move
them back to the Selected Parameters window.
7 Click OK to close the dialog.

8 Click the Define Parameters button once again.
The list of available parameters is now reduced to the parameters that
were just selected.
9 Keep the Design Parameters dialog open for the next exercise.
Defining Parameters
The next exercise demonstrates how to define the values for the parameters and
include them in the model.
 Exercise: Defining Specific Parameters for the Steel Design Model

1 In the Design Parameters dialog, select FYLD in the short list of
parameters. Note that the default value for this parameter is 36 kip/in2.
The model contains the steel sections, and associated yield strength,
shown in the following table.
Member Section Fy
Columns W Shape: W18X35 50 ksi
Bottom Chord Channel: C12X30 36 ksi
Top Chord HSS Rectangle: HSST7X4X0.188 46 ksi
Webs Angle: L30308 36 ksi
2 Enter 50 in the Yield strength of steel field and click Add.

Some new lines are added to the input file, and can be seen in the
Command Tree in the Steel Design dialog.

The new lines include the units change to UNIT INCHES KIP, the reference
to the selected AISC code, and a line referring to FYLD 50 with a question
mark icon.
The question mark icon indicates that this particular parameter has not
yet been assigned to any members.
3 Enter 46 in the Yield strength of steel field and click Add.
Note: It is not necessary to add a value of 36 in the Yield strength of steel field
for the channel and angle sections. Since this is the default STAAD.Pro
value, it will be assigned to those members automatically absent any
instructions to the contrary.
4 Select the METHOD parameter.
The American AISC 360-05 code allows either the LRFD or the ASD design
method to be used.
5 Select ASD from the list, and click Add.
6 Select the Track parameter.
The Track parameter is used to control the amount of detail that is printed
in the design section of the output file.
7 Click the radio button corresponding to level 1 and then click Add.
8 Click the Close button.
Note that all of these new lines have been added to the end of the input
file by default.
Hint: If there is a need to insert a parameter at a location other than the

default end-of-file location, you can do this using the After Current
checkbox as described in the commentary below.
• First, click on the line in the Command Tree that immediately precedes
the desired insertion point of the new command.
• Next, use the Design Parameters dialog box to select the new
parameter and set its value.
• Finally, click the After Current checkbox in the Design Parameters
dialog box and click Add or Assign.
Hint: The newly added parameter should appear in the Command Tree
immediately after the currently selected command.

Assigning Parameters to the Steel Design Model

The question marks displayed to the left of some of the parameters in the
Command Tree in the Steel Design dialog indicate that those parameters have not
yet been assigned to any members in the model. If the model was analyzed at this
point, the parameters with the question marks would have no influence on the
model. In fact, those lines get skipped, and don't even get saved in the input file.
To make use of these parameters, they must be Assigned to the members to

which they apply.
 Exercise: Assigning Parameters to Members

1 In the Command Tree in the Steel Design dialog, select FYLD 50.
This parameter applies to wide flange members, which are the columns in
the model.
2 In the Menu Bar, click Select > By Group Name...
3 In the Select Groups dialog, highlight _COL and then click Close.
4 Confirm that the Assignment Method has automatically changed to Assign
To Selected Beams. Click Assign.
The question mark corresponding to the FYLD 50 parameter is replaced
with a green check mark in the Command Tree, indicating that this
parameter has been assigned to at least one member.
6 Click in a blank area of the Main Window to deselect all members.
7 Repeat the previous procedure to assign the FYLD 46 parameter to the
_TOPC group.
FYLD 46 applies to tube members, which are the top chord members in
the model.
8 Click in a blank area of the Main Window to deselect all members.
Note: The METHOD ASD item already has a green check mark. This indicates
that this parameter was automatically assigned to every member of the
model and no further assignment is necessary for this parameter.
9 Select the TRACK 1 item in the Command Tree list.
Finally, the Track parameter is to be assigned to all members in the
structure.

10 Click the Assign To View radio button in the Assignment Method group.
Click the Assign button.
All the members in the structure are highlighted and the yellow question
mark to the left of the TRACK item changes to a green check mark,
indicating that the TRACK design parameter has been assigned.
12 Notice the checkbox labeled Highlight Assigned Geometry immediately
below the Command Tree in the Steel Design dialog.
This is a useful option for checking that items, such as parameters and
properties, have actually been assigned to the intended members.
13 Make sure the Highlight Assigned Geometry checkbox is toggled on, and
then click on FYLD 50 and FYLD 46 in succession.
The member geometry is highlighted appropriately as the different
parameters are selected in the Command Tree.
14 Click File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save this
file.

Code Checking
Code Checking
Now that design parameters have been assigned to the model, the Check Code
command can be used to determine if the members are adequate to carry the
applied forces.
Warning: Remember, if the Code Check finds members that are inadequate, you will
be responsible for finding a new set of members to replace the inadequate
ones.
Performing the Code Check

 Exercise: Using the Check Code Command
2 Click the Design tab in the Page Control.
Assume the intent is to do a code check for all of the members in the
structure.
3 Use any convenient method to select All Beams in the model.
4 Click the Commands… button in the lower portion of the Steel Design
dialog. This opens the Design Commands dialog.
The CHECK CODE item is currently active in this dialog. The Assign button
is now available, because members are currently selected in the Main
Window.
Hint: The Assign button is convenient because it adds the currently selected
command to the command list, while simultaneously assigning it to all
of the currently selected members. The Assign button would not have
been available if the members had not been selected first; this behavior
is typical of many dialog boxes in STAAD.Pro. For these reasons, it is
good practice to select the members to be operated on first, and then
perform the operation.
5 Click the Assign button to add the Check Code command to the command
list and simultaneously assign it to all the members in the model.
6 Click the Close button to dismiss the Design Commands dialog.
7 Click Analyze > Run Analysis….
8 Click Save in the confirmation dialog that pops up.
9 Leave the STAAD Analysis and Design dialog open for the next section.

Code Checking
Reviewing the STAAD Analysis Messages

There are now some messages in the STAAD Analysis and Design dialog indicating
additional operations that were performed, like Performing Steel Design, Finished
Design, Creating Design Information File (DGN), and so forth.
The indications that the run was successful are:

• The message **Output Written to File.
• The presence of an option to Go to Post Processing Mode.
• The absence of any error messages at the bottom of the STAAD Analysis and
Design dialog.
If the program is ever unsuccessful in analyzing the input file and generating
results, the Post Processing mode will not be available, as shown below.

Code Checking
The program may also display a message such as “ERROR in Analysis, check
Output (ANL) File” if the analysis concludes prematurely, without generating any
results.
If this ever occurs, open the output file and look for error and/or warning
messages that will help to locate the problem.
The STAAD Output Viewer has two panes. If there is any kind of problem in the
file, the left pane will display horizontal bars labeled Error or Warning.
There may also be a Results bar if the program was able to proceed through the
analysis far enough to generate some results.
There are two types of messages: error messages and warning messages. An error
message indicates a condition which must be corrected in order for a successful
analysis to be performed. A Warning message indicates that the program
encountered an unexpected or abnormal condition, but it was still able to
perform an analysis while warning that the output results should be checked
carefully.
 Exercise: Viewing the Analysis Results

1 Click the View Output File radio button in the lower left corner of the
STAAD Analysis and Design dialog, then click Done.
The STAAD Output Viewer opens with the Results bar at the top of the left
pane.
2 Click on the STEEL DESIGN item under the RESULTS bar.

Code Checking
This is a link directly to the beginning of the steel design results in the
output file. The output appears as shown in the figure below.
3 Review the Steel Design Results and note the following:

• CODE: The first line in the results says STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING -
(AISC-360-05ASD) which indicates the design code selected.
• UNITS: The next line indicates the units that are being used to report
the results.
The results of the code check are reported in the table for each member in
the model. The level of detail shown in this table is a function of the Track
parameter. Each of the columns, other than MEMBER or TABLE, reports
two pieces of data. The column headings provide the key to determining
what the data represents.

Code Checking
From left to right, the columns and results for Member 1 are as described
below.
• MEMBER: Displays the member number. The ST notation indicates that
it is a standard section, as opposed to a user defined section.
• TABLE: Lists the name of the cross section (a C12X30 channel in the
case of Member 1).
• RESULT: Provides the overall design result for the member in PASS/FAIL
format. In this case the member fails.
• CRITICAL COND: Reports the code reference to the expression that
produces the highest ratio for the member. In this example, the Critical
Condition is created by Clause H1/2 (axial force plus bending) in AISC
360-05.
• RATIO: Provides the controlling utilization ratio for the member (this is
essentially a demand/capacity ratio). In this case, RATIO is the term on
the left-hand side of AISC 360-05 equation H1-1a or H1-1b.
• LOADING: Indicates the Load Case that produced the controlling ratio.
• FX (directly beneath RESULT): Indicates the axial force in the member
under the controlling Load Case. In this case, it is a tensile force,
indicated by the “T” after the force magnitude. Note that this is not
necessarily the largest axial force, just the axial force associated with
the load case indicated in the LOADING column.
• MY AND MZ: Indicate the bending moments about the local y- and
local z-axes, respectively, that are associated with the load case
indicated in the LOADING column.
• LOCATION: Provides the location along the beam where the RATIO is
the highest. In this case the value is 0.00, indicating that the critical
loading takes place at the starting node of the member.
Note the asterisk beside member 1. This is actually a graphical flag used to
denote members that fail the code check. Recall the following about
Member 1:
• Member 1 is the only member in the model with a beta angle equal to
90 degrees.
• The model is a planar structure with no out-of-plane forces acting on
it.
• The local y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Z-axis, because the
beta angle is 90 degrees. Based on the applied gravity loading, we
would expect bending to take place about this member's local y-axis.

Code Checking
• We would expect no bending about Member 1's local z-axis, since no

out-of-plane forces are acting on the structure.
For the remaining members, we would expect that bending will take place
about their local z-axes since their local z-axes are oriented parallel to the
global Z-axis, and we expect no out-of-plane bending to take place about
their local y-axes.
The box below the table data provides some additional information
regarding member slenderness checks and capacities.
Checking Steel Design Results

In lieu of scanning through output file line by line, there are other facilities
available for checking steel design results:
• Searching the Output file for Failed members
• Using the Unity Check Page in the Post Processor
• Searching for Failed members with the Select > By Specification command
• Using the Member Query feature
 Exercise: Searching the Output File for Failed Members

1 Ensure that the file Steel Design 2.std still open. An analysis has been
completed on this model.
2 Click the Find icon in the toolbar in the upper left corner of the STAAD
Output Viewer (it looks like a pair of binoculars).
Hint: Another way to open the Search dialog is to pull down the viewer's Edit
menu and select the Find command, or use the keyboard shortcut
Control (Ctrl) + F.
3 Type the word Fail into the Find What field at the top of the dialog, then
click the Find Next button.
The viewer moves to the first instance of the word “Fail” in the output file
and highlights it. If the search does not find any instance of the word “Fail”
in the output file, the message, “SproView has finished searching” is
displayed.

Code Checking
Note: In the Output File, a member fails when its Unity Check value exceeds
1.0 multiplied by the value of the RATIO parameter and multiplied by
the value of the OVR parameter (available in some codes), both of
whose default values are 1.0.
4 Continue to click the Find Next button to find successive occurrences of
the word “Fail”.
Hint: From the current cursor location, the direction of the search can be
specified in the Direction category as either Up or Down.
5 Click Cancel to dismiss the Search dialog.
6 Click File > Exit in the STAAD Output Viewer.
 Exercise: Observing Design Results on the Post Processor Unity Check Page
completed on this model, and STAAD.Pro should be in the Modeling
Mode.
2 Select Mode > Post Processing.
3 Click OK in the Results Setup dialog to display results for all load cases.
4 Click the Beam tab in the Page Control.
5 Click the Unity Check sub-tab.
Note: The Unity Check page was not present until the Check Code command
was added.
The members in the structure diagram will be color coded and annotated
with their controlling ratio values, and the ratios will also appear in the
Design Results table in the Data Area.
6 Right-click the mouse in the Main Window, and then click Structure
Diagrams… from the pop-up menu.
7 Click the Design Results tab in the Diagrams dialog.
The Design Results tab provides a way to adjust the color-coding of
members based on the value of their design ratio.
Radio buttons allow the user to choose between basing the diagram on
Actual Ratios or Normalized Ratios. (The Normalized Ratio is calculated by
dividing the Actual Ratio by the specified value of the RATIO parameter.)
8 Click the Show Diagram (Based on Actual Ratio) radio button.
The next set of radio buttons allows a choice between a Basic Diagram and
a Detailed Diagram.

Code Checking
9 Click the Basic Diagram radio button.

In the Basic Diagram option:
• Members are displayed in 4 distinct colors to indicate Not Designed,
Pass, Fail, or Extreme Failure.
• Colors can be changed if desired by double-clicking on them.
• The default values define Pass as a ratio less than 1, Fail if the ratio is
between 1 and 1.5, and Extreme Fail if the ratio is greater than 1.5.
These ranges can be customized as desired.
It is important to understand that the categories of Pass and Fail on this
diagram can be set to have different ranges of values than those used in
the calculation engine during the steel design process.
In the calculation engine, a Fail status will be reported on any member
whose Unity Check value exceeds 1.0 multiplied by the value of the RATIO
parameter and multiplied by the OVR parameter (both of whose default
values are 1.0).
Note: The value used to define failure in the Basic Diagram is also the value
used to define failure if the Select > By Specification > All Failed
Members command is used. This command will be demonstrated in the
next exercise.
10 Click the Detailed Diagram radio button.
In the Detailed Diagram option, ranges of values can be created for
interpreting the design status. By default, the range consists of an equally
distributed set of values between the lowest ratio and the highest ratio.
• The Use Custom Limits checkbox provides a way to create an equally
distributed set of values between a user-defined minimum and
maximum ratio limit.
• The Use Custom Divisions checkbox makes it possible to specify ranges
that are not necessarily equally distributed.
• The colors used to represent the different ranges can be changed as
desired by double-clicking on them.
• In all cases, the scroll box is available for increasing or decreasing the
No. of values (number of color-coded value ranges) that are displayed.
• The Show Values checkbox controls whether or not ratio values appear
on the diagram.
11 Click Cancel in the Diagrams dialog box to return to the Unity Check page.

Code Checking
 Exercise: Searching for Failed Members with the Select > By Specification
Command
2 Click Select > By Specification > All Failed Beams. All of the members
whose unity ratios exceed the user-specified Pass range in the Basic
Diagram setup are now highlighted.
Warning: This procedure warrants a bit of caution. If the input file does not
include any steel design commands, no steel design will be
performed and no steel design results will be generated when the
analysis is performed, so no beams will fail. If that is the case, then
executing the command Select > By Specification > All Failed
Beams may produce a message indicating that no beams failed.
This message can be misleading. If no Check Code command was
included in the input file, or if an analysis has not yet been run, the
program will not be able to correctly identify failed members.
 Exercise: Observing Design Results using the Member Query Feature

2 Double-click on Member No. 1 (bottom chord member just to the right of
midspan) to open the Beam dialog.
This dialog continues to be populated with more information as the model
is constructed, properties are assigned, and as analysis and design results
become available.
Now that the model has been analyzed with steel design commands
included, a Steel Design tab is now available.
3 Click the Steel Design tab in the Beam dialog.
This Steel Design tab displays the same information that was previously
reviewed in the output file. This is an easy way to obtain basic design
results for a particular member.
The Steel Design tab presents the design strength, critical loads, pass / fail
status, unity ratio, governing clause of the design code, Kl/r ratio, etc.
4 Click the Close button to dismiss the Beam dialog.
5 Click File > Close in the STAAD.Pro Menu Bar to return to the Start Page. It
is not necessary to save this file.

Member Selection
Member Selection
STAAD.Pro also has the ability to design steel members, as opposed to just
performing a code check on pre-assigned member sizes. These features will be
discussed in this section, along with methods to optimize the design.
Designing Steel Members

Previously, we demonstrated how to perform a Code Check on members of the
model. The shortcoming of that method is that we are responsible for selecting an
appropriate section size and re-assigning it to any member that fails the Code
Check.
On the other hand, it may be more beneficial in many cases to have STAAD.Pro
select the appropriate member size for us. STAAD.Pro has the ability to select the
most economical section in terms of weight that will satisfy the code
requirements.
Note: Even though we are asking STAAD.Pro to select members for us, we still must
assign an initial size to all members of the model. This is required in order for
STAAD.Pro to be able to assemble the stiffness matrix that is necessary to
analyze the structure.
 Exercise: Designing Steel Members with the Select Option

The Check Code command that appears in the Command Tree in the Steel
Design dialog is no longer appropriate, since the goal is now to allow
STAAD.Pro to select members that satisfy the code requirements, rather
than to just check the adequacy of the assigned sizes.
3 Right-click on the CHECK CODE command, then select Delete Command
from the pop-up menu. Click Yes to confirm.
4 Select all members in the Main Window using your preferred selection
method.
5 Click the Commands button at the bottom of the Steel Design dialog.
6 Click the SELECT option in the Design Commands dialog.
7 Click the Assign button to simultaneously add the SELECT command to the
command list and assign it to all members in the model.

Member Selection

The SELECT command has now replaced the CHECK CODE command at the
bottom of the Command Tree in the Steel Design dialog. The green check
mark to the left of the SELECT command indicates that it has been
assigned to members in the model.
Hint: The icon would appear as a yellow question mark instead of a green
check mark if the Add button was clicked instead of the Assign button. If
this was the case, the Assign To View option could be used to assign the
SELECT command to all members in the model.
9 Click Analyze > Run Analysis… and then click Save in the pop-up warning
dialog to confirm the intent to save the input file with the recent changes.
A dialog is displayed with the warning message shown below.
10 Click Yes to close this dialog and proceed with the analysis. The meaning of
this warning will be discussed shortly.
11 When the analysis concludes, click the View Output File radio button, and
then click Done.
12 When the Output Viewer opens, click the words STEEL DESIGN under the
RESULTS bar in the left window. This is a link to go straight to the steel
design pages in the output file.
13 Scroll through the steel design results, and note the following:
• Every member has passed
• Nearly every member now has a unique cross section, because no
control was provided for the program as it optimized individual
members.
A more sophisticated optimization technique will be presented in an
upcoming section titled “Finalizing the Design”.
14 Click File > Exit in the STAAD Output Viewer.

Member Selection
15 In the Steel Design dialog, note that the MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN
folder icon has been expanded in the Command Tree.
The new entries in the list (the ones with the question marks) represent
the sections that were determined to be the optimized sizes by the SELECT
command.
The question mark icon is used to indicate that they have not yet been
assigned to the model. Don't be deceived by the fact that the optimized
member sizes were just viewed in the STEEL DESIGN section of the output
file.
16 Press Shift + X to show member sections on the structure diagram.
Note that the sections shown on the structure diagram are still the original
sizes that were assigned to the members.
17 Select Mode > Post-Processing from the Menu Bar to activate the Post
Processor.
18 Click OK in the Results Setup dialog to select all four load cases.
19 Click the Beam tab in the Page Control, and then click the Unity Check
sub-tab.
In the Design Results table, in the Data Area, notice the following results:
• The Analysis Property indicates the cross sections that were used in
the analysis to obtain the member forces. These are the member
sections that we initially assigned to the members of the model.
• This Design Property sections indicates which member sizes were
chosen using the SELECT command and the ratios for each.
• Most of the Actual Ratio values are less than but very close to 1.0. This
is an indication of the efficiency of the selection process. If many
members had a ratio far below 1.0, it would not be considered to be an
efficient, economical design.
• Occasionally there might be a member with a very low ratio. For
example, several of the angles have a very low ratio. This is because
that angle size is either the smallest angle in the section database, or
that angle size is required in order to meet the minimum slenderness
ratio, Kl/r.
Note: There is a provision in some codes that permits members to be

designated as secondary members that are not subject to slenderness
limits. An example might be a member that is designed to perform in
tension, but which might also experience some compression loading. In

Member Selection
such cases, the parameter called Main can be used to designate certain
members as secondary members, and waive the slenderness check.
20 Click File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save a
copy of this file.
Member Selection and Optimization
Now, let's discuss the meaning of the warning message that we received when we
performed this latest analysis. The message indicated that the model contained
instructions for Member Selection/Optimization and/or Grouping but that these
commands were not followed by an instruction to reanalyze the model. It goes on
to say in effect that the analysis results will not be consistent with the new
member properties.
For an indeterminate structure, there are more unknowns than there are
equations of static equilibrium. In order to have a sufficient number of equations
to solve for the unknown quantities, additional equations known as Equations of
Compatibility must be relied upon. These equations use relationships between
the forces and displacements, and are dependent upon the section properties of
the members.
The fact that the nature of force distribution and redistribution in an

indeterminate structure depends on the section properties of the members is the
reason for the warning message that was generated. When the model was first
analyzed, STAAD.Pro used the section properties of the members that were
initially specified. From that analysis, forces and displacements were obtained
that were then used to select new section sizes that satisfied Code requirements.
However, a reanalysis has not yet been performed to incorporate the effects of
the changes in stiffness as a result of the newly-selected member sizes. Thus, the
forces that were used to select the members are no longer valid, because those
forces were based upon a completely different set of member properties.

Member Selection
Additionally, a reanalysis should be performed to capture the revised self weight

of the members.
We know that the results of the current design are undesirable due to the number
of different sizes that were obtained in the optimization process. So the next step
would be to apply some control to the way STAAD.Pro selects “optimal” member
sizes. However, if we had been satisfied with the selected sizes and we wanted to
capture those sizes and make them a part of the current model, then STAAD.Pro
offers the Results > Update Properties command in the Post Processing mode
that would accomplish that purpose.
Grouping the Member Selections

To make this design more realistic, the member sizes should be fairly uniform. At
present, the SELECT command has optimized the size of each member
individually, so practically every member in the model has a unique cross section.
It is obviously not practical to construct a real-world structure this way. Instead,
certain parts of the structure should be comprised of members of a uniform cross
section. For example, the bottom chord members should probably have a uniform
cross section; the top chord members should have a uniform cross section; and
similarly for the two columns and the webs of the truss.
The other issue we have to address is the consistency of the analysis results and
the member section properties. Based on the discussion in the previous section,
once the program has selected members of a uniform size, the model should be
re-analyzed. The forces found in the first analysis will not be valid anymore
because of the differences in stiffness and self-weight associated with the
member size changes. A second analysis will determine the distribution of the
forces in the new members. With the new force values, one more code check can
be performed to confirm that the new members are able to safely bear the forces
on the structure.
In other words, to meet these objectives, the program needs to perform multiple
analyses. So, the general procedure is:
• Analyze the structure using the initial properties.
• Perform a Member Selection to optimize the design.
• Make the sizes uniform - the command to do this must always be preceded by
a member selection.
• Re-analyze the structure for the new member sizes.
• Perform a Code Check.

Member Selection
The commands to perform the analysis and the initial member selection have
already been defined in the model. The following exercises will add instruction to
make the sizes uniform, re-analyze the structure and perform a code check.
 Exercise: Creating Design GROUPS

3 Highlight the SELECT command in the Command Tree of the Steel Design
dialog, and then click the Commands button.
4 Toggle on the After Current checkbox at the bottom of the Design
Commands dialog.
Hint: The use of After Current ensures that the next command will be added
immediately beneath the command that is currently selected in the
Command Tree, instead of defaulting to the position at the very end of
the Command Tree.
5 Click the GROUP item.
Warning: This GROUP command should not be confused with other

commands to create groups, select by group, and so forth (see
Section 5.16 in the Technical Reference manual). The steel design
GROUP command tells the program to use the same cross section
for a given set of members.
6 Select Ax in the Property Specification list.

The Property Specification list specifies the property that will be used to
identify the controlling member. Options include
• Ax, Sy or Sz: cross sectional area, section modulus about the Y axis,
section modulus about the Z axis.
• None: For some codes, there is a fourth option called None. Selecting
None is the same as selecting Ax as the controlling parameter.
• Same as Beam #: Another option is to toggle on the Same As Beam #
checkbox. If this option is used, the selected Property Specification
from the selected beam will be used as the governing property for the
group. If no selection is made in the Property Specification list the
default group method will be used, which is to determine the cross
sectional area of the largest member in the group and then assign that
size to all members in the group.

Member Selection
The current model lends itself to four groups: top chord, bottom chord,
columns and webs.
7 Click the Add button four times, and then click the Close button to dismiss
the Design Commands dialog.
8 Click anywhere in the Main Window to deselect all members.
9 Click on the first GROUP MEMB command in the Command Tree of the
Steel Design dialog.
10 Using one of the available Assignment Methods, assign this group
definition to the two columns.
11 Again, click anywhere in the Main Window to deselect all members.
A green check appears adjacent to the first GROUP MEMB command,
indicating that is has been assigned to the columns.
12 Repeat this process to assign the bottom chord members, top chord
members, and web members to the other GROUP MEMB commands.
Hint: Recall that _BOTC, _TOPC, and _WEBS groups were created in the
Modeling Mode. These groups are available to use for easy selection of
these members.
 Exercise: Reanalyzing the Model

1 Ensure that the file Steel Design 4.std still open.
2 Click the Analysis/Print tab in the Page Control area.
The Analysis/Print Commands dialog opens, with the Perform Analysis tab
active.
3 Click Add, and then Close.
This adds a second PERFORM ANALYSIS command in the Command Tree of
the Analysis dialog.
4 Click the Design tab in the Page Control area.
5 Click the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog.
The Design Commands dialog opens with the CHECK CODE command
selected.
6 Click Add, and then Close.
This adds the CHECK CODE command to the end of the input file.
7 Select the CHECK CODE line in the Command Tree of the Steel Design
dialog.

Member Selection
8 In the Assignment Method category, select the Assign to View radio

button.
Note: It is not necessary to re-specify the design parameters. The parameters

that were specified previously will remain valid until they are re-
specified.
Note: The program will continue to use the ASD provisions of the AISC 360-05
code, the K values, FYLD values, the Track parameter, etc., until they are
re-specified or until the program reaches the FINISH command.
11 Click Save in the Warning dialog that pops up.
12 Check for any error messages in the STAAD Analysis and Design dialog.
13 If the analysis ran successfully, click the Go to Post Processing Mode radio
button, and then click the Done button.
14 Click OK in the Results Setup dialog.
15 Now click the Beam tab in the Page Control area, and then click the Unity
Check sub-tab.
16 Look in the Design Results table and note that all of the channels now
have the same cross section specified in the Design Property column. The
same is true for all of the tube sections, angle sections, and so forth.
Also note that if the metric dataset is used, one ember fails the Unity
Check with an Actual Ratio value greater than 1.0. (When the English
dataset is used, no members fail the code check at this point. This is
attributed to subtle differences in geometry and loading between the two
models.)
The failed member that occurs in the metric dataset is due to the fact that
the member selection process causes changes in self-weight and member
relative stiffness. Therefore, the member forces that were used to select
the member size get revised when the model is re-analyzed.
17 Select File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save a
copy of this file.

Member Selection
Finalizing the Design

What options are available in situations where some members have failed after
the Check Code command? One option is to perform additional design iterations:
reselect, regroup, and reanalyze. This process can be iterated over and over until
STAAD.Pro converges on a solution. In larger and more complex models, more
design iterations may be required in order to converge on a solution.
However, there is a quick way to reduce the number of iterations that may be
required by using a STAAD.Pro design parameter called RATIO.
 Exercise: Setting the RATIO Parameter

2 Click the Design tab in the Page Control area.
3 Select all of the members in the model using any convenient selection
method.
4 Click the “+” sign to the left of the PARAMETER 1 folder in the Command
Tree in the Steel Design dialog.
5 Click the TRACK 1 parameter to make it the current location.
6 Click the Define Parameters button.
7 In the Design Parameters dialog, click the RATIO parameter.
The RATIO parameter can be used to specify an upper limit for the ratio of
the applied forces to the capacity of the section.
Setting this value to something less than 1.0 directs STAAD.Pro to select
members with some additional capacity with respect to the code design
(or allowable) strength.
This builds in a margin of additional strength in the structure that allows it
to tolerate the inevitable redistribution of loads that occurs when
members’ stiffnesses change. The resulting design is less sensitive to
subtle shifts in load. In this way, an acceptable design may be found with
fewer design iterations required.
8 Enter a value of 0.75 in the Permissible ratio of actual load to section
capacity field.
9 Toggle on the After Current checkbox.
10 Click the Assign button, and then Close.
11 In the Steel Design dialog, click the + symbol adjacent to the PARAMETER 2
item to expand the tree.

Member Selection
12 Select the CODE AISC UNIFIED command to highlight it.

13 Re-select all members in the model.
14 Click the Define Parameters button.
15 Click the RATIO item.
The value in the Permissible ratio of actual load to section capacity field
should have defaulted back to 1.0. This time, leave it at its default value.
16 Toggle on the After Current checkbox.
17 Click the Assign button, and then Close.
Now when an analysis is run, the SELECT command will use a ratio of 0.75
and the CHECK CODE command will use a ratio of 1.0. If any member still
fails, the analysis could be run again to see if STAAD.Pro will correct the
failure based on the redistribution of forces, or the RATIO parameter could
be revised to a slightly more conservative value.
 Exercise: Running the Final Analysis

3 Click Save to acknowledge that the model has changed.
4 When the analysis is complete, click the Go to Post Processing Mode radio
button, and then click Done.
5 Click OK to select all load cases if the Results Setup dialog is displayed.
6 Click the Beam tab followed by the Unity Check sub-tab in the Page
Control.
7 In the Design Results table, click the Actual Ratio column heading to sort
all members by their ratio values. Note that the highest ratio is now
greater than 0.75, but still less than 1.0.
It is interesting to note that not all of the members ended up with a ratio
less than 0.75, which was the limit used in the SELECT command. This is a
good demonstration of how stresses can “creep” after member sizes
change and forces redistribute.
It is also a good demonstration of wise use of the Ratio values less than 1.0
to select the members and then 1.0 to code check the members. This
eliminated the need to run multiple iterations.

Member Selection
A few notes on the use of the RATIO parameter…

• Good practice is to use values between 0 and 1.0 with the RATIO parameter.
• Resist the temptation to use RATIO to account for increases in allowable
stresses that may be permitted in some codes.
• In addition to modifying the allowable stresses, RATIO has the effect of acting
as a multiplier on allowable KL/r slenderness ratios. This makes RATIO very
effective in building some conservatism into a design when it is used with
values less than 1.0, but makes it technically incorrect if used with values
greater than 1.
• If there is a need to acknowledge allowable overstresses (other than what is
already built into modern load combinations), then STAAD.Pro provides the
OVR parameter for some codes. Good practice would be to use the OVR
parameter with values greater than 1.0 to account for allowable stress
increases.
• Also note that RATIO acts on the DFF parameter when performing a deflection
check. An adjustment may need to be made to the allowable deflection limits
to account for this.
 Exercise: Viewing the Output of the Analysis

2 Select the STAAD Output icon from the toolbar to view the output file.
3 Click the first STEEL DESIGN line under the RESULTS bar to go straight to
the steel design pages in the output file.
Note that several members fail during the member selection routine. They
“fail” because their unity check values exceed the 0.75 limit set by the
RATIO command.
The warning message, “TRIAL FAILS FOR MEMBER x. FOLLOWING IS LAST
RESULT OF TRIAL”, indicates that STAAD.Pro performed a code check for all
channel sections in the database, and none were satisfactory. The results
that are reported are for the last section that was tried. In this case, the
last section tried (i.e. the heaviest section) is a C15x50.
4 Click the second STEEL DESIGN line under the RESULTS bar to move to the
results for the second code check.
Note that all members now pass the second code check, because the
RATIO parameter was reset to 1.0.
5 Close the Output Viewer.

Member Selection
Additional Comments Regarding Design Commands

In this section we will explore some of the additional design commands that are
available as follows:
• SELECT OPTIMIZED instructs STAAD.Pro to perform additional iterations of the
member selection routine followed by another analysis. In this case,
“optimized” means that the program will automatically iterate twice, without
the need for the user to manually specify the repetitions with SELECT and
PERFORM ANALYSIS commands.
It is good to be aware that the command exists, as it may have an application
under special circumstances. However, good practice generally dictates
manually specifying an iterative “analyze-design-reanalyze-check” process as
previously described.
When the SELECT OPTIMIZED command is issued, the following steps are
taken: CHECK CODE ALL, then modify ratios, then SELECT ALL, then PERFORM
ANALYSIS, then SELECT ALL.
There are some limitations to the SELECT OPTIMIZED command.
In a file with difficult conditions such as Member Tension, Member Cable,
Multilinear springs, Tension-only springs, etc., STAAD.Pro may report that it is
unable to optimize the model.
Also, the SELECT OPTIMIZED command only executes one additional iteration.
It does not cause the program to iterate endlessly, until it converges to a
solution to some nth degree of precision.
• TAKE OFF and MEMBER TAKE OFF commands can be used to generate a Bill of
Materials for a model. TAKE OFF shows the total weight of each section size
that is used in the model. MEMBER TAKE OFF also shows this same
information, but then adds a table showing the length and total weight of
each individual member in the model.
• The FIXED GROUP command is used with the SELECT OPTIMIZED command, in
the same way that GROUP is used with the SELECT command.

Member Selection
 Exercise: Looking at Other Design Commands

2 Select Mode > Modeling in the Menu Bar to return to the Modeling
Mode.
3 Click the Design tab followed by the Steel sub-tab in the Page Control.
4 Click the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog.
5 Note the FIXED GROUP, MEMBER TAKE OFF, SELECT OPTIMIZED, and TAKE
OFF commands listed. These design options are discussed above. Click the
Close button to exit out of the Design Commands dialog.
6 Select File > Close to return to the Start Page. It is not necessary to save a
copy of this file.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 In STAAD.Pro, slenderness is taken into consideration in steel design and
the user must input the appropriate values for the effective length factor,
unsupported length, and radius of gyration.
• True
• False
2 In STAAD.Pro, deflection checks are not automatically investigated when
the Code Check or Member Selection commands are used.
• True
• False
3 In STAAD.Pro, what is the general design procedure to select a uniform size
for similar members that have been grouped together?

Module Review
Answers
1 In STAAD.Pro, slenderness is taken into consideration in steel design and
the user must input the appropriate values for the effective length factor,
unsupported length, and radius of gyration.
False
Since the radius of gyration is a function of member cross section, it is not
a user input value as it is available from the STAAD.Pro section database.
The user may input values for the effective length factors and unsupported
lengths along each axis of the member. In the absence of any user input,
the effective length factors are assigned a default value of 1.0 and the
unsupported length are assigned a default value equal to the node-to-
node member length.
2 In STAAD.Pro, deflection checks are not automatically investigated when
the Code Check or Member Selection commands are used.
True
The deflection limits in most codes are considered serviceability
requirements as opposed to strength or life safety requirements. For this
reason, deflections are not automatically investigated when the Check
Code or Member Selection commands are used. To specifically instruct
STAAD.Pro to perform deflection checking, the variables Dff, Dj1 and Dj2
can be specified.
3 In STAAD.Pro, what is the general design procedure to select a uniform size
for similar members that have been grouped together?
• Analyze the structure using the initial properties.
• Perform a Member Selection to optimize the design.
• Make the sizes uniform - the command to do this must always be
preceded by a member selection.
• Re-analyze the structure for the new member sizes.
• Perform a Code Check.
Once STAAD.Pro has selected members of a uniform size, the model
should be re-analyzed. The forces found in the first analysis will not be
valid anymore because of the differences in stiffness and self-weight
associated with the member size changes. A second analysis will
determine the distribution of the forces in the new members. With the
new force values, one more code check can be performed to confirm that
the new members are able to safely bear the forces on the structure.

Concrete Design
Module Overview
This module covers the portions of modeling and property assignment that are
pertinent to concrete models. A discussion on P-Delta analysis is presented, and
then the module demonstrates the process of defining and assigning parameters
and issuing commands to request the design of slabs, beams, and columns by the
batch mode. Finally, the module concludes by interpreting program output for
each of these available designs.
• Familiarity with STAAD.Pro modeling and property assignment techniques
STAAD.Pro
(Analyzing the Model)
• Familiarity with the basic Post-Processing functions in STAAD.Pro (The Post-
Processor)
May-10 283 Concrete Design

Module Objectives
Module Objectives
• Apply appropriate modeling techniques to incorporate the effects of the
monolithic nature of beams and slabs in reinforced concrete structures.
• Apply concrete design parameters to influence design output.
• Initiate the batch mode design of reinforced concrete slabs, beams, and
columns.
• Interpret concrete design output results.
Questions
1 STAAD.Pro offers the option of applying Property Reduction Factors to
concrete members to reduce their effective section properties during
analysis to account for cracking.
• True
• False
2 STAAD.Pro has the ability to perform an iterative analysis that incorporates
the secondary effects caused by lateral drift in a structure.
• True
• False
3 STAAD.Pro offers an option to consider the effects of rigid end zones, such
as where a short beam intersects a large column.
• True
• False
Concrete Design 284 May-10

Answers
1 STAAD.Pro offers the option of applying Property Reduction Factors to
concrete members to reduce their effective section properties during
analysis to account for cracking.
True
Property Reduction Factors are accessible in the form of member
specifications.
2 STAAD.Pro has the ability to perform an iterative analysis that incorporates
the secondary effects caused by lateral drift in a structure.
True
When used with REPEAT LOADs, STAAD.Pro's P-Delta analysis analyzes a
structure through many iterations, adjusting forces and deflections after
each cycle, to properly account for these secondary effects.
3 STAAD.Pro offers an option to consider the effects of rigid end zones, such
as where a short beam intersects a large column.
True
Offsets are available as member specifications to address conditions
where a beam might behave more nearly as if it were supported at the
face of a column as opposed to being supported at the centerline of a
column.

Concrete Design Example Model
Concrete Design Example Model

The example model for this module is a three-story structure consisting of beams,
columns, and plates as shown below.
Defining Model Geometry

Do the following to prepare for this section:
1 Open the file named Concrete Design 1.std, and note that much of the
modeling process has already been completed in this dataset file. The
exercises in this module step through additional modeling operations to
further develop this model.
The Concrete Design Example Model was constructed as follows:

• The Structure Wizard was an efficient tool for quickly generating the frame of
columns and primary beams. It includes a library of parametrically scalable
prototype structures. The Bay Frame prototype structure allowed for the
efficient specification of the overall building dimensions and the number of
divisions to create in each of three directions.
• The Structure Wizard was run twice; once to generate the framing for the
overall structure, and once again to generate the beams and columns for the
small canopy in the foreground. The Reference Point option in the Paste
Prototype Model dialog was a convenient way to graphically specify the

Defining Model Geometry
desired insertion point for the small canopy with respect to the overall
structure.
• The infill beams were added manually in one bay using the Add Beams tool. By
clicking anywhere along the girders, a dialog named Insert Nodes into Beam
## was opened. This allowed for the precise specification of the location for
the end nodes of the infill beams. Copy and Paste Beams commands were
used to replicate the infill beams in multiple bays.
• During the Copy and Paste procedure, the goal was obviously to ensure that
the new infill beams were properly connected to the supporting girders.
STAAD.Pro has a feature that facilitated that process. It appears in the View >
Options item in the Menu Bar, under the Tolerance category, in the form of
the checkbox titled Split member if new node is added on the member, as
shown in the figure below.
Because this checkbox was selected, the end nodes of the pasted infill beams
automatically split the supporting girders and connected to them. If the
checkbox had not been selected, the pasted beams would not have split the
girders, and in this case, connectivity would not have been as intended.

Defining Member Properties
There was another benefit to having the Split member if checkbox selected,
and it was realized when the second prototype was merged into the model.
Because the checkbox was selected, STAAD.Pro automatically split the two
existing columns at the elevation of the canopy framing in the second
prototype, and automatically resolved the overlapping collinear members that
would have otherwise occurred at those two locations.

The next step is to assign properties to the beams and columns in the model. The
following properties are required:
• Main Building Columns: 18 in x 18 in {450 mm x 450 mm}
• All Beams: 20 in deep x 16 in wide {500 mm deep x 400 mm wide}
• Two Canopy Columns: 18 in dia. {450 mm dia}
 Exercise: Define Member Properties

1 Ensure that the file named Concrete Design 1.std is still open.
Note: It may be more convenient to set the input units to inches {millimeters}.
2 Click the General tab in the Page Control. The Property sub-tab is active by
default.
3 Click the Define button in the Properties-Whole Structure dialog. This
dialog provides a method to specify the section dimensions for members
of common cross-sectional shapes, and to associate a selected set of
material properties to a shape if desired.
4 Click the Rectangle item in the Property dialog.
5 Enter 18 {450} in the YD field and in the ZD field.
6 Leave the Material checkbox toggled on, and leave the Material list item
set to CONCRETE. This associates the properties of the material named
CONCRETE with the rectangular (square) section being defined.
Warning: Since Young's Modulus for concrete is a direct function of the

specified compressive strength of concrete, the default concrete
material in STAAD.Pro may not actually have the material
properties that are appropriate for the grade of concrete being
specified on a particular project. In situations where custom
materials are required, it may be more efficient to define the

materials first, so they can be referenced from the Material list

when Member Properties are being specified.

8 Enter 20 {500} in the YD field and 16 {400} in the ZD field.
9 Keep the Material checkbox toggled on, and leave the Material list item
set to CONCRETE.
11 Click the Circle item in the Property dialog.
12 Enter 18 {450} in the YD field.
13 Keep the Material checkbox checked, and keep the Material list item set
to CONCRETE.
Note: Three member properties now appear in the Properties window. The
next step is to assign the properties to the appropriate members in the
model.
16 Click the Rect 18.00x18.00 CONCRETE {Rect 0.45x0.45 CONCRETE} item in
the section list.
17 Click the Menu Bar item Select > Beams Parallel To > Y to quickly select all
columns.
18 Verify that the Assignment Method is set to Assign To Selected Beams,
20 Ensure that the Highlight Assigned Geometry checkbox is selected in the
Properties dialog.
21 Click the Rect 20.00x16.00 CONCRETE {Rect 0.50x0.40 CONCRETE} item in
the section list.
22 Click the Menu Bar item Select > Beams Parallel To > X, and then click the
Menu Bar item Select > Beams Parallel To > Z to select all beams.
25 Click the Cir 18.00 CONCRETE {Cir 0.45 CONCRETE} item in the section list
in the Properties - Whole Structure dialog.

26 Verify that the Assignment Method is set to Use Cursor To Assign, and
then click the Assign button.
27 Click on the two canopy columns in the foreground as shown highlighted
below, and then click the Assign button again to toggle the assignment
mode off.
Selection
Note: Reference numbers should now be visible on all members. They

correspond to the property reference numbers listed in the Ref column
in the Properties dialog.
Hint: If reference numbers are not visible, they can be turned on by using the
keyboard hotkey Shift + J.
Note: It may be necessary to refresh the screen to see a change in the

reference number on the two canopy columns. One quick way to do this
is to roll the wheel of the mouse forward and backward.
28 Click each of the three different sections in the Properties dialog.
Note: Members with the currently selected section are highlighted in the Main
Window. This provides a quick way to visually observe that all members
have received the appropriate section assignments.

Adding the Supports
Adding the Supports

All columns in the model are to have fixed supports at their bases. The general
process here is to create, or Add, a fixed support to the model, and then assign it
to the bases of each of the columns.
 Exercise: Add and Assign Supports

1 Keep the current file open, or open the file named Concrete Design 2.std.
2 Click on the Support sub-tab of the General tab in the Page Control.
3 Click the Create button in the Supports-Whole Structure dialog. The Fixed
Support tab is active by default. This represents a support that is
restrained against translation and rotation in/about all six degrees of
freedom.
4 Click the Add button. The fixed support is added to the list in the Supports-
Whole Structure dialog.
5 Click on Support 2 in the Supports-Whole Structure dialog to select it.
6 Click the View From + Z icon on the Rotate toolbar.
7 Click the Nodes Cursor on the Selection toolbar.
8 Click and drag a fence around all of the nodes at the bottoms of the
columns to select them. Be sure to create a fence large enough to include
the nodes at the bases of all of the columns, but not so large that it
includes any of the nodes at higher elevations in the model.
9 Click the Isometric View icon on the Rotate toolbar.
10 Confirm that the Assignment Method category is automatically set to

Assign to Selected Nodes.
11 Click the Assign button and confirm with Yes.

Defining Beam - Slab Monolithic Action
Defining Beam - Slab Monolithic Action

In the next section we will generate a mesh of plate elements to represent the
slab over the canopy portion of the example model.
This example raises an important aspect of modeling with plates in a reinforced

concrete structure. When a plate shares a boundary with a beam, it is common to
expect the beam and the plate to behave monolithically in the model. In the
current model, the canopy beams are defined as single members spanning
between the columns. Our intent is to model the slab such that it behaves
monolithically with the beams, and shares the load and stiffness with the beams.
In order to guarantee monolithic behavior, the beams must be subdivided at

exactly the same points as the slab, and the nodes that occur at the subdivisions
must be common to the incidences of the beams and the slab elements. If this is
done correctly, then loads and stiffness are shared at those points. Fortunately,
this is part of the behavior of the Split member if... option that we saw in an
earlier section.
When the Split member if... option is selected and a slab mesh is added to a model
after beams have been placed, STAAD.Pro automatically splits the beams and
creates nodes at any location where a slab node falls directly on a beam. Similarly,
if a plate is created on top of existing beam elements and then is subsequently
meshed, the original beams are automatically split at common node locations
when the meshing takes place.
Note: The beams must be created first, and then the mesh placed afterwards in order
for STAAD.Pro to be able to split the beams and coordinate the nodes.
If a plate mesh is created first, and then the beams are added afterwards, the
beams are not split automatically, regardless of how the Split member if...
checkbox is set. In this instance, another tool called Break Beams at Selected
Nodes can be used. It can be located by clicking the Menu Bar item Geometry >
Break Beams at Selected Nodes.
While not as powerful as the method described above, the Break Beams at
Selected Nodes tool can still significantly reduce the effort involved in manually
breaking up beams when the intent is to model beam - slab monolithic action.

Defining the Slab
Defining the Slab

This section provides instructions for adding the plate elements to the model.
Note: The sequence of operations presented in this Module does not necessarily
follow the recommended workflow process in STAAD.Pro. In reality, the
creation of the plate elements would typically occur immediately after the
creation of the beam and column elements, and before the assignment of
section properties. However, for training purposes, it is more convenient to
present the material in the order outlined in this Module.
 Exercise: Define the Slab to Ensure Beam - Slab Monolithic Action

2 Click the Menu Bar item View > Options. Click Tolerance and ensure that
the Split member if new node is added on the member checkbox is
currently selected, and then click OK.
Note: Check the Status Bar in the lower right-hand corner of the screen to
determine the current input units. If it indicates that the current input
units are set to kip-in {kN-mm}, then for the following exercise, it may
be more convenient to set the input units to Foot {Meter}. See below
for step-by-step instructions.
3 Click the Menu Bar item Tools > Set Current Input Unit.
4 Click the Foot {Meter} radio button in the Length Units category.
5 Click OK.
Note: The next steps illustrate how to model the slab over the canopy framing
as a mesh of plate elements. No plate elements are used in the main
portion of the example model. Instead, we will use some alternate
methods to distribute loads and enforce consistent deflections on those
floors. Since the four corner points of the canopy are already defined,
the mesh generation cursor can be used to define the slab.
6 Click the Menu Bar item Geometry > Generate Surface meshing.

Defining the Slab
7 Click on the first corner (indicated as point A in the figure below), and then
click on the other three corner points B, C and D with the Mesh
Generation Cursor. Select the nodes in clockwise order around the
perimeter of the slab to stay consistent with the dataset model. Finally,
click again on the starting point A.
A
C
Note: When the starting point is clicked the second time, it indicates to
STAAD.Pro that the loop has been closed and that the area to be
meshed has been completely defined.
Hint: An alternative would be to right-click the mouse after point D to signify

that the boundary is complete.
Note: STAAD.Pro opens a dialog labeled Choose Meshing Type. STAAD.Pro

recognizes that a figure with four sides has been defined, so it offers the
choice of either Polygonal or Quadrilateral meshing. Since the figure is
rectangular, it is a good candidate for a quadrilateral mesh.
8 Click the Quadrilateral Meshing radio button, and then click the OK
button.
Note: The corner labels A, B, C and D in the Select Meshing Parameters dialog
correspond to the successive points used to define the extent of the
slab. Corner A is the first corner that was clicked when the mesh was
defined. B is the second corner clicked, etc.
9 Enter a value of 5 in all four of the Divn. parameter fields to specify that
the mesh is to be divided into five elements along each side.

Defining the Slab
10 Click the Apply button. The mesh is automatically generated and displayed
in the Main Window.
11 Press the escape key <esc> to deactivate the Mesh Generation Cursor.
12 Press Shift + K to turn on node point labels.
Note: By specifying five divisions for the 30-foot {9 meter} sides, the resulting
mesh consists of 6-foot square {1.8 meter square} elements. For more
accurate results, the model might warrant more divisions. However, as a
learning exercise, this simple model will suffice. It keeps the screen
from getting cluttered and makes the model easy to work with.
13 Click on one of the beams around the perimeter of the canopy with the
Beams Cursor.
Note: The beam segments can be selected in individual 6-foot {1.8 meter}
lengths, and the beam segments start and end at the plate corners. This
confirms that they have been meshed, that is, that they have been
broken into segments that coincide with the nodes of the plate
elements.

Tools for Viewing Plates
Tools for Viewing Plates

 Exercise: Use the Tools for Viewing Plates
2 Right-click anywhere in the Main Window and select Structure Diagrams
from the pop-up menu. The Diagrams dialog opens with the Structure tab
active.
3 Toggle on the checkbox labeled Fill Plates/Solids/Surface under the View
category, and click Apply. This shades the surface of the plate elements, to
make them easier to see graphically.
4 Toggle on the checkbox labeled Shrink, verify that the value in the
associated field is set to 10%, and click OK. This reduces the size of the
plates and members with respect to the nodes to which they connect.
Doing this distinguishes the plates from the beams, and makes it easier to
view the connectivity more clearly.
5 Click the Geometry tab, and then click the Plate sub-tab.
6 Click on any one of the rows in the Plates table and notice that the
corresponding plate element becomes highlighted in the Main Window.
7 Right-click in the Main Window, while at least one element is still
highlighted, and then select New View from the pop-up menu.
8 Select Create a new window for the view radio button, and then click OK.
Note: The single element that was highlighted in the Plates table is displayed
in the new window. This can be a handy way to clearly display just one
element.

Plate Orientation and Local Coordinate System

To prepare for this section, do the following:
1 With the model named Concrete Design 4.std still open, click inside the
new view to place the focus on the window showing the single plate
element.
2 Press the keyboard hotkey Shift + T to display Plate Orientation axes on
the single plate.
An understanding of STAAD.Pro's convention for orienting the axes of a plate

element is important. For users who are not already familiar with the convention,
it is explained and illustrated below.
Hint: See also Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference manual.
Consider the plates as shown in the figure below. The nodes defining the
quadrilateral plate were drawn in the order A - B - C - D. The nodes defining the
triangular plate were drawn in the order A - B - C. The orientation of the local
coordinate system axes for plates is determined as follows:
• The local x-axis is defined to be parallel to the vector pointing from A to B.
• The cross-product of vectors AB and AC defines a vector parallel to the local z-
axis, i.e., z = AB x AC. The z-axis is normal to the plate surface.
• The cross-product of vectors z and x defines a vector parallel to the local y-
axis, i.e., y = z cross x. (Both the x and the y axes always lie in the plane of the
plate.)
• The origin of the axes is at the center (average) of the 4 node locations (3 node
locations for a triangle).

In the example below, the nodes are specified in the order 10, 13, 19 and 17.
Consider nodes 10, 13, 19 and 17 to be A, B, C and D respectively. It is now easy to

confirm that STAAD.Pro has drawn the local x-axis parallel to vector AB. The vector
AC points from node 10 to node 19. Use the right-hand rule to take the cross
product of vector AB and vector AC. To visualize this, consider rotating vector AB
into vector AC with the fingers of the right hand. The right thumb points
downward, confirming the direction of the resulting cross-product vector, z. The
z-axis is always normal to the plane of the plate.
For another way to visualize the same concept, envision a screw with right-hand
threads, oriented perpendicular to the plane defined by the vectors AB and AC. If
the screw was rotated in the direction from vector AB to AC, it would move
downwards. Therefore, vector z, the local z-axis for this plate, points downward.
The orientation of a plate's local axis system is dictated solely by the order in
which the corner nodes for the plate are specified. In STAAD.Pro, the side of the
plate from which the positive z-axis points is considered to be the “top” of the
plate.
As discussed in the previous section, the local-z axis for this plate is pointing
downward.

Note: For the single plate currently being displayed in the new view, the incidence
order of the nodes can be determined by looking at the corresponding row in
the Plates table.
 Exercise: Review Plate Orientation

1 Continuing in Concrete Design 4.std, click the X in the upper right corner
of the window with the single plate to close that window and return to the
Main Window with the entire structure.
2 Right-click in the Main Window. Select Structure Diagrams from the pop-
up menu. The Diagrams dialog opens with the Structure tab active.
3 Toggle off the Fill Plates/Solids/Surface and Shrink checkboxes.
4 Click the Labels tab.
5 Toggle on the Plate Orientation checkbox, and then click OK.
Note: It is now clear that the local z-axis is oriented downward for all plates in
the current model. The “top” surface of these plates in the example
model is actually facing downward, and the “bottom” surface is facing
up.
Hint: To avoid confusion when interpreting stress results or rebar designs, it is

generally desirable to orient horizontal plates such that their top points
upward (parallel to global Y-axis). There is a simple way to quickly
reorient many plates at one time in STAAD.Pro.
6 Activate the Plates Cursor if it is not already active. Select all plates in the
structure.
7 Click the Menu Bar item Commands > Geometric Constants > Plate
Reference Point.
8 Enter a value of 5000 in the Y field of the Point category.
9 Select Towards Ref. Point in the Local Z Axis category.
Note: Since the plates were selected before entering this dialog, the Assign
category defaults to the To Selection option, but note that it also
contains an option to assign this plate reference point To View, meaning
to all plates in the currently active View.

10 Leave the Assign category set to the To Selection option, and click OK.
STAAD.Pro revises the incidences in the Plates table. The plate orientation
symbols now indicate that the local z-axis of all plates is pointing up.
Note: A new view was created earlier with just a single plate. It is worth noting
that if the same plate was viewed again, the node numbers and
locations would be no different. The change in the orientation of the
plate is effected by altering the order in which the nodes are listed in
the Plates table. To see this effect, compare the two figures below.
Note: Before the Plate Reference Point command was used, the nodes were
listed in the order 10 - 13 - 19 - 17 (clockwise in the view above). After
the command is issued, they are listed in the opposite order
(counterclockwise in the view above). As a result, the z-axis is revised
from pointing downward to pointing upward.

Defining Plate Properties
Defining Plate Properties

The next step is to assign properties to the plate elements.
 Exercise: Define Plate Properties

Hint: If the plate orientation labels are still visible, they can be toggled on and
off by using the keyboard hotkey Shift + T.
Note: Since plate thickness is defined in units of inches {millimeters}, it is most

convenient to use input units of inches {millimeters}. Check the Status
Bar in the lower right-hand corner of the screen to determine the
current input units, and change the input units if necessary.
2 Click the General tab, and then click the Property sub-tab in the Page
Control.
3 Click the Thickness button in the Properties-Whole Structure dialog.
Note: The Plate Element Thickness tab allows the flexibility of defining a
different thickness at each node, if it becomes necessary to model
plates of varying thickness.
4 Enter a value of 12 inches {300 mm} in the Node 1 field.
Note: If the thickness value is entered in the input field for Node 1, STAAD.Pro
automatically populates the other three node thickness fields with the
same value.
5 Leave the Material checkbox toggled on, and leave the Material list item
set to CONCRETE. This ensures that STAAD.Pro's default material constants
for concrete are assigned to the plate elements.
6 Click the Add button, and then click Close.
7 Click the Plate Thickness CONCRETE item in the Properties list.
8 Toggle on the Assign To View radio button in the Assignment Method
category, and then click Assign.
9 Click Yes in the pop-up dialog to confirm. The reference number shown on
all plates confirms that the 12-inch {300 mm} thickness property has been
assigned.

Assigning Specifications
Now that the mesh generation step has taken place and the canopy beams have
been split by the addition of many new nodes, we can come back to the
Specifications tab and discuss available Node, Beam, and Plate specifications.
Node Specifications
The only specification that can be assigned to nodes is the Master/Slave
specification. The general purpose for a Master/Slave specification is to define a
constraint of some sort that requires “slaved” nodes to translate and/or rotate the
same amount as some “master” node.
Note: For each Master/Slave specification, a Master Node is identified in the

dropdown list.
The behavior of each Master/Slave specification is controlled by the checkboxes in

the Slaved Directions category as follows:
• Rigid: Slaved nodes translate and rotate the same amount as the master in all
6 degrees of freedom. (Note that this is NOT the intent when defining what
structural engineers typically refer to as a “rigid diaphragm” in a building.)
• XY: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global X and Y
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the Z axis.
• YZ: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global Y and Z
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the X axis.
• ZX: Slaved nodes translate consistently with the master in the global Z and X
directions, and rotate the same amount as the master about the Y axis. (Note
that this is the intent when defining what structural engineers typically refer
to as a “rigid diaphragm” in a building.)
Any other combination of the six available degrees of freedom can be slaved to a
master node by using the individual checkboxes at the right side of the Slaved
Directions category.
The current example model is a perfect application for a Master/Slave

specification, because of the fact that we did not model plates to represent the
concrete slab in the main portion of the structure.

 Exercise: Create and Assign Groups and Master/Slave Specifications

2 Click the General tab, and then click the Spec sub-tab.
Note: There are three buttons in the Specifications dialog: Node, Beam, and
Plate. Each offers specifications that can be applied to the respective
types of modeling entities.
3 Click the Node button. The Node Specification dialog offers the option to
create a Master/Slave specification to be assigned to nodes.
Note: For this exercise, let's assume that the intent is to model the reinforced
concrete slabs as rigid diaphragms. Our approach is to start by creating
three node groups, one for each floor of the main structure.
4 Click the Close button to temporarily dismiss the Node Specification
dialog.
5 Click the Menu Bar item Tools > Create New Group.
6 Leave the Select Type dropdown list set to its default of Node in the Define
Group Name dialog.
7 Enter _FIRST in the Group Name field, and then click OK. The Define Group
Name dialog is dismissed.
8 Click the Create button in the Create Group dialog to reopen the Define
Group Name dialog.
9 Enter _SECOND in the Group Name field of the Define Group Name dialog,
and then click OK.
10 Click the Create button once again.
11 Enter _ROOF in the Group Name field, and then click OK.
12 Set the input units to Foot {Meter}.
13 Click on the line for the group named _FIRST in the Create Group dialog.
14 Click the Nodes Cursor on the Selection toolbar.
15 Click the Menu Bar item Select > By Range > XZ.
16 Enter 13 ft {4 m} for Y Minimum and 15 ft {5 m} for Y Maximum.
17 Click OK to select all nodes that fall within the specified range.
18 Set the Assign Methods category to Associate to Selected Geometry in
the Create Group dialog.

19 Click the Associate button to associate all of the nodes at the first floor
level with the group named _FIRST.
20 Click on the line for the group named _SECOND in the Create Group
dialog.
21 Click anywhere in the Main Window to deselect all nodes.
26 Click the Associate button to associate all of the nodes at the middle level
with the group named _SECOND.
27 Click on the line for the group named _ROOF in the Create Group dialog.
33 Click the Associate button to associate all of the nodes at the upper level
with the group named _ROOF.
35 Click the Close button to close the Create Group dialog.

36 Hover the Nodes Cursor over the nodes shown in the diagram below, and
note their node numbers. These three nodes are used as the Master nodes
in the Master/Slave specifications below.
13
Note: In general, it is good practice to select Master nodes that are relatively
close to the center of mass of a structural floor. (In fact, when a dynamic
analysis is performed, it is essential.) However, in this exercise, these
three nodes are being used as the Master nodes because they are easy
to identify, and this is acceptable because a dynamic analysis is not
being performed.
37 Click the Node button in the Specifications dialog once again.
38 Set the Master Node list to 5.
39 Click the Rigid checkbox to toggle it off, and click the ZX checkbox to
toggle it on in the Slaved Directions category.
40 Click the Add button to create the specification for the first floor, and note
that it appears in the Specifications dialog.
41 Click the Node button in the Specifications dialog.

toggle it on in the Slaved Direction category.
44 Click the Add button to create the specification for the second floor.
45 Click the Node button once again.
toggle it on in the Slaved Directions category.
48 Click the Add button to create the specification for the roof level.
49 Click the line that refers to node 5 in the Specifications dialog.
50 Click the Menu Bar item Select > By Group Name, and then click the line
for the group named _FIRST. Note that this dialog should remain open as
you move to the next step.
51 Make sure that the Assignment Method is set to Assign to Selected Nodes
in the Specifications dialog, and then click the Assign button, and confirm
with Yes.
52 Ensure that the checkbox for Highlight Assigned Geometry is toggled on
in the Specifications dialog.
54 Click the line for the group named _FIRST to deselect all nodes at the first
floor level in the Select Groups dialog. Then click the line for the group
named _SECOND.
with Yes.
57 Click the line for the group named _SECOND to deselect all nodes at the
second floor level in the Select Groups dialog. Then click the line for the
group named _ROOF.
with Yes.
Note: This completes the assignment of the Master/Slave specifications.

59 Click the Close button to dismiss the Select Groups dialog.
60 Click each of the three different specifications in the Specifications dialog
while the Highlight Assigned Geometry is selected.

Note: Nodes with the currently selected specification are highlighted in the
Main Window, and the Master node associated with the selected
specification is displayed with a double circle around it. This provides a
quick way to visually observe that all nodes have received the
appropriate Master/Slave specification.
Beam Specifications
Beam (Member) Specifications are presented in detail in another Module, but the
following is a general overview:
• Releases: can be used to apply full releases, partial releases, or spring stiffness
constants in any of the 6 degrees of freedom at either end of a member.
• Offsets: can be used to apply rigid offsets at the ends of members.
• Truss: can be used to indicate that a member can only carry axial loads, but
not shear, moment, or torsion.
• Compression/Tension: can be used to indicate that a member is not capable of
carrying tensile or compressive forces, respectively.
• Inactive: can be used to indicate that a member is to be ignored during an
analysis.
 Exercise: Assign Beam Specifications

If the new dataset file is being opened, click the General tab, and then
click the Spec sub-tab.
2 Click the Beam button in the Specifications dialog, and notice the variety
of available Beam Specifications. These are specifications that can be
assigned to beam members, and each modifies the way the members
behave in some way.
3 Click the Property Reduction Factors tab. This specification provides a way
to incorporate reduced effective section properties during the analysis. It
is specifically oriented toward analysis of reinforced concrete structures
and provides a way to account for loss of stiffness due to cracking.
Hint: Section 10.11.1 of ACI 318-05 has provided a list of suggested reduction
factors for section properties depending upon the nature of stresses to
which a member is subjected.

Note: For this example, we apply Property Reduction Factors to the beams and
columns to illustrate how Beam Specifications can be defined and
applied.
4 Enter the values as shown in the figure below to create a Property
Reduction Factor specification for the columns:
5 Click the Add button. The data for the specification is added as a new line
in the Specifications dialog.
6 Click the Beam button in the Specifications dialog once again.
7 Click the Property Reduction Factors tab.

8 Enter the values as shown in the figure below to create a Property

Reduction Factor specification for the beams:

10 Click on the line containing the column property reduction factors, and
ensure that the Highlight Assigned Geometry checkbox is selected.
11 Click the Menu Bar item Select > Beams Parallel To > Y.
and then click Assign and confirm with Yes.
13 Click on the line containing the beam property reduction factors. All
beams become deselected in the Main Window.
14 Click the Menu Bar item Select > Beams Parallel To > X, and then click
Select > Beams Parallel To > Z.
and then click Assign and confirm with Yes.
Note: This completes the assignment of the Property Reduction Factor

specifications.

Each plate specification has a particular effect on the behavior of plates. The
available plate specifications are also discussed in detail in another module, but
are explained in the exercise below for reference.
 Exercise: Review Plate Specifications

1 Keep the current file open.
2 Click the Plate button in the Specifications dialog, and notice the variety of
available Plate Specifications.
• Release: used to specify releases for nodes that define plates. Releases
can be applied to one or more of the six degrees of freedom at any
node. Plate Releases are specified with respect to the plate local axis
system.
• Ignore Inplane Rotation: used to specify that the program is to ignore
“in-plane stiffness” associated with the Mz degree of freedom at the
nodes of plates.
• Rigid Inplane Rotation: used to specify that all nodes in a plate have an
“infinite” rotational stiffness about the Mz degree of freedom.
• Plane Stress: used to specify that a plate is only capable of resisting in-
plane loads (axial load and in-plane shear), but is incapable of resisting
out-of-plane shears or moments that create out-of-plane bending.
• Ignore Stiffness: used to specify that the stiffness of a plate element is
to be completely ignored in the assembly of the stiffness matrix. This
specification allows plate elements to be modeled for the purpose of
applying loads to a structure without allowing those elements to
contribute resistance in any way.
Note: None of these Plate Specifications are used in the current model.
3 Click the Close button to dismiss the Plate Specifications dialog.

Assigning Loads
Assigning Loads
The steps associated with this section are performed from the Load & Definition
sub-tab of the General tab.
The subject of Loads in STAAD.Pro is a topic all to itself, and is covered thoroughly
in another module. This section presents a review of some terms related to loads
in STAAD.Pro along with a demonstration of some basic loading concepts.
• Definition: Blocks of data that are required to create Code-specified load cases
such as wind, seismic, and snow. Also required to generate moving load cases,
time history load cases, and pushover loads. The command syntax for these
cases is explained in section 5.31 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference
manual.
• Load Case: A fundamental group of loads that acts concurrently and requires
the same load factor when combined with other loads. Identified by a load
case number and a name. Examples might include Dead Load, Live Load,
Wind Load to the West, etc.
• Load Item: Individual assignment of a load magnitude and direction. Examples
include Uniform Member load of -1 kip/ft in the global Y-direction, Plate
Pressure load of 1 kN/m2 in the plate local z-direction, etc.
• Load Envelope: A collection of load conditions (load cases or load
combinations) that is defined for the convenience of quickly selecting the
entire group of load conditions for use when working with results in the Post
Processor.
 Exercise: Assign Loads

2 Ensure that the current Input Units are set to Foot {Meter}. Step-by-step
instructions are provided below if it is necessary to change units.
• Click the Menu Bar item Tools > Set Current Input Unit.
• Click the Foot {Meter} radio button in the Length Units category of the
Set Current Input Units dialog.
• Click OK.
3 Click the General tab, and then click the Load & Definition sub-tab in the
Page Control.

Assigning Loads
4 Click on Load Cases Details in the Load & Definition dialog.
5 Click the Add button in the Load & Definition dialog.

6 Type the name GRAVITY LOAD in the Title field of the Add New: Load
Cases dialog.
Note: The Loading Type category can be used to distinguish different loading
types when the automatic load combination generator is used. Since
the generator is not used in this example, the Loading Type can be left
at the default value of None.
7 Click the Add button, but do not close this dialog yet.
8 Click on 1: GRAVITY LOAD in the Load & Definition dialog.
Note: The Add New : Load Cases dialog becomes the Add New: Load Items
dialog, and the Selfweight Load item is selected by default.
9 Click Y in the Direction category, set the Factor to -1, and then click Add.
Note: The expression SELFWEIGHT Y -1 appears under 1: GRAVITY LOAD in the

Load & Definition dialog. The question mark in front of the expression
indicates that it has not been assigned to any entities in the model yet.
10 Click the Floor Load category tab in the Add New: Load Items dialog. The
Floor item is active by default.
11 Click the YRANGE option.
12 Enter a value of 13 ft {4 m} in the Minimum field and 43 ft {13 m} in the
Maximum field in the Define Y Range section of the Range category.
13 Enter a value of -0.15 kip/ft2 {-7.2 kN/m2} in the Load category. (Note the
minus sign.)

Assigning Loads
14 Ensure that the Global Y option is selected in the Direction category.

15 Place a check in the One Way Distribution checkbox, and ensure that the
Towards list is set to Default (Longer Direction).
17 Click the Plate Loads category tab. The Pressure on Full Plate item is active
by default.
18 Enter a value of -0.2 kip/ft2 {-9.6 kN/m2} in the Load category. (Note the
minus sign.)
Note: The Local Z radio button is selected by default in the Direction category.
Hint: In this particular case, choosing Local Z or GY (global Y) has the same
effect, since Local Z points in the global Y-direction.
20 Click the expression SELFWEIGHT Y -1 under 1: GRAVITY LOAD in the Load
& Definition dialog.
21 Set the Assignment Method to Assign To View.
22 Click Assign and confirm with Yes.
Note: The expression that starts with YRANGE is the Load Item that generates
the Floor Load. It does not need to be assigned explicitly. Its parameters
included range values that implicitly apply the load item to the
members that fall within the range.
23 Click the expression PR -0.2 kip/ft2 {PR -9.6 kN/m2}. This is the Load Item
that generates the Plate Load.
24 Set the Assignment Method to Assign To View.
Note: If the scale of the load graphics is not appropriate at this time, it resolves
itself with the addition of the next load case.
Note: Load Case 2 is intended for the lateral loads that cause the structure to
sway.

Assigning Loads
26 Click on Load Cases Details in the Load & Definition dialog.
27 Click the Add button in the Load & Definition dialog.
Note: STAAD.Pro automatically increments the Number of the load case.

28 Type the name LATERAL LOAD in the Title field of the Add New: Load
Cases dialog.
29 Leave the Loading Type box set to None since there is no need to associate
this load case with any code-based load types.
30 Click the Add button, but leave this dialog open.
31 Click on 2: LATERAL LOAD in the Load & Definition dialog.
32 Click the Nodal Load category tab in the Add New: Load Items dialog. The
Node item is selected by default.
33 Enter a value of 10 kips {44.5 kN} in the Fx field, and then click the Add
button.
Note: The corresponding expression appears under 2: LATERAL LOAD in the

Load & Definition dialog.
34 Click the Close button to dismiss the Add New: Load Items dialog.
35 Click the expression FX 10 kip,ft {FX 44.5 kN,m} in the Load & Definition
dialog.

Assigning Loads
36 Click the Use Cursor To Assign radio button followed by the Assign button.
37 Click on the 13 nodes shown in the figure below, and then click the
Assigning button to toggle the assigning mode off.
Warning: It is important to remember to toggle off the Assigning mode after

assigning loads, to avoid unintentionally assigning loads by clicking
in the structure for some other purpose later.

Assigning Loads
Proper Loading to Incorporate P-Delta Effects

Consider a column of length L that has two concentrated loads applied at the top
of the column: a vertical load P and a horizontal load H. According to a linear
elastic analysis, the reactions at the base of the column for these two loads are a
vertical reaction of magnitude P, a horizontal reaction of magnitude H and a
moment equal to H*L as shown in the figure below.
A linear elastic analysis assumes that the result of Loads A and B acting
concurrently is equivalent to the result of Load A plus the result of Load B.

Assigning Loads
However, some design codes do not permit the linear-elastic type of analysis,
because they acknowledge the P - Delta effect, and require that it be taken into
account.
In a real structure, the horizontal force H might be caused by a wind load or

earthquake load, causing the column to deflect a distance Δ. The vertical force P
might represent a gravity load. So, in reality, these load cases would act
concurrently, not independent of each other.
During this simultaneous action of the two loads, while the column is deflecting
due to the action of the horizontal load, the position of the vertical load P shifts a
distance Δ. When this happens, the vertical load no longer acts through the
centerline of the column. Instead, it acts at some distance from the column
centerline, which introduces a moment in the column, and a moment reaction at
the base of the column equal to P * Δ. The total moment reaction at the base of
the column is now (H * L) + (P * Δ) as shown in the figure below.
Note: The additional component of moment, P * Δ is not apparent in a linear -elastic

analysis.

Assigning Loads
When considering the equations of static equilibrium, the quantity (P * Δ) is not

actually seen in the “applied load” side of the equation, but appears in the
reaction side of the equation. This is a linear - inelastic analysis. In this type of
analysis, it is not correct to simply take the combination of the results of Load A
plus the results of Load B.
• The results of Load A just give a reaction P.
• The results of Load B just give a reaction H * L.
Looking at these two load cases in isolation, the P - Delta effect never becomes
apparent. It is only when these two load cases act concurrently that the P - Delta
effect is produced. Consequently, the traditional linear-elastic load combination,
which sums the results of independently analyzed load cases, does not reveal the
P - Delta value.
For this reason, the next step in the example model is to create a third load case
that combines the first two load cases. This new load case uses a method of
combining loads that makes it possible to correctly account for the P-Delta effect
by applying the horizontal and vertical loads concurrently.
To accomplish this, STAAD.Pro provides another type of primary load called a

Repeat Load. This serves as an instruction to STAAD.Pro to consider the
constituent load cases as acting concurrently, and with any necessary load factors
applied to them.
Using Repeat Loads is a two-step process. First, a new load case must be created.
Then the Repeat Load item can be added to the load case and used to identify the
constituent load cases and their respective factors.
 Exercise: Create a Repeat Load Case

1 Ensure that the file named Concrete Design 8.std is still open.
2 Click on Load Cases Details in the Load & Definition dialog, and then click
the Add button. The Primary item is active by default in the Add New:
Load Cases dialog, and the Number automatically increments to 3.
3 Type the name FACTORED COMBO in the Title field.
4 Leave the Loading Type set to None.
5 Click the Add button, but do not close this dialog yet.

Assigning Loads
6 Click on the expression 3: FACTORED COMBO in the Load & Definition

dialog.
7 Click the Repeat Load tab in the Add New: Load Items dialog. The Repeat
Load item is active by default.
The left side of this dialog lists the existing Available Load Cases and the
right side displays the Repeat Load Definition.
Loads can be moved back and forth between the Available Load Cases on
the left and the Repeat Load Definition on the right using the arrow
buttons.
The Factor field is available to apply factors to individual load cases that
comprise the Repeat Load Definition.
8 Click on 1: GRAVITY LOAD in the Available Load Cases list.
9 Click the single right arrow button to move the load to the Repeat Load
Definition list.
10 Since the design in this example is based on the ACI code, the loads should
be factored, so enter a Factor of 1.2.
11 Click on 2: LATERAL LOAD in the Available Load Cases list.
12 Click the single right arrow button.
13 Enter a Factor of 1.6, and click the Add button.
14 Click the Close button. The new Repeat Load case is shown in the Load &
Load Definition dialog. The syntax is load case 1 with a factor of 1.2 and
load case 2 with a factor of 1.6.
Hint: Remember to always use Repeat Loads, rather than “results

combinations”, any time a P - Delta analysis is performed.

Providing Analysis Instructions to Incorporate P-Delta Effects

The next step is to issue the analysis instructions from the Analysis sub-tab of the
Analysis/Print tab.
The PDelta Analysis tab includes a field labeled Number of Iterations, and a field
labeled Converge. If a Number of Iterations, n, is specified, then STAAD.Pro
iterates n times.
An alternative to specifying a Number of Iterations is to use the Converge option.

When the Converge checkbox is selected, STAAD.Pro continues to iterate and
compare joint displacements until a convergence displacement tolerance is
satisfied.
There are two convergence methodologies to choose from. The first option uses
the SET DISPLACEMENT f command to specify the convergence tolerance. If the
Euclidean norm RMS displacement of two consecutive iterations changes less
than the value specified for f, then that load case is considered to have converged.
Note: The default tolerance is maximum span of structure divided by 120. This default
value was not intended to suggest an “optimum” value. It was merely put in
place to allow the engineer to apply an appropriate value for the structure
under consideration based on engineering judgment.
Hint: The convergence tolerance for the Euclidean norm is difficult to know, so the
following option may prove to be the preferred method, because it is easier to
use.
The second option uses the SET PDELTA TOL ftol command to specify the
convergence tolerance. If the maximum change in displacement from two
consecutive iterations is less than the value specified for ftol, then that load case
is considered to have converged.
Note: Default value for ftol is 0.01 inch.
In addition to the convergence methodologies, the Converge option also offers

the option to specify a maximum number of iterations, “m”. If “m” is specified,
the analysis stops after that iteration even if convergence has not been achieved.
If convergence is achieved in fewer than “m” iterations, the analysis stops at that
time.

In previous versions, it was suggested that a minimum number of iterations

should always be run to prevent false convergence; however there is logic in the
current program to prevent premature convergence when the CONVERGE option
is used. The important thing is to set an appropriate convergence tolerance.
If the CONVERGE option is not used, then good practice dictates:

• Specify a Number of Iterations that is high enough to prove that the structure
is stable (typically 30 to 35).
• Perform some manual sensitivity analysis to ensure that displacements have
converged by varying the number of iterations and observing the effect on the
displacements.
 Exercise: Provide PDelta Analysis and LOAD LIST commands

1 Keep the current file open or open the file named Concrete Design 9.std.
2 Click the Analysis/Print tab in the Page Control.
3 Click the PDelta Analysis tab in the Analysis/Print Commands dialog.
4 Enter 35 in the Number of Iterations field.
5 Leave all other options at their default settings, and click Add followed by
Close.
Hint: The upcoming sections provide instructions to add concrete design

commands to the model. In anticipation of adding those commands,
let's assume that we want to limit the concrete designs to only be based
on the factored load condition created in the form of a Repeat Load
above. A LOAD LIST is available for this purpose, and while it could be
inserted later, it would be more convenient to add it now.
6 Click the Post-Print sub-tab in the Page Control.
7 Click the Define Commands button in the Post Analysis Print dialog. The
Load List tab is active by default.
8 Click the line that refers to 3:FACTORED COMBO.
9 Click the single right arrow icon to move the selected Load Case to the
Load List pane on the right side of the dialog.
10 Click Add followed by Close.

Reinforced Concrete Slab Design

The next step is to perform a reinforced concrete slab design from the Concrete
sub-tab of the Design tab.
 Exercise: Perform a Reinforced Concrete Slab Design

1 Keep the current file open, or open the file named Concrete Design
10.std.
Note: The Design tab logically follows the Analysis/Print tab. This follows the
program methodology of suggesting a logical workflow process by the
order in which the Page Control tabs are organized.
3 Click on the Concrete sub-tab in the Page Control.
Note: The Current Code list appears in the top right corner of the Concrete
Design-Whole Structure dialog (simply referred to as the Concrete
Design dialog from this point forward). The Code list offers the choice of
designing using many different codes.
4 Make sure that the Current Code is set to ACI.
Note: All of the concrete design parameters currently appear in the Selected
Parameters list on the right-hand side of the Parameter Selection dialog.
These are all of the parameters associated with a standard reinforced
concrete design for the selected code, such as: compressive strength of
concrete, yield strength of reinforcing steel, clear cover along the
bottom, sides and top of beams, etc. The Parameter Selection dialog is
convenient to control which concrete design parameters are listed and
available for use when the Define Parameters button is used. For the
slab design, we only need a small subset of the available parameters, so
we can reduce the length of the list of parameters in the Design
Parameters list.
6 Click the double-left arrow to temporarily move all parameters to the
Available Parameters list.
7 Press and hold the Control (Ctrl) key, and then click on the following
parameters in the Available Parameters list: Clb, Clt, and Fc.

8 Release the Control (Ctrl) key, click the single-right arrow to move all three
selected parameters to the Selected Parameters list, and then click OK.
9 Click the Define Parameters button. The Design Parameters dialog lists
only the parameters we selected.
10 The CLB item is active by default. This is the parameter that is used to
specify the clear cover for the outermost bottom reinforcement. Observe
the units that are currently indicated. It would be preferable to use units
of inches {mm} when specifying these parameters. If the units are
currently set to something other than inches {mm}, the steps below
indicate how to change the current input units:
• Click the Close button to dismiss the Design Parameters sub-dialog.
• Click the Menu Bar item Tools > Set Current Input Unit.
• Click the Inch {Millimeter} radio button, and then click OK.
• Click the Define Parameters button once again, and note that the units
for the CLB parameter are now in inches {mm}.
Note: The value of the CLB parameter is currently 1.5 inches {38.1 mm}. We
are seeing this parameter for the very first time, so it is showing the
default value. All parameters have a default value. It is only necessary to
assign a parameter to a member(s) if the value of the parameter differs
from the default value. Otherwise, STAAD.Pro just uses the default
value.
Note: For this exercise, we want STAAD.Pro to consider a clear cover of ¾ in

{19 mm} for both the top and bottom of the slab.
11 Enter 0.75 in {19 mm} in the input field for the CLB parameter, and then
click the Add button.
Note: Some new lines of text appear in the Concrete Design window in the
Data Area. These represent the parameter that was just defined, along
with a reference to the selected Code and units. The graphic icon in
front of the CLB parameter reminds us that it must be assigned to
specific members in order to have any effect on the model. This is done
in an upcoming step.
12 In the Design Parameters dialog, click the CLT parameter.
13 Enter 0.75 in {19 mm} in the input field for the CLT parameter, and then
click the Add button.

14 Click the FC parameter, and note that the default value is 4 kip/in2
{equivalent to 27.58 MPa}. The intent is to use this default value in the
design, so nothing needs to be done with this parameter.
Note: The yield strength parameters for main and secondary reinforcing were
not selected. In this example, the default value of 60 ksi {413.69 MPa} is
used for these parameters.
15 Click Close to dismiss the Design Parameters dialog.
16 Click the line corresponding to the CLB parameter in the Concrete Design
dialog.
17 Click the Menu Bar item Select > By All > All Plates.
18 Ensure that the Assignment Method is set to Assign to Selected Beams/
Plates, then click the Assign button and confirm with Yes.
19 Repeat the same procedure to assign the CLT parameter to all plates.
Note: This completes the assignment of Design Parameters. The next step is to
add the actual concrete design command.
20 Click the Commands button in the Concrete Design dialog.
21 Click the DESIGN SLAB/ELEMENT item.
22 Click the Add button, and then click Close. The Design Slab/Element tab is
used to add the command for designing individual plate elements for two-
way flexural moments (Mx and My).
Note: The new command appears in the Command Tree in the Concrete
Design dialog.
Note: The next step is to assign the design command to specific plate
elements. For the purposes of this example, and to limit the quantity of
output, the Design Slab/Element command is only assigned to plate
292.
23 Click the DESIGN ELEMENT command in the Concrete Design dialog.
24 Click the Assign To Edit List option in the Assignment Method category.

25 Enter 292 in the Edit List, and then click Assign. This assigns the DESIGN
ELEMENT command to the plate highlighted in the figure below.
26 Click the Menu Bar item Analyze > Run Analysis.

27 Click Save in the Warning pop-up dialog.
28 Click View Output File in the STAAD Analysis and Design dialog, and then
click Done.
29 Click the RESULTS bar in the lower left corner of the STAAD Output Viewer
window, and then click the item in the left pane that says CONCRETE
DESIGN. This is a link that jumps directly to the location of the concrete
design results in the output file.
The next section provides an annotated interpretation of the slab design results.

Understanding Reinforced Concrete Slab Design Results

The Element Design Summary appears on page 7 of the output file. See the
numbered items below for a description of the output items.
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY
----------------------
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y

(SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT) (SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT
Item 1
FY: 60.000 KSI FC: 4.000 KSI COVER (TOP): 0.750 IN
COVER (BOTTOM): 0.750 IN TH: 12.000 IN
292 TOP : Longitudinal direction - Only minimum steel required.
292 TOP : Transverse direction Item
- Only minimum steel required. 2
292 BOTT: Transverse direction - Only minimum steel required.
292 TOP : 0.259 0.00 / 0 0.259 0.00
BOTT: 0.662 31.30 / 3 0.259 7.36
Item 3
Item 4
1 Item 1: Material properties, clear cover, and thickness of the element

being designed.
2 Item 2: Indication that some reinforcing steel ratios were controlled by
code-minimum limits for both directions of the top reinforcing and for the
transverse direction in the bottom reinforcing.
Note: For element design, “longitudinal” refers to the direction parallel to a

plate's local x axis, and “transverse” refers to the direction parallel to a
plate's local y axis. Refer to the diagram below.

• Mx is the Bending Moment on the local x face. The local x-face is the
face perpendicular to the local x-axis.
• My is the Bending Moment on the local y face. The local y-face is the
face perpendicular to the local y-axis.
3 Item 3: Design results for the top reinforcing. The headings on the table
provide the key to the columns of data, which are presented in the
following order:
• Longitudinal reinforcing requirements in units of reinforcing area per
unit width of slab.
• Mx moment in units of moment per unit width of slab. (This is the
moment on the x face of the element.)
• Load condition that generated the controlling Mx design moment.
• Transverse reinforcing requirements in units of reinforcing area per
unit width of slab.
• My moment in units of moment per unit width of slab. (This is the
moment on the y face of the element.)
• Load condition that generated the controlling My design moment.
4 Item 4: Design results for the bottom reinforcing with all of the same
information as described above.
Close the STAAD Output Viewer to prepare for the next section.

Reinforced Concrete Beam Design

Next we explore the reinforced concrete beam design capabilities in STAAD.Pro.
Note: It is possible to request designs of slabs, beams, and columns in a single

STAAD.Pro model. But for clarity, the slab design parameters and commands
that we entered in the previous exercise have been removed from the dataset
file we are about to open.
 Exercise: Perform a Reinforced Concrete Beam Design

1 Open the file named Concrete Design 11.std.
2 Click the Design tab in the Page Control, and then click the Concrete sub-
tab.
3 Make sure that Current Code is set to ACI.
parameters in the Available Parameters list: Depth, Maxmain, and Track.
7 Release the Control (Ctrl) key, click the single-right arrow to move the
8 Click the Define Parameters button. The Design Parameters dialog now
lists only the parameters selected in the previous step.
Note: The DEPTH item is active by default. This is the parameter that can be
used to indicate that a beam section has been specified deeper than the
actual effective reinforced beam section.
For instance, a beam may be deeper than structurally necessary due to

architectural or detailing reasons. In this case, it is convenient to specify
the actual beam dimensions so that the self-weight is calculated
correctly, but the actual dimensions may not be representative of the
actual rebar location for a beam like this. The Depth command could be
used in a case like this to indicate to STAAD.Pro that it should consider
the depth to be shallower than the overall dimensions when the design
is performed.

This parameter specifies the value that is traditionally referred to as “h”

in concrete design, not “d”. The “d” value is calculated by deducting the
clear cover (and stirrup rebar size if applicable) from the YD dimension
of a concrete beam, or from the depth specified by the Depth
command, if it is used.
9 Enter 18 in {450 mm} in the input field and click Add. When we assign this
parameter to a particular beam, STAAD.Pro considers the depth of that
beam to be 18 inches {450 mm} instead of the overall depth of the
specified Property when calculating the location of the working
reinforcing.
10 Click MAXMAIN in the Design Parameters dialog. This parameter defines
the maximum permissible rebar size for main reinforcement.
11 Enter a value of 8 {25} in this field to limit the maximum bar size to #8 {25
mm}, and then click Add.
12 Click TRACK in the Design Parameters dialog. This parameter is used to
select the level of detail to be provided in the output.
13 Click the (2) radio button corresponding to the highest level of output
detail, and then click Add, followed by Close.
Note: The newly added parameters appear in the Concrete Design dialog. They
are preceded by question marks in the list, implying that they have been
added, but not yet assigned.
14 Click the line in the Concrete Design dialog corresponding to the DEPTH
parameter.
15 Ensure that the Assignment Method is set to Assign To Edit List.

16 Enter 125 in the Edit List, and then click the Assign button. This assigns the
DEPTH parameter to the beam shown highlighted in the figure below.
125
17 Click the line corresponding to the MAXMAIN parameter in the Concrete

Design dialog.

19 Enter 125 126 (with a space between 125 and 126) in the Edit List, and
then click the Assign button. This assigns the MAXMAIN parameter to the
beams shown highlighted in the figure below.
125 126
20 Click the line corresponding to the TRACK parameter in the Concrete

Design dialog.
22 Enter 125 126 in the Edit List, and then click the Assign button. This
assigns the TRACK parameter to the beams shown highlighted in the figure
above.
Note: The Design Beam item is active by default. The Design Beam item is used
to add the command for performing reinforcement calculations for
flexure, shear and torsion (Mz, Fy and Mx).
24 Click the Add button followed by Close.
Note: The next step is to assign the design command to the appropriate
members. For the purposes of this example, and to limit the quantity of
output, the Design command is only be assigned to two representative
beams.
25 Click the DESIGN BEAM command in the Concrete Design dialog.


27 Enter 125 126 in the Edit List, and then click the Assign button.
28 Click the Menu Bar item Analyze > Run Analysis.
click Done.
window, and then click the CONCRETE DESIGN item in the left pane. This is
a link that jumps directly to the location of the concrete design results in
the output file.
Understanding Reinforced Concrete Beam Design Results

Scroll down in the output file and locate the beginning of the design output for
BEAM NO. 125. The first line of data in the beam design output echoes the beam
dimensions and material properties. Note that the size of beam 125 is indicated to
be 16.00 x 18.00 inches {400 x 450 mm}, because the Depth 18 {Depth 450}
parameter was applied to a beam that was defined to be 16 x 20 inches {400 x 500
mm}.
==========================================================
BEAM NO. 125 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE A
LEN - 30.00FT. FY - 60000. FC - 4000. SIZE - 16.00 X 1
The next section provides geometric information about the layer of rebar that
occurs near the bottom of the beam. See the descriptions corresponding to the
numbered items in the figure below.
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO
FT. IN. FT. IN. FT. IN.
___________________________________________________________
1 0 + 2-3/8 7-NUM.5 0 + 0-0/0 23 +10-5/8
Item 1 Item 3 Item 5


1 Item 1: Rebar Level number - starting with bottom layer first.

2 Item 2: Height from the bottom of the “effective beam” to the centroid of
the rebar at this level. The “effective beam” is the defined size of the
section Property, unless a DEPTH and/or WIDTH parameter have been
applied, in which case the dimensions of the “effective beam” take on the
values assigned by the DEPTH and/or WIDTH parameters.
Note: In this instance, 0'-2 3/8” can be calculated as 1½” clear cover plus ½” for
a #4 stirrup, plus 5/16” for half of a #5 longitudinal bar for a total of 2 5/
16” rounded to 2 3/8”. {In metric units, 59 mm can be calculated as
approximately 38 mm clear cover plus 12 mm for the stirrup, plus 8 mm
for half of a 16 mm longitudinal bar for a total of approximately 59 mm.}
Bear in mind that in beam 125 where a DEPTH parameter has been
used, the centroid of the first layer of steel is actually 20" - 18" + 2 3/8”
= 4 3/8” {500 mm - 450 mm + 59 mm = 109 mm} above the bottom
surface of the 20" {500 mm} deep section.
3 Item 3: Number and size of rebar required by design.
4 Item 4: Starting location of the rebar at this level, measured from the
starting node of the beam.
5 Item 5: Ending location of the rebar at this level, measured from the
starting node of the beam.
6 Item 6: Indication as to whether or not the rebar at this level is considered
to be fully-developed (as with a standard hook or full development length
projection) at the start (STA) and end (END) of the rebar.
Below the line of geometric data pertaining to the first layer of rebar is a dashed
box. It contains the design information for the first layer of rebar including:
• Magnitude and location of the critical (design) moment
• The load case that produces the critical moment
• Area of rebar required by the design
• Actual, maximum, and minimum reinforcing ratios
• Maximum, minimum, and actual rebar spacing
• Required development length
A single line of text below the dashed box reports the cracked moment of inertia
at the location of the design moment.

Subsequent levels of rebar are described in the same manner. In this beam, there
is negative moment at both ends, so there is a second level of rebar required near
the top of the beam as indicated in the figure below.
2 1 + 3-1/2 3-NUM.5 0 + 0-0/0 1 +11-1/8
|----------------------------------------------------------
| CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 58.17 KIP-FT AT 0.00 FT, LOA
| REQD STEEL= 0.85 IN2, RHO=0.0034, RHOMX=0.0214 RHOMN=0
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 10.00/ 1.62/ 5.69 INCH
| REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 14.23 INCH
|----------------------------------------------------------
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1339.
3 1 + 3-3/8 5-NUM.7 20 + 3-5/8 30 + 0-0/0

|----------------------------------------------------------
| CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 177.01 KIP-FT AT 30.00 FT, LOA
| REQD STEEL= 2.81 IN2, RHO=0.0113, RHOMX=0.0214 RHOMN=0
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 10.00/ 1.88/ 2.78 INCH
| REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 39.17 INCH
|----------------------------------------------------------
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 3330.
Note: The second level of rebar is being designed for a critical negative moment of
58.17 kip-ft {75.09 kN-m} at the starting end, and 177.05 kip-ft {228.64 kN-m}
at the ending end.
The rebar being designed for the negative moment at the starting end is 3 - #5 {5 -
12 mm} bars that extend from the starting end to a location 1' - 11 1/8” {0.444 m}
from the starting end. The anchorage labels indicate that this rebar is assumed to
be anchored (hooked or otherwise fully developed) at the starting end, so it
would be important to detail these bars in such a way as to validate this
assumption. The anchorage labels indicate that this rebar is not assumed to be
anchored at the termination at the opposite end, implying that a straight
development length has already been incorporated into the cut-off location.
The rebar being designed for the negative moment at the ending end is 5 - #7 {6 -
20 mm} bars that start at a location 20' - 3 5/8” {5.905 m} from the starting end
and extend all the way to the end of the 30' - 0" {9.0 m} long beam. The
anchorage labels indicate that this rebar is not assumed to be anchored at the 20'
- 3 5/8” {5.905 m} location, implying that a straight development length has
already been incorporated into the cut-off location. The anchorage labels indicate

that this rebar is assumed to be anchored (fully developed) at the ending end, so
it would be important to detail these bars in such a way as to validate this
assumption (lap with bars on other side of girder, etc.).
A Required Reinforcing Steel Summary is provided to indicate reinforcing steel

requirements, design moments, and controlling load condition at increments
along the length of the beam. In this example, Load Case 3 is the only one
referenced, because a LOAD LIST command was used to limit the design to only
consider Load Case 3.
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY :
-------------------------------
SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD
(FEET) (SQ. INCH) (KIP-FEET)
0.00 0.000/ 0.864 0.00/ 58.17

2.50 0.109/ 0.000 7.55/ 0.00
5.00 0.885/ 0.000 59.52/ 0.00
7.50 1.486/ 0.000 97.74/ 0.00
10.00 1.886/ 0.000 122.21/ 0.00
12.50 2.066/ 0.000 132.94/ 0.00
15.00 2.015/ 0.000 129.91/ 0.00
17.50 1.736/ 0.000 113.13/ 0.00
20.00 1.244/ 0.000 82.60/ 0.00
22.50 0.563/ 0.000 38.32/ 0.00
25.00 0.000/ 0.287 0.00/ 19.71
27.50 0.000/ 1.386 0.00/ 91.49
30.00 0.000/ 2.835 0.00/ 177.01
Note: There are likely to be subtle differences in the reinforcing steel areas reported
by the Design Results section and the Required Reinforcing Steel Summary due
to a difference in the way the required reinforcing steel areas are calculated in
the two locations.
In the Design Results section, the program iterates until the effective depth
used to calculate the area of steel required is the value based on the actual bars
being provided. So, if the steel provided says 7 NUM 5 for the midspan region,
the effective depth is based on the arrangement of seven #5 bars.
In the Required Reinforcing Steel Summary, on the other hand, there is no

actual bar arrangement being calculated. The program assumes the effective
depth based on the clear cover, an assumed stirrup size and an assumed

longitudinal bar size. Based on the assumed effective depth, the program then
calculates the area of steel required.
Since the effective depth could be different in these two calculation methods,
this could lead to differences in the required areas of steel reported by the two
methods.
The next section of output presents the shear design for the starting end and the
ending end of beam 125.
B E A M N O. 125 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 26.20 KIP Vc= 35.23 KIP Vs= 0.00
Tu= 11.87 KIP-FT Tc= 4.82 KIP-FT Ts= 15.82 KIP-FT LOAD
STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1.
PROVIDE NUM. 4 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 6.8 IN. C/C FOR 164. IN.
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =
AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 34.12 KIP Vc= 31.86 KIP Vs= 13.63
Tu= 11.87 KIP-FT Tc= 4.82 KIP-FT Ts= 15.82 KIP-FT LOAD
STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR SHEAR AND TORSION.
PROVIDE NUM. 4 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 6.8 IN. C/C FOR 164. IN.
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =
The shear designs incorporate the effects of both shear and torsion in beams, and
indicate any required stirrups and additional longitudinal reinforcing.

Diagrams of the elevation view and sections through the beam are provided next.
The diagrams schematically show the top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement
and the stirrups. See the itemized descriptions corresponding to the numbered
items in the figure below.
___ 65J____________________ 360.X 16.X 18_____________________ 67J__

| Item 4 Item 5
||=== =======================
| 3#5 H 15. 0.TO 23. 5#7 H |15. 244.TO 360
| 26#4 C/C 7 Item 6 Item 7 | | | | |26#4 C/C 7
| 7#5 H 2. 0.TO 287. | | | | |
||===========================================================
|
Item 8
|_________________________________________________________________________
_____________ _____________ _____________ ___________
Item 9 | | | | | | | Item 10
| ooo | | | | | | ooooo
| 3#5 | | | | | | 5#7
| | | | | | |
| 7#5 | | 7#5 | | 7#5 | |
| ooooooo | | ooooooo | | ooooooo | |
| | | | | | |
Item 11 |_____________| |_____________| |_____________| |___________
1 Item1: Starting Joint number

2 Item 2: Beam length x width x “effective height”
3 Item 3: Ending Joint number
4 Item 4: Top longitudinal reinforcing at the starting end
Note: The syntax is 3 - #5 Horizontal bars at approximately the 15-inch height,

running from 0 to 23 inches.
5 Item 5: Top longitudinal reinforcing at the ending end
6 Item 6: Stirrups at the starting end
Note: The syntax is 26 - #4 stirrups at a center-to-center spacing of

approximately 7 inches.
7 Item 7: Stirrups at the ending end
8 Item 8: Bottom longitudinal reinforcing at the starting end

Note: The syntax is 7 - #5 Horizontal bars at approximately the 2-inch height,

running from 0 to 287 inches.
9 Item 9: Top longitudinal reinforcing at the starting end shown in section
10 Item 10: Top longitudinal reinforcing at the ending end shown in section
11 Item 11: Bottom longitudinal reinforcing at the starting end shown in
section
The next section provides design output for beam number 126. The item worthy
of note here is that beam 126 is indicated to be 16.00 x 20.00 inches {400 x 500
mm}, because the Depth parameter was not applied to this beam. The full depth
of the section (as defined in the Properties dialog) is used in this case.
The bottom reinforcing for beam 126 is still indicated to be at a height of about 2
½” {59 mm}, as was the case with beam 125. But in the case of beam 126, this is
measured with respect to the bottom of the 20" {500 mm} deep beam, not an 18"
{450 mm} deep “effective beam”. This is also evidenced by the fact that the top
steel for beam 126 is indicated to be at a height of 1'-5 ½” {approximately 440
mm} where the top steel in beam 125 was located at a height of about 1'-3 ½”
{approximately 390 mm}.
Note: If we had requested reinforced concrete designs for three contiguous segments
of one of the girders, this batch mode of designing members could potentially
give a different design for each of the segments. Be aware of this behavior, and
consider using the RC Designer (covered in another module) for these kinds of
conditions.

Reinforced Concrete Column Design

Next we explore the reinforced concrete column design capabilities in STAAD.Pro.
 Exercise: Perform a Reinforced Concrete Column Design

2 Click the Design tab in the Page Control, and then click the Concrete sub-
tab.
parameters in the Available Parameters list: Maxmain, Reinf and Track.
7 Release the Control (Ctrl) key, click the single-right arrow to move the
8 Click the Define Parameters button. The MAXMAIN parameter is selected

by default in the Design Parameters dialog.
9 Enter a value of 8 {25} in this field to limit the maximum bar size to #8 {25
mm}, and then click Add.
10 Click REINF. This parameter is used to distinguish between Tied and Spiral
column reinforcing.
Note: The default is Tied, but the current model has both rectangular (tied)
and round (spirally reinforced) columns.
11 Click the (1) radio button to indicate a spirally reinforced column, and then
click Add.
12 Click TRACK in the Design Parameters dialog. This parameter is used to
select the level of detail to be provided in the output.
13 Click the (2) radio button corresponding to the highest level of output
detail, and then click Add, followed by Close.

Note: The next step is to assign the parameters to the appropriate column
members. The intent is to obtain designs for the two columns shown
highlighted in the figure below.
53 251
14 Click the line corresponding to the MAXMAIN parameter in the Concrete

Design dialog.
16 Enter 53 251 (with a space between 53 and 251) in the Edit List, and then
click the Assign button to assign the MAXMAIN parameter to both
columns.
17 Click the line corresponding to the REINF parameter in the Concrete
Design dialog.
Note: This parameter specifies Spiral reinforcing, so it must be applied to the

one circular column (member 251) for which we are requesting a
design. The default for this parameter is Tied, so it does not need to be
assigned to the rectangular column.
19 Enter 251 in the Edit List, and then click the Assign button.
20 Click the line corresponding to the TRACK parameter in the Concrete
Design dialog.


Note: Now that all of the necessary parameters have been assigned, we must
add and assign the command to initiate the design of the two columns.
24 Click the DESIGN COLUMN item. The Design Column tab is used to add the
command for designing for biaxial bending moments and axial force (My,
Mz and Fx).
26 Click the line in the tree view in the Concrete Design dialog that says
DESIGN COLUMN.
29 Click Analyze > Run Analysis.
click Done.
window, and then click the item in the left pane that says CONCRETE
DESIGN. This is a link that jumps directly to the location of the concrete
design results in the output file.

Understanding Reinforced Concrete Column Design Results

Scroll down in the output file and locate the beginning of the design output for
COLUMN NO. 53. Material and geometric properties are listed first.
COLUMN NO. 53 DESIGN PER ACI 318-05 - AXIAL +
FY - 60000 FC - 4000 PSI, SQRE SIZE - 18.00 X 18.00 I

AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 5.091 SQ. IN.
This is followed by bar configuration details.

BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATI
--------------------------------------------------
12 - NUMBER 6 1.630 3 STA

(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE)
TIE BAR NUMBER 4 SPACING 12.00 IN
Note: If the suggested bar configuration is undesirable, one approach is to

assign values with the MINMAIN and MAXMAIN parameters to bracket
the desired reinforcing size for the column.

Next is the data for the column interaction diagrams.

COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KIP-FT)
------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch)
1400.45 1120.36 496.19 333.34 8.06
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h
195.76 -316.80 1051.59 185.38 0.01259
------------------------------------------------------
COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KIP-FT)
------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch)
1400.45 1120.36 496.19 333.34 8.06
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h
195.76 -316.80 1051.59 2.30 0.00016
------------------------------------------------------
Pn Mn Pn Mn
| 1034.18 200.80 517.09 330.
P0 |* 948.00 233.12 430.91 328.
| * 861.81 260.76 344.73 319.
Pn,max|__* 775.63 283.47 258.54 302.
| * 689.45 302.07 172.36 272.
Pn | * 603.27 317.37 86.18 239.
NOMINAL| * Pn Mn Pn Mn
AXIAL| * 1034.18 200.80 517.09 330.
COMPRESSION| * 948.00 233.12 430.91 328.
Pb|-------*Mb 861.81 260.76 344.73 319.
| * 775.63 283.47 258.54 302.
___________|____*_______ 689.45 302.07 172.36 272.
| * M0 Mn, 603.27 317.37 86.18 239.
| * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT
|
The output file goes on to report the design results for the round column
(member 251) next.

Reinforced Concrete Take Off Command

The final command to explore is the Take Off command. Its purpose is to
summarize the quantity of concrete and reinforcing steel in the concrete entities
that have been designed.
The limitations of the command are that it only tabulates quantities for beams
and columns that have been designed, and it does not currently include material
take off quantities for elements (plates).
 Exercise: Perform a Reinforced Concrete Take-off

2 Click the Design tab, Concrete sub-tab in the Page Control.
Note: In this dataset file, the MAXMAIN parameter has been used to limit the
rebar size to a maximum of a number 8 {25 mm} bar in all beams and
columns. To simplify the demonstration of the TAKE OFF command, we
will not discuss any of the other specifications used above, such as the
REINF parameter for the two round columns. Also, design commands
have already been issued for beams, columns, and elements (plates).
5 Click the TAKE OFF item, and then click the Add button followed by Close.
6 Click the DESIGN COLUMN command in the Concrete Design dialog.
7 Click Select > Beams Parallel To > Y.
8 Ensure that the Assignment Method is set to Assign To Selected Beams.
Note: The take off command shows up in the tree view in the Concrete Design
dialog in the form of CONCRETE TAKE with a green checkmark. The
checkmark implies that it is already assigned.
10 Click Analyze > Run Analysis.
click Done.

Understanding Reinforced Concrete Take Off Results

Scroll down through all of the column and beam design results, and locate the
CONCRETE TAKE OFF results near the end of the output file.
************** CONCRETE TAKE OFF ********
(FOR BEAMS, COLUMNS AND PLATES DESIGNE
TOTAL VOLUME OF CONCRETE = 406.1 CU. Y
BAR SIZE WEIGHT

NUMBER (in lbs)
-------- --------
4 20653
5 7328
6 11534
7 7540
8 13107
------------
*** TOTAL= 60162
Note: Take Off Results Based on English Dataset.
Some important items to be aware of:

• The quantities only consider concrete entities that have actually been
designed.
• The volume of concrete is adjusted by deducting the volume of the reinforcing
steel from the gross concrete volume.
Close the STAAD Output Viewer.

Additional Concrete Modeling Examples
Additional Concrete Modeling Examples

The STAAD.Pro Examples manual contains several models that apply the principles
covered in this module to various real-world reinforced concrete structures. They
can be located by clicking Help > Contents > Application Examples.
• Example No. 8 illustrates concrete design performed on a space frame
structure, including computation of reinforcement for the beams and
columns. Secondary moments on the columns are obtained through the
means of a P - Delta analysis.
• Example No. 9 is another space frame structure that includes frame members
and finite elements (plates). The plates are used to model floor slabs and a
shear wall. Concrete design is performed on one of the elements.
• Example No. 10 shows how to model a water tank which is subjected to
hydrostatic pressure as the tank is filled.
• Example No. 18 demonstrates the calculation of principal stresses on a finite
element.
• Example No. 23 illustrates how to generate spring supports for a slab on
grade.
• Example No. 27 deals with a mat foundation subjected to loads that cause a
partial uplift.
The STAAD.Pro Examples manual is written in a very concise format. Its purpose is
not to illustrate the use of the graphic interface. Instead, each example explains,
line by line, the input file commands that are needed to correctly model the
proposed scenario. This format thoroughly explains the purpose for each
command, step by step, while presenting the entire example scenario in only a
few pages of text.
These examples also illustrate the most economical, efficient use of the input
command language. They provide an in-depth understanding of how the program
operates. Many times in this training course, actions that took many pages of text
and numerous pictures and diagrams to describe could very easily be replicated
with two or three lines of input command language.
The graphic interface is STAAD.Pro's “front end.” The input command file is its
“backbone.” Developing an understanding of the relationship between these two
aspects of the program leads to a real mastery of STAAD.Pro.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 When modeling plates in a reinforced concrete structure, how can you
guarantee monolithic behavior between the plates and the supporting
reinforced concrete beams?
2 Use the following figure to describe STAAD.Pro's convention for orienting
the axes of a plate element?
• The quadrilateral plate was drawn in the order A - B - C - D.
• The triangular plate was drawn in the order A - B - C.
3 In STAAD.Pro, the only specification that can be assigned to nodes is the

Master/Slave specification. What is the Master/Slave specification?
• True
• False

Module Review
Answers
1 When modeling plates in a reinforced concrete structure, how can you
guarantee monolithic behavior between the plates and the supporting
reinforced concrete beams?
The beams must be subdivided at exactly the same points as the slab.
The nodes that occur at the subdivisions must be common to the
incidences of the beams and the slab elements.
STAAD.Pro has the following tools that may be utilized in certain modeling
configurations to split beams:
• Split member if new node is added on the member checkbox, available
from the Tolerance item of the Options dialog (from the main menu
bar item View > Options…)
• Break Beams at Selected Nodes tool (from the main menu bar item
Geometry > Break Beams as Selected Node)
2 Use the following figure to describe STAAD.Pro's convention for orienting
the axes of a plate element?
The orientation of the local coordinate system axes for plates is
determined as follows:
• The local x-axis is defined to be parallel to the vector pointing from A to
B.
• The cross-product of vectors AB and AC defines a vector parallel to the
local z-axis, i.e., z = AB x AC. The z-axis is normal to the plate surface.
• The cross-product of vectors z and x defines a vector parallel to the
local y-axis, i.e., y = z cross x. (Both the x and the y axes always lie in the
plane of the plate.)
• The origin of the axes is at the center (average) of the 4 node locations
(3 node locations for a triangle).
3 In STAAD.Pro, the only specification that can be assigned to nodes is the
Master/Slave specification. What is the Master/Slave specification?
True
The general purpose for a Master/Slave specification is to define a
constraint of some sort that requires “slaved” nodes to translate and/or
rotate the same amount as some “master” node. Any combinations of the
six available degrees of freedom can be slaved to a master node.

Exercise Problems
Module Overview
This module contains nine example problems that will reinforce the Fundamental
STAAD.Pro skills that you have learned up to this point.
• Familiarity with model generation and property assignment techniques in
STAAD.Pro
• Familiarity with analysis commands and post-processing functions of
STAAD.Pro
• Familiarity with basic steel and concrete design commands in STAAD.Pro
Module Objectives
• Reinforce your Fundamental STAAD.Pro skills.
May-10 349 Exercise Problems

Exercise Problem One
Exercise Problem One

Create the geometry of the structure shown in the figures below.
9 ft {3 m}
9 ft {3 m}
Isometric View of the Entire Structure
Note: The supports and dimension lines are shown for information only.
Y
X
10 ft
{3 m}
15 ft 15 ft 15 ft 15 ft 15 ft 15 ft
{5 m} {5 m} {5 m} {5 m} {5 m} {5 m}
Dimensions of one of the Side Trusses
Hints:
• In the Run Structure Wizard option of the Geometry menu, create a Pratt
Truss with the overall dimensions shown above.
• Bring it into the main drawing.
• Delete the unwanted members.
• Split the cross members at the bottom, and connect them at the split points.
Exercise Problems 350 May-10

Exercise Problem Two

Create the geometry of the structure shown in the figure below.
Isometric View of Entire Structure
Note: The supports and dimension lines are shown for information only.

Method 1 Hints:
• In the Geometry menu, select Snap/Grid Node - Beam. Set the plane of the
grid to XZ.
• Draw the outer triangle of the bottom level. Split the 2 members at their
midpoints, and add a beam between the 2 new points.
• Use Geometry > Translational Repeat to create the upper triangle.
Remember to switch on Link Steps to connect the 2 levels using vertical
members.
• Using Geometry > Add Beam, draw the diagonals.
• Split the diagonals and connect them at the split points.
• Using Geometry > Add Beam, draw the remaining members.
Method 2 Hints:
• In the Geometry menu, select Snap/Grid Node - Beam. Set the plane of the
grid to XY. Calculate the angle of the vertex of the bottom triangle, and set the
angle of the plane to be half that value about YY.
• Draw one of the vertical side faces of the structure. Use Geometry > Circular
Repeat - Copy mode to create the other face. Remember to switch on Link
Steps while circular repeating.
• Add the rest of the members, and split and connect as necessary.

Exercise Problem Three

Create the model of the structure shown in the figures below, and assign the
following data.
Basic data for the structure:
ATTRIBUTE DATA
Member Properties W12x26 for all members
Material Constants E, Density, Poisson - Default value for steel
Supports Fixed supports as shown
Loads 2 primary load cases as shown. Load case 3 should
combine 1 & 2, with a factor of 1.
Analysis Type Linear Static (PERFORM ANALYSIS)
Results Produce a report containing the following items:
• Support Reactions for Load 3.
• Bending Moment Diagram for Load 3 with the
maximum values annotated.
• Node Deflection Diagram for Load 3 with the resultant
values annotated.

Isometric View of Structure (English Units)
Isometric View of Structure (Metric Units)

Connection Data: Moments MY and MZ released
Note: At junction points where horizontals, verticals and bracing members meet, it is
sufficient for this exercise to apply the releases only on the horizontal
members.

Load 1: Distributed Member Loads
Load 2: Lateral Forces along Global X

Exercise Problem Four

Create the model of the steel tower shown in the figures below. Perform the
analysis, followed by a member selection, re-analysis, and a code check on the
members to determine if they pass the AISC ASD code requirements.

ATTRIBUTE DATA
Groups 3 groups to be formed: _VERTICAL, _HORIZONTAL,
_BRACING
Member Properties Vertical Members: W10x49
Horizontal Members: W8x28
Bracing Members: L3x3x1/4 Single Angle
Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity: 30,000 ksi {207,000 MPa}
Additional Member Bracing members to be declared TRUSS type.
Specifications
Supports Pinned supports as shown in earlier figure.
Load Case 1 Equipment Load:
2 kips {9 kN} concentrated force at midpoint of roof-level
beams. Use the Member Load - Concentrated force option
to do this.

Load Case 2 Walkway Live Load:

300 lbs/ft {4.4 kN/m} distributed load on intermediate
level beams.
Load Case 3 Load in X direction on Windward Face:

1.2 kips {5 kN} as shown.

Load Case 4 Case 1 + Case 2 + Case 3 (LOAD COMBINATION type)

Analysis Type Linear Elastic (PERFORM ANALYSIS)
Steel Design Yield strength of steel: 40 ksi {275 MPa}
Parameters
Steel Design Perform a member selection for the entire structure.
Operation
Grouping Group members after selection according to their group
names.
Reanalyze
Code Check Perform a code check for the entire structure.

Exercise Problem Five

The concrete frame shown in the figures below should be modeled and analyzed.
Following the analysis, perform a concrete design for the beams, columns and
slab per the ACI 318 code as explained below.


Basic Data for the structure:
ATTRIBUTE DATA
Cross Section • Interior Circular Columns: 30 ft {9 m} tall,
Properties 28 in {700 mm} diameter
• Exterior Rectangular Columns: 20 ft {6 m} tall,
36 in {900 mm} depth (YD), 24 in {600 mm} width (ZD)
• Plate Thickness: 8 inches {200 mm}
Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity, Density, Poisson: Default value for
Concrete
Additional Member None (Program Defaults)
Specifications
(Releases, Offsets,
etc.)
Supports Fixed Supports as shown in earlier figure.
Loads • Load Case 1: Dead Load - Self Weight
• Load Case 2: Live Load - Pressure load on plates,
200 lbs/ft2 {9.5 kN/m2} acting globally downward
• Load Case 3: Wind Load in X direction on roof -
200 lbs/ft2 {9.5 kN/m2) acting in positive global X
direction (on both slopes)
• Load Case 4: Combination Case - Case 1 + Case 2 +
Case 3 (Use REPEAT LOAD)
Analysis Type PDelta

Concrete Design
1 Design the beam shown.
2 Design the columns shown.

3 Design the element shown.

Exercise Problem Six

The tower shown below is supported by six cables. Analyze the structure for 3
load cases, as explained.
1165.36 in
{2960 cm}
1165.36 in
{2960 cm}
1165.36 in
{2960 cm}
Isometric View

600 in
{1524 cm}
600 in
{1524 cm}
Cable Connection Levels
60 in
{1524 mm}
60 in
{1524 mm}
Typical Segment in Elevation

60 in
{1524 mm}
60 in
{1524 mm} 60 in
{1524 mm}
Typical Segment in Isometric View
60 in {1524 mm}
60 in
{1524 mm}
60 in {1524 mm}
Plan View of Typical Level

60° Origin (0, 0, 0)

30 in
{762 mm}
30 in 17.32 in 34.64 in
{762 mm} {440 mm} {880 mm}
60°
3
Details of Typical Level
ATTRIBUTE DATA
Member Properties • All components of town: Pipe section 24 in {600 mm}
OD, 22 in {550 mm} ID
• Cables: 1 sq. in {650 mm2} cross section area
Material Properties Default values for steel
Cable Initial Tension 3000 lbs {13.3 kN}
Loads • Load Case 1: Wind Load - 100 lbs {445 N} at each node
on windward face
• Load Case 2: Ice Load - 50 lbs per foot {730 N/m} on
each horizontal member
• Load Case 3: Load 1 + Load 2
Analysis Type Linear Static



STAAD - Pro Fundamentals STAAD - Pro V8i Ben

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

STAAD - Pro Fundamentals STAAD - Pro V8i Ben

Uploaded by

Copyright:

STAAD.

Bentley Institute Course Guide

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

©2000-2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

STAAD.Pro Fundamentals ii May-10

Model Generation _________________________________________ 1

May-10 iii STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Using “Circular Repeat” ___________________________________ 55

Finite Element Modeling ____________________________________ 75

Property Assignment ______________________________________ 111

STAAD.Pro Fundamentals iv May-10

Answers ________________________________________________ 113

Analyzing the Model _______________________________________ 181

May-10 v STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Viewing the Output File_______________________________________ 193

The Post Processor ________________________________________ 197

Steel Design ______________________________________________ 245

STAAD.Pro Fundamentals vi May-10

Yield Strength ___________________________________________ 251

Concrete Design __________________________________________ 283

May-10 vii STAAD.Pro Fundamentals

Reinforced Concrete Column Design ____________________________ 339

Exercise Problems _________________________________________ 349

STAAD.Pro Fundamentals viii May-10

May-10 1 Model Generation

Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Model Generation 2 May-10

May-10 3 Model Generation

The Start Page

Model Generation 4 May-10

May-10 5 Model Generation

Note: In order to ensure uniformity, this training session is accompanied by a dataset

Model Generation 6 May-10

Coordinate System Orientation and Base Unit System

May-10 7 Model Generation

• Regardless of the base unit setting, it is possible to change the current

 Exercise: Starting a New Project

Model Generation 8 May-10

May-10 9 Model Generation

A second dialog appears offering quick access to a variety of common

Model Generation 10 May-10

The STAAD.Pro Screen

Page Control Status Bar Data Area

May-10 11 Model Generation

Model Generation 12 May-10

STAAD.Pro Structural Entities

May-10 13 Model Generation

Model Generation 14 May-10

Creating Structure Geometry

Working with Grids

May-10 15 Model Generation

Model Generation 16 May-10

 Exercise: Setting up Grids

4 Click Create… in the Snap Node/Beam dialog.

May-10 17 Model Generation

11 Set the number of Construction Lines to 12 in both the X and Y directions

Model Generation 18 May-10

• The combinations of settings that can be produced using the Local

Relative Coordinate is NOT Relative Coordinate IS

May-10 19 Model Generation

Entering Structure Geometry

Hint: If the Snap Node/Beam dialog is not currently displayed, it can be

Model Generation 20 May-10

The Snap Node/Beam button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog should be

May-10 21 Model Generation